section 2 tender and contract form for works

section 2 tender and contract form for works

Ministry of Home Affairs

(Government of India)

DELHI POLICE

TENDER AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT

FOR

Construction of Balance Work of Police Station and Residential Quarters at Greater Kailash-I, New Delhi

Tender No:

RITES/CP/TC/DP/GK-I/8881-53/Balance Work/2016

Part – 1 Technical Bid

SECTION – 1 – NOTICE INVITING TENDERS AND INSTRUCTIONS TO

TENDERERS

SECTION – 2 – TENDER AND CONTRACT FORM

[DELETED]

SECTION – 3 – SPECIAL CONDITIONS

SECTION – 4 – SCHEDULE A TO F

SECTION – 5 – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS & APPROVED MAKES

SECTION – 6 – DRAWINGS

October – 2016

RITES LTD.

(A GOVERNMENT OF INDIA ENTERPRISE)

RITES BHAWAN-II, PLOT NO-144, SECTOR-44, GURGAON-122 003

HARYANA

1

S.No.

PART – 1 (Technical Bid)

Section No 1

Section No 2

Section No 3

Section No 4

Section No 5

Section No 6

PART – 2 (Financial Bid)

RITES LTD.

TENDER AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT

CONTENTS

Notice Inviting Tender and Instructions to Bidders.

Tender and Contract Form

Special Conditions

Schedules A to F

Technical Specifications

Details

[DELETED]

and Approved make

Page

PERCENTAGE & ITEM

RATE TENDER

PART -3

Section No 7

Section No 8

Section No 9

Section No 10

Drawings

SCHEDULE (BILL) OF QUANTITIES

Abstract of cost of all schedules

Details of quoted percent and amount – Schedule wise –

Schedules 1 to 7

General Conditions of Contract *

Conditions of Contract

Clauses of Contract

RITES Safety Code

RITES Model Rules for Protection of Health and Sanitary

Arrangements for Workers

RITES Contractor’s Labour Regulations Section No 11

*General Conditions of Contract 2015 (Compilation of Sections 7 to 11) is available with all correction slips upto date, in RITES website www.rites.com

2

SECTION- 1

NOTICE INVITING TENDER AND

INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS

3

SECTION 1

NOTICE INVITING TENDER AND INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 Tender Notice

Tenders are invited through E-Tendering system by RITES Ltd., a Public Sector Enterprise under the Ministry of Railways, acting for and on behalf of “ Delhi Police” (Employer) as an Agent / Power of

Attorney Holder, from working contractors (including contractors who have executed works within the last five years reckoned from the scheduled date of opening of tender) of Railways, CPWD, MES,

DOT, R ITES, S tate P WD or any ot her C entral / S tate Government Department, Central / S tate

Government Undertaking or their subsidiaries, Municipal Body, Autonomous Body of Central / State

Governments or Public Ltd., Companies listed on Stock Exchange in India or Abroad or Subsidiaries of such companies for the work of “

Construction of Balance Work of Police Station and

Residential Quarters at Greater Kailash-I, New Delhi”

(Note: Throughout t hese bi dding docu ments, the t erms ‘bid’ and ‘tender’ and t heir derivatives are synonymous).

1.2 Estimated Cost of Work

The work is estimated to cost Rs. 15.21 Crore (Rupees Fifteen Crore Twenty-One Lac only). The estimate is generally based on CPWD Delhi Schedule of Rates 2014 duly enhanced by cost index of

0.95% (negative) at Delhi as on 01.04.2015 (for Civil Works) published by C PWD and partly o n market rates for non-schedule items. This Estimate, however, is given merely as a rough guide.

1.3 Time for Completion

The time allowed for completion will be 10 months from the date of start which is defined in Schedule

‘F’ under Clause 5.1(a) of Clauses of Contract.

1.4 Brief Scope of Work:

The w ork shal l i nclude t he B alance W orks of P olice S tation B uilding, R esidential Quarters,

Internal & External Electrification work, Lifts, Fire Fighting work, Solar Water Heating System

etc.

1.5 Availability of Site: The site for the work is available.

1.6 Deadline for submission of bids: 11.00 Hrs. on. 16.11.2016.

The E mployer m ay ex tend t he deadl ine for su bmission o f Tenders by i ssuing an a mendment i n writing in accordance with Clause 6.3 in which case all rights and obligations of the Employer and the

Tenderer previously subject to the original deadline will be subject to new deadline.

1.7 Date & Time of opening of bids: 11.30 Hrs. on 16.11.2016.

1.8 Pre-bid Clarification Start time & date:

10.00 Hrs. on 25.10.2016.

Pre-Bid Conference: The pre-bid conference will be he ld at 14:30 Hrs. on 03 .11.2016 at ROC-II,

RITES Bhawan, Plot No.-144, Sector-44, Gurgaon. All prospective bidders are requested to attend the aforesaid pre-bid conference.

4

1.9 Pre-bid Clarification End Time & date: 14.30 Hrs. on 03.11.2016.

2.0 QUALIFICATION CRITERIA TO BE SATISFIED

2.1 The Qualification Criteria to be satisfied are given at Annexure I enclosed.

2.2 The Qualification Criteria to be satisfied will depend on the category of works, whether Normal or Large. Normal Works are those costing up t o Rs.100 Crores each and Large Works are those costing more than Rs.100 Crores. The work for which the Tender is being invited falls under the category of *

Normal

2.3 The Qualification Criteria to be satisfied will also depend on whether the Work falls in Normal area or Difficult area. Difficult area includes North East States, Jammu & Kashmir, Andaman

& Nicobar Islands and the 60 districts requiring Integrated Action Plan of Government of India

(List available at Annexure X). Normal area covers all areas other than difficult area. The work for which this Tender has been invited falls under *Normal Area.

2.4 In this Tender Joint Venture is not allowed.

2.5 The documents to be furnished by the Bidder to prove that he is satisfying the Qualification

Criteria laid down should all be in the Bidder’s name, except in cases where though the name has changed, t he ow ners continued t o r emain t he sa me and i n ca ses of am algamation of entities.

3.0 FORMAT AND CHECK LIST FOR SUBMISSION OF INFORMATION ON QUALIFICATION

CRITERIA

3.1 The i nformation to be furnished and t he docu ments to be encl osed sh all be as per C lause

28.0 hereinafter.

4.0 CONTENTS OF TENDER DOCUMENT

4.1 Each se t o f Tender or Bidding D ocument w ill comprise t he D ocuments listed bel ow and addenda issued in accordance with clause 6:

PART – 1: - Technical Bid Packet

Section 1 Notice Inviting Tender and Instructions to Tenderers including Annexures

Section 2

Section 3

Section 4

Section 5

Section 6

Tender and Contract Form [DELETED]

Special Conditions.

Schedules A to F

Technical Specifications

Drawings and Approved make

PART – 2: - Financial Bid Packet: Schedule of Quantities (Bill of Quantities)

PART – 3: - General Conditions of Contract-2015: (Read with correction Slip Nos. Nil)

Section 7

Section 8

Conditions of Contract

Clauses of Contract

Section 9 RITES Safety Code

Section 10 RITES Model Rules for protection of Health and Sanitary arrangements for

Workers

Section 11 RITES Contractor’s Labour Regulations

5

4.2 Part - 3, General Conditions of Contract (Compilation of Sections 7 to 11) as also Correction

Slips to GCC are available in RITES website <www.rites.com> under link ‘Tenders’.

4.3 Part 3 of the tender, i.e. General Conditions of Contract (Compilation of section 7 to 11) is not uploaded as a part of this tender document because as stated in sub clause 4.2 above, the same is available separately on RITES’ website and can be seen / downloaded from there.

The bidder need not submit / upload Part 3 of the tender as a part of his offer but he must, nevertheless, read the same. It shall be pr esumed that the bidder has read the contents of

General Conditions of Contract and up to date Correction Slips thereto and the same will be binding upon hi m. The su ccessful bi dder w ill be r equired to si gn the complete t ender document i.e., Part -1, Part-2, Part-3 and Correction slips, if any, thereto.

5.0 ACCESSING / PURCHASING OF BID DOCUMENTS

(a) To participate in the E–Bid submission for RITES, it is mandatory for the bidders to get their firms registered with E–Procurement portal https://rites.eproc.in.

(b) Bidder should enroll themselves on the E-Procurement portal by clicking the option “New

Registration” link available on t he home page. A Bidder Registration link containing the

detailed guidelines for e-procurement system is available on the RITES E-Procurement portal.

During registration, the bidders should provide the correct/true information including a v alid em ail-id. A ll co rrespondence sh all be m ade di rectly with t he co ntractors/bidders through the email-id provided. The registration charges are INR 3900/- (Service Tax extra as applicable) and t his is required to be pai d to M/s C1 India Pvt. Ltd. through integrated

E–payment g ateway. T he r egistration w ill be a pproved onl y af ter r eceipt o f pay ments.

Validity of registration is for three years. In case of any difficulty faced during registration you are requested to contact e-Tendering Helpdesk Number provided on E-Procurement portal.

(c) It is mandatory for all bidders to have class – III Digital Signature Certificate (DSC) in the name o f the per son w ho w ill si gn t he bi d from any of l icensed C ertifying A gency ( CA).

Bidders can see the list of licensed CAs from the link http://www.cca.gov.in.

(d) Bidders can view / download Part-1 and Part-2 of bid documents from RITES E–

Procurement portal https://rites.eproc.in or RITES website http://www.rites.com and Part-3 of the bid documents from RITES website.

(e) Bidder shall ensure use of registered Digital Signature Certificate (DSC) only and safety of the same.

(f) Following may be noted:

- Bids ca n be su bmitted onl y dur ing v alidity of r egistration of bi dder w ith RITES E –

Procurement portal.

- The am endments / cl arifications to the bi d document, i f any , w ill be post ed on E -

Procurement portal / RITES website only.

(a) I f the firm i s already r egistered w ith E–procurement por tal o f R ITES and v alidity of registration has not expired, the firm is not required for fresh registration.

5.1 Clarifications on Tender Documents

A prospective Tenderer requiring any clarification on t he Tender Document may notify online only. Request for clarifications including request for Extension of Time for submission of Bid, if

6

any, m ust be r eceived not l ater t han 10 ( ten) da ys prior t o t he deadl ine for s ubmission o f tenders. D etails of su ch q uestions raised and cl arifications furnished will be up loaded i n

RITES website without i dentifying t he nam es of t he B idders who had r aised t he q uestions.

Any m odification o f the T ender D ocument a rising out o f such cl arifications will al so be uploaded on RITES website.

6.0 AMENDMENT OF TENDER DOCUMENT

6.1 Before t he deadline f or submission of tenders, the Tender Document may be modified by

RITES Ltd. by issue of addenda/corrigendum. Issue of addenda / corrigenda will however be stopped

7 days prior to the deadline for submission of tenders as finally stipulated.

6.2 Addendum/corrigendum, i f any , w ill be host ed o n website / E -procurement por tal and sh all become a par t o f t he tender docu ment. A ll Tenderers are adv ised t o se e t he w ebsite f or addendum/ corrigendum to the tender document which may be uploaded up to 7 days prior to the deadline for submission of Tender as finally stipulated.

6.3 To give prospective Tenderers reasonable time in which to take the addenda/ corrigenda into account in preparing their tenders, extension of the deadline for submission of tenders may be given as considered necessary by RITES.

7.0 PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BIDS

(a) Part-1 and P art-2 o f t ender docu ment may be dow nloaded f rom E –procurement portal o f

RITES and Part 3 from RITES website, prior to the deadline for submission of bids. The bids

(Part-1 and P art-2 only) shall be su bmitted online following the instructions appearing on t he screen. Part-3 of the tender document need not be submitted online but it shall be deemed to have been su bmitted. Users are requested to map their system as per the System settings

available on the link “System Requirement and Registration Manual” on the E-Procurement portal.

(b) After dow nloading / g etting t he t ender docu ment/schedules, t he B idder sh ould g o t hrough them carefully and then submit the documents as asked, otherwise bid will be rejected. It is construed that the bidder has read all the terms and conditions before submitting their offer.

Bidders are advised that prior to bid submission they should read the Bid Submission manual available on E-Procurement portal on RITES website.

(c) Bidders must ensure that all the pages of the documents mentioned in Clause 28 must be signed & stamped by authorised signatory and serially numbered.

(d) The bids shall be submitted online following the instructions appearing on the screen. Bidders may i nsert their eToken/Smart Card in their computer and Lo g ont o E -procurement po rtal using the User-Id and Password chosen during registration. Then they may enter the password of the eToken/ Smart Card to access the DSC.

(e) Prior to bid submission, bidder should get ready with the documents to be uploaded as part of the bid as indicated in the tender document/schedule. Generally they can be in Excel/PDF/ZIP formats. No other format is accepted. If there is more than one PDF document, then they can be cl ubbed t ogether i n a ZI P f ile f or upl oading. M aximum Single f ile si ze per mitted for uploading is 20 MB. One can upload multiple of such files in case information to be uploaded in single file exceeds 20MB.

(f) Cost of Tender Document & Earnest Money deposit (EMD)

7

During bid submission the bidder has to select the payment option as offline to pay the cost of tender document and E MD and enter details of the instruments. In case of exemption from payment of cost of tender document and EMD, the scanned copy of document in support of exemption will have to be uploaded by the bidder during bid submission. The onus of proving that the bidder is exempted from payment of cost of tender document and/or EMD lies on the bidder. In this connection, it should be noted that mere opening of bid does not mean that the bid has to be co nsidered by RITES as a valid bid. If later, it is discovered from the uploaded documents that bidder is not exempted from payment of cost of tender and/or EMD, his bid shall be treated as non-responsive.

Cost of Tender Document: The cost of tender document is Rs. 15,000/- (Rupees Fifteen

Thousand Only) which is non refundable. It shall be in the form of a Banker’s Cheque/ Pay

Order/ Demand Draft favoring “RITES Ltd.” issued by a scheduled commercial bank, payable at Gurgaon / Delhi. No other mode of payment will be accepted.

Earnest Money deposit (EMD) - The bids shall be accompanied by total Earnest Money

Deposit (EMD) of Rs. 15.21 Lac (Rupees Fifteen Lac Twenty-One Thousand only) in the form specified in

Clause 9 hereinafter.

Upload sca nned co py of acce ptable i nstruments for E MD and co st o f Tender docu ment i n different files (Either in PDF or zip format) during on-line submission of Bid. These documents shall be deposited in “ORIGINAL” in a sealed envelope within a week from the date of opening to.

JGM (Tender Cell), 3 rd

Floor, RITES O ffice Complex – II, RITES BHAWAN, No-144,

Sector-44, Gurgaon- 122003. Failing which the bid shall be r ejected and the bidder shall be debarred from tendering in RITES Ltd. for a period of 02 (two) years, unless the lapse is condoned by t he A ccepting A uthority at t he r equest o f t he bi dder for v alid r easons. T he envelope should bear the tender details (tender no., tender name etc.).

(g) The bid both technical & financial (i.e., Part-1 and Part-2) should be submitted online in the prescribed format. No other mode of submission is accepted.

(h) Bid shall be digitally signed by the Authorized Signatory of the bidder and submitted “on-line”.

No hard copy of the documents (except those specifically asked for in the tender document) is required to be submitted.

(i) The bi dders will ha ve t o acce pt unco nditionally t he onl ine use r por tal ag reement w hich contains the Terms and Conditions of NIT including General and Special Terms & Conditions and ot her co nditions, i f any , al ong w ith on -line under taking i n su pport o f t he aut henticity regarding t he facts, figures, i nformation and do cuments furnished by t he B idder on -line in order to become an eligible bidder.

(j) The bidder has to digitally sign and upload the required bid documents one by one as indicated. B idders to n ote t hat t he v ery act of usi ng D SC for dow nloading t he bi ds and uploading their offers shall be deemed to be a confirmation that they have read all sections and pages of the tender/bid document including terms and conditions without any exception and have understood the entire document and are clear about tender requirements.

(k) The bidders are requested t o submit t he bids through online e-tendering system before t he deadline for submission of bids (as per Server System Clock displayed on the portal). RITES will not be hel d r esponsible f or any so rt o f d elay or t he di fficulties faced dur ing onl ine submission of bids by the bidders at the eleventh hour.

(l) The bidder may seek clarification online only within the specified period. The identity of bidder will not be di sclosed by the system. RITES Ltd. will clarify the relevant queries of bidders as

8

far as possible. The clarifications given will be visible to all the bidders intending to participate in that tender. The clarifications may be asked from the day of “Pre Bid Clarification Start Date and Time” till “Pre Bid Clarification End Date and Time”.

8.0 TENDER VALIDITY

The Tender shall be valid for a period of 90 days from the due date for submission of

Tender or any extended date as indicated in sub para below.

In exceptional circumstances, during the process of evaluation of tenders and prior to the expiry of the original time limit for Tender Validity, the Employer may request that the

Tenderers may extend the period of validity unconditionally for a specified additional period. The request and the tenderer’s response shall be made in writing/ e-mail. A

Tenderer may refuse the request without forfeiting his Earnest Money. A Tenderer agreeing to the request will not be permitted to modify his Bid but will be required to extend the validity of the Earnest Money for the period of the extension.

9.0 EARNEST MONEY

9.1 The Tender should be accompanied by earnest money of

Rs. 15.21 Lac (Rupees Fifteen

Lac Twenty-One Thousand only) in any one of the following forms:

Banker’s Cheque / Pay Order / Demand Draft issued by any Scheduled Commercial Bank drawn in favour of RITES Ltd. and payable at Gurgaon / Delhi.

9.2 Any Tender not accompanied by scanned copies of the instruments for payment of Earnest

Money and cost of tender document in an acceptable form shall be rejected by the Employer as non-responsive.

9.3

Refund of Earnest Money

The Earnest Money of the Tenderers whose Technical Bid is found not acceptable will be returned without interest soon after scrutiny of Technical Bid has been completed by the

Employer subject to provisions of Clause 9.4 (b). The Earnest Money of the Tenderers whose Technical Bid is found acceptable but who are neither the lowest nor the second lowest will be returned without interest within 07 days of opening of Financial Bid. The

Earnest Money of the remaining unsuccessful bidders will be released within seven days of the Accepting Authority’s decision on acceptance or otherwise of the tender subject to provisions of Clause 9.4 (b). The bidder shall submit RTGS/NEFT Mandate Form as per proforma given in Annexure VII, dully filled in.

9.4 The Earnest Money is liable to be forfeited a) if after bid opening, but before expiry of bid validity or issue of Letter of Acceptance, i) whichever is earlier, any Tenderer withdraws his tender or ii) makes any modification in the terms and conditions of the tender which are not acceptable to the Employer. b) I n case an y i nformation/document w hich may r esult i n the tenderer’s d isqualification i s concealed by the Tenderer or any statement/information/document furnished by the

9

Tenderer or i ssued by a B ank/Agency/third p arty a nd submitted by the tenderer, i s subsequently found to be false or fraudulent or repudiated by the said Bank/Agency/Third

Party” c) in the case of a successful Tenderer, if the Tenderer i) fails to furnish the Performance Guarantee within the period specified under Clause 1 of

“Clauses of Contract”. or ii) fails to commence the work without valid reasons within the period as specified in

Schedule F after the date of issue of Letter of Acceptance or from t he first d ate of handing over of the site, whichever is later.

In case of forfeiture of Earnest Money as prescribed hereinabove, the Tenderer shall not be allowed to participate in the retendering process of the work.

10.0 MODIFICATION/ SUBSTITUTION/ WITHDRAWL OF BIDS

10.1 The Tenderers shall submit offers which comply strictly with the requirements of the Tender

Document as amended from time to time as indicated in Clause 6.0 above. Alternatives or any modifications by the tenderer shall render the Tender invalid.

10.2 The bidder can modify, substitute, re-submit or withdraw its E–bid after submission but prior to the deadline for submission of bids. No Bid shall be modified, substituted or withdrawn by the bidder on or after the deadline for submission of bids. Withdrawal of bid after the deadline for submission of bids would result in the forfeiture of EMD.

10.3 Any modification in the Bid or additional information supplied subsequently to the deadline for submission of bids, unless the same has been explicitly sought for by RITES, shall be disregarded.

10.4 For modification of E–bid (Technical Bid), bidder has to detach its old bid from E–procurement portal and upload / re-submit digitally signed modified bid.

10.5 For withdrawal of bid, bidder has to click on withdrawal icon at E–procurement portal and can withdraw its E–bid.

10.6 After the bid submission on the portal, an acknowledgement number will be generated by the system w hich sh ould be pr inted by t he bi dder and k ept as a r ecord o f evidence f or onl ine submission of bid for the particular tender and will also act as an entry pass to participate in the bid opening.

10.7 The time settings fixed in the server side & displayed at the top of the tender site, will be valid for bid submission, in the e-tender system. The bidders should follow this time during bid submission.

10.8 All the data being entered by the bidders would be encrypted using PKI encryption techniques to ensure the secrecy of the data. The data entered w ill not be viewable by unaut horized persons during bi d su bmission & w ill not be viewable b y an y one un til t he dat e & t ime specified for bid opening.

10.9 The bidder should logout of the tendering system using the normal logout option available in the portal and not by selecting the (X) exit option in the browser.

11.0 AUTHORITY TO SIGN

a)

If the applicant is an individual, he should sign above his full type written name and current address. b)

If the applicant is a proprietary firm, the Proprietor should sign above his full type written name and the full name of his firm with its current address. c)

If the applicant is a firm in partnership, the Documents should be signed by all the partners of the firm above their full type written names and current addresses.

Alternatively, the Documents should be signed by the person holding Power of

10

Attorney for the firm in the Format at Annexure III. d)

If the applicant is a limited Company, or a Corporation, the Documents shall be signed by a duly authorized person holding Power of Attorney for signing the

Documents in the Format at Annexure III. e)

If the applicant is a Joint Venture, the Documents shall be signed by the Lead

Member holding Power of Attorney for signing the Document in the Format at

Annexure IV. The signatory on behalf of such Lead Partner shall be the one holding the Power of Attorney in the Format at Annexure III. Not Applicable.

11.1 Items to be kept in mind while furnishing details

While filling in Qualification Information documents and the Financial Bid, following should be kept in mind: i)

There shall be no additions or alterations except those to comply with the instructions issued by the Employer or as necessary to correct errors, if any, made by the Tenderers. ii)

Conditional Offer/ Tender will be rejected. Unconditional rebate/ discounts in the

Financial offer will however be accepted. iii)

The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any conditional rebate/discounts. While evaluating t he Bid Price, the conditional rebates/discounts which are in excess of the requirements of the bidding documents or otherwise result in accrual of unsolicited benefits to the Employer, shall not be taken into account. iv)

In case of Item Rate Tenders, if the same item figures in more than one section / part of Schedule of Quantities, the Tenderer should quote the same rate for that item in all sections / parts. If different rates are quoted for the same item, the least of the different r ates quoted o nly sh all be co nsidered for ev aluation o f that i tem i n al l sections / parts of the schedule of quantities.

11.2 Integrity Pact

(i)

The Bidder/Contractor is required to enter into an Integrity Pact with the

Employer, in the Format at Annexure VI. The Integrity Pact enclosed as

Annexure VI will be signed by RITES for and on behalf of Employer as its

Agent/Power of Attorney Holder at the time of execution of Agreement with the successful Bidder. While submitting the Bid, the Integrity Pact shall be signed by the duly authorized signatory of the Bidder/Lead Member of JV. In case of failure to submit the Integrity Pact duly signed and witnessed, along with the Bid, the Bid is likely to be rejected.

(ii)

In case of any contradiction between the Terms and Conditions of the Bid

Document and the Integrity Pact, the former will prevail.

Provided always that provision of this Clause 11.2 – Integrity Pact, shall be applicable only when so provided in Clause 11.2A below which will also stipulate the name and address of the Independent External Monitor as well as the Name, designation and address of the official nominated by the Employer to act as the

Liaison Officer between the Independent External Monitor and the Engineer-in-

Charge as well as the Contractor.

11.2A Whether Clause 11.2 (Integrity Pact) shall be applicable

Yes

11

If Yes, Name and Address of the Independent External Monitor –

Sh. Suresh Kumar (IRAS), Ex-Director, CONCOR,

D-401, R ail V ihar C lassic Apartments, Sushant Lok -III, S ector – 57, Gurgaon - 122003

Name, Designation and Address of RITES’ Liaison Officer:

Sh. Y. K. Sharma, GGM/B&A/RITES Ltd.,

1 st

Floor, RITES Bhawan – II, Plot No. 144, Sector -44, Gurgaon – 122003

12.0 TENDER OPENING, EVALUATION AND CLARIFICATIONS

12.1 The Employer will open all t he Tenders r eceived, in t he pr esence of t he T enderers or t heir representatives who choose t o at tend a t 11.30 Hrs. on 16.11.2016 in t he o ffice o f JGM

(Tender Cell), 3

Gurgaon- 122003. In the event of the specified date of the opening being declared a holiday by the Employer, the Tenders will be opened at the appointed time and location on t he next working day.

rd

Floor, RITES Office Complex –II, RITES BHAWAN, No-144, Sector-44,

12.2 Opening of bids will be done through online process. RITES reserve the right to postpone or cancel a sch eduled bid opening at any time prior to its opening. Information of the same will be displayed at RITES E-procurement portal.

12.3 Bid opening committee will open the bids online in the presence of bidders or their authorized representatives who ch oose t o at tend on ope ning dat e and t ime. A lso t he bi dders can participate onl ine dur ing the bi d openi ng pr ocess from their remote end t hrough t heir dashboard. The bi dder’s representatives, w ho ar e pr esent, sh all si gn i n an at tendance register. RITES shall subsequently examine and evaluate the bids in accordance with the provision set out in the tender document.

12.4 It will be the bidder’s responsibility to check the status of their Bid on-line regularly after the opening of bid till award of work. Additionally, information shall also be sent by system generated e-mail to bidder regarding deficiencies in the documents, if any and also request for clarification from the bidder. A system generated SMS alert will also be sent to the bidder. No separate communication will be sent in this regard. Non-receipt of e-mail and SMS will not be accepted as a reason of non-submission of deficient documents or confirmatory documents within prescribed time.

12.5 The bids will be evaluated for qualifying criteria as mentioned in Clause 2 hereinbefore. RITES shall not be responsible for any postal delay in receipt of all original documents including the cost of tender document and EMD. In case of non-receipt of these documents in original within the aforesaid period, the bid will be treated as non-responsive.

12.6 Two Packet System – Applicable

(a) (i) Envelope 1 containing scanned copy of Earnest Money along with Mandate Form as per

Annexure VII, Cost of Tender Document and sc anned copy of Authority to sign document of all the Tenderers will be opened first and checked. If any of the document(s) so furnished are not as per tender stipulations, the Envelope 2 of PACKET A (Technical Bid) and P ACKET B

(Financial B id) w ill not be opened and t he bi d i s treated as rejected. T he E nvelope 2 o f

PACKET A (Technical Bid) of other Tenderers who have furnished scanned copies of Earnest

Money, cost of Tender document and A uthority to sign as per tender stipulations will then be opened.

12

(b) The Employer will scrutinize the Technical Bids accepted for evaluation to determine whether each Tenderer

(i) has submitted ‘ Authority t o si gn’ as per C lause 11. 0 abov e and Integrity P act ( where applicable) duly signed and witnessed as per Clause 11.2 above;

(ii) meets the Qualification Criteria stipulated in Clause 2.0; and

(iii) conforms to all terms, conditions and specifications of the Tender Document without any modifications or conditions.

(c) If required, the Employer may ask any such Tenderer for clarifications on his Technical Bid. If a Tenderer does not submit the clarification/document requested, by the date and time set in the E mployer’s request for cl arification, the bi d o f su ch Tenderer i s likely t o be r ejected.

PACKET B (Financial Bid) of Tenderers whose Technical Bids are not found acceptable will not be opened. Tenderers whose T echnical B ids are f ound acce ptable will be ad vised accordingly and will also be i ntimated through e-mail the time and date and place where and when the PACKET B (Financial Bid) will be opened.

(d) At t he appoi nted pl ace, t ime and dat e, i n t he pr esence o f t he T enderers or their representatives who choose to be present, the Employer will open the envelopes containing the PACKET B (Financial Bid).

12.7 Single Packet System – Not Applicable

13.0 INSPECTION OF SITE BY THE TENDERERS

Tenderers are adv ised t o i nspect and ex amine t he si te and i ts surroundings and sa tisfy themselves before submitting their Tenders, as to the nature of the ground and sub-soil (as far as is practicable), t he form and nat ure o f t he site, t he m eans of acc ess to t he si te, t he accommodation t hey m ay r equire and i n g eneral sh all t hemselves obtain al l nece ssary information as to risks, contingencies and other circumstances which may influence or affect their Tender. A Tenderer sh all be deem ed to have f ull knowledge o f the si te w hether he inspects it o r no t and n o ex tra ch arges consequent on any m isunderstanding or ot herwise shall be allowed. The Tenderer shall be responsible for arranging and maintaining at his own cost all materials, tools & plants, water, electricity, access, facilities for workers and al l other services required for ex ecuting the w ork unl ess otherwise sp ecifically pr ovided f or i n the contract documents. Submission of a tender by a Tenderer implies that he has read this notice and all other contract documents and has made himself aware of the scope and specifications of the work to be done and of conditions and rates at which stores, tools and plant etc. will be issued to him by the Employer and local conditions and other factors having a bearing on the execution of the work.

14.0 EMPLOYER’S RIGHT ON ACCEPTANCE OF ANY TENDER

(i)

If required, the Employer may ask any Tenderer the breakdown of unit rates. If the

Tenderer does not submit the clarification by the date and time set in the Employers request for clarification, such Tender is likely to be rejected.

(ii)

The competent authority on behalf of the Employer does not bind himself to accept the lowest or any other Tender and reserves to himself the authority to reject any or all the Tenders received without the assignment of any reason. All Tenders in which any of the prescribed conditions is not fulfilled or any condition is put forth by the

Tenderer shall be summarily rejected.

13

15.0 CANVASSING PROHIBITED

Canvassing whether directly or indirectly, in connection with tenders is strictly prohibited and the tenders submitted by the Contractors who resort to canvassing will be liable to rejection.

16.0 EMPLOYER’s RIGHT TO ACCEPT WHOLE OR PART OF THE TENDER

The competent authority on behalf of the Employer reserves to himself the right of accepting the whole or any part of the tender and the Tenderer shall be bound to perform the same at the rates quoted.

17.0 MISCELLANEOUS RULES AND DIRECTIONS

17.1 The Tenderer sh all not be per mitted to t ender for w orks if hi s near r elative i s posted as

Associated Finance Officer between the grades of AGM(F) and J.M (F) in the concerned SBU

Unit of RITES or as an officer in any capacity between the grades of GGM/GM and Engineer

(both inclusive) of the concerned SBU of the Employer. He shall also intimate the names of persons who are working with him in any capacity or are subsequently employed by him and who are near relatives to any Gazetted officer in the organization of the Employer. Any breach of this condition by the Tenderer would render his Tender to be rejected.

No E ngineer o f Gazetted r ank or o ther Gazetted Officer e mployed i n E ngineering o r

Administrative duties in an Engineering Department of the Organisation of the Employer is allowed t o w ork as a co ntractor for a per iod o f one y ear a fter hi s r etirement from the

Employer’s service without the previous permission of the Employer in writing. The contract is liable to be cancelled if either the Contractor or any of his employees is found any time to be such a person who had not obtained the permission of the Employer as aforesaid before submission of the tender or engagement in the Contractor’s service.

17.2 If required by the Employer, the Tenderers shall sign a decl aration under the officials Secret

Act 1923, for maintaining secrecy of the tender documents drawings or other records connected w ith t he work given t o t hem. The unsu ccessful Tenderers sh all r eturn al l t he drawings given to them.

17.3 In the case of any Item rate tender where unit rate of any item/items appears unrealistic, such tender w ill be co nsidered as unbalanced and in ca se t he Tenderer i s unable t o p rovide satisfactory explanation, such a tender is liable to be disqualified and rejected.

17.4 Sales-tax/VAT ( except S ervice Tax), purchase t ax, turnover t ax or any other tax/ Cess on material, labour and Works in respect of this Contract shall be payable by the Contractor and the Employer w ill not entertain any cl aim whatsoever in r espect of the same. However, in respect of Service Tax, same shall be paid by the Contractor to the concerned department on demand and it will be reimbursed to him by the Engineer-in-Charge after satisfying that it has been actually and genuinely paid by the Contractor.

17.5 Each B idder sh all su bmit onl y one B id ei ther as an i ndividual or as a P roprietor i n a

Proprietary firm or as a P artner i n a P artnership firm o r as a D irector o f a l imited

Company/Corporation or as a Partner in a Joint Venture. Any Bidder who has submitted a Bid for a work, shall not be a witness for any other Bidder for the same work. Failure to observe the abov e st ipulations would r ender al l su ch T enders submitted as a B idder and / or as a witness, liable to summary rejection.

17.6 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters arising out of the Performance of the

Contract and shall, at his own expense, comply with all laws/ acts/ enactments/ orders/

14

regulations/ obl igations whatsoever of t he G overnment o f I ndia, S tate G overnment, Loca l

Body and any Statutory Authority.

17.7 In case the bidder does not quote his rate for any item(s), it will be presumed that the bidder has included the cost of that/those item(s) in the rates of other items and the rate for such item(s) sh all be co nsidered as Zero and t he t ender w ill be e valuated by the E mployer accordingly and the work executed by the successful bidder accordingly.

18.0 SIGNING OF CONTRACT AGREEMENT

18.1 The Tenderer whose tender has been accepted will be notified of the award by the Employer by issue of a ‘Letter of Acceptance’ prior to expiration of the Bid Validity period.

The Letter of Acceptance will be sent to the Contractor in two copies one of which he should return promptly, duly signed and stamped. The Letter of Acceptance will be a binding Contract between the Employer and the Contractor till the formal Contract Agreement is executed.

18.2 Within the period as specified in Clause 1 of ‘Clause of Contract’, of the date of issue of Letter of Acceptance, the successful Tenderer shall deliver to the Employer, Performance Guarantee and Additional Performance Guarantee (where applicable) in the format prescribed.

18.3 The Tenderer whose Tender is accepted shall be required to submit at his cost stamp papers of appropriate value as per the provisions of Indian Stamp Act within 15 days of the date of issue of Letter of Acceptance.

18.4 At t he same time t he E mployer not ifies the su ccessful Tenderer that his Tender has been accepted, the Employer will direct him to attend the Employer’s office within 28 days of issue of Letter of Acceptance for signing the Agreement in the proforma at Annexure V. The

Agreement will however be signed only after the Contractor furnishes Performance Guarantee and A dditional P erformance G uarantee (where appl icable) and hence , where j ustified, the period of 28 days stipulated above will be extended suitably

19.0 Pre Qualification Performa

The bidder shall fill the pre-qualification proforma at Annexure IX. The bid will be e valuated only co nsidering t hose det ails and co rresponding docu ments as mentioned i n A nnexure I X and no ot her details/ certificate/ document will be t aken in to consideration while evaluating the bid to decide whether the bidder is qualified or not. For similar work experience the details of only those works mentioned in Annexure IX may be given in Performa no. 1 attached to

Annexure-I.

15

20.0 Brief Notice Inviting e-Tenders

GGM/CP, RITES Ltd invites on behalf of “Delhi Police” Online item rate / percentage rate/

Item Rate + Percentage Rate / l ump su m bids on Single / Two packet system f or the following work

S.

N o.

NIT

No.

Name o f work&

Location

Cost of

Tender

Document

Rs.

Estimated

Cost put to bid Rs.

Earnest

Money Rs.

Period of

Compl etion

Last Date & time of submission of bid, EMD, cost of tender document and other

Documents as specified in the press notice

Time

& Date of opening bid of

1 2

1 RITES/C

P/TC/DP/

GK-

I/8881-

53/Balan ce

Work/201

6

3

Construction of Balance

Work of

Police

Station and

Residential

Quarters at

Greater

Kailash-I,

New Delhi

4 5 6 7

15,000/ - 15.21 Crore 15.21 Lac 10

Months

8

11.00 Hrs. on

16.11.2016.

9

11.30 Hrs. on

16.11.2016

21.0 The bid document consisting of tender drawings, specifications, the schedule of quantities of various types of items to be executed and the set of terms and conditions of the contract to be complied with and other necessary documents can be seen on website www.rites.com free of cost.

22.0 After submission of the bid the bidder can re-submit revised bid any number of times but before last time and date of submission of bid as notified.

23.0 While submitting the revised / modified Financial bid, the bidder can revise / modify the rate of one or more item(s) any number of times (he need not re-enter rate of all the items) but before last time and date of submission of bid as notified.

24.0 The bid submitted shall become invalid and e-Tender processing fee shall not be refunded if:

(i)

The bidder is found ineligible.

(ii)

The bidder does not upload all the documents (including service tax registration/ VAT registration/ Sales Tax registration) as stipulated in t he bid document including the undertaking about deposition of physical EMD of the scanned copy of EMD uploaded.

16

(iii)

If any discrepancy is noticed b etween t he documents as upl oaded at t he time of submission of bid and hard copies as submitted physically by the lowest bidder in the office of bid opening authority.

(iv)

The bidder does not deposit physical instruments of EMD within a week of opening of technical bid.

25.0 Those contractors not registered on t he website mentioned above, are required to g et registered beforehand. If needed they can be imparted training on online bidding process as per details available on the website.

26.0 The intending bidder must have valid Class-III digital signature to submit the bid.

27.0 On opening date, the bidder can login and see the bid opening process. After opening of bids he will receive the competitor bid sheets.

28.0 List of Documents to be scanned and uploaded within the period of bid submission: -

1. Banker’s Cheque/ Pay Order/ Demand Draft towards cost of Tender Document in accordance with Clause 7.0 (f) hereinbefore

2.

OR

Document in support of exemption from payment of cost of Tender Document

Banker’s Cheque / P ay Order/ Demand Draft and B ank Guarantee in format given at

Annexure V III towards Earnest M oney D eposit ( EMD) i n acco rdance w ith C lause 9 hereinbefore

OR

Document in support of exemption from payment of EMD

3. Authority to Sign (if required as per Clause 11.0 hereinbefore) in the format given at Annexure

III / Annexure IV as applicable.

4. Documents i n su pport o f m eeting t he cr iterion o f A nnual Fi nancial T urnover i n acco rdance with Para 1 of Annexure I.

5. Certificates in support of meeting the criterion of Similar Work Experience in accordance with

Para 2(a) of Annexure I.

6. Details of Similar works completed in the format given at Performa 1 in Annexure I.

7. Certificates in su pport of meeting the cr iterion of Construction Experience in k ey act ivities / specified components in accordance with Para 2(b) of Annexure I. -DELETED

8. Solvency Certificate in accordance with Para 3(i) of Annexure I.

9. Documents ( Audited B alance S heets, P rofit & Loss Statements and A uditor’s Reports) i n support of meeting the Profitability criterion in accordance with Para 4 of Annexure I.

10. Documents in support of meeting t he criterion of N et Worth in accordance with Para 5 of

Annexure I.

11. Declaration by the Bidder in the format given in Performa 3 of Annexure I.

12. Integrity Pact as per Annexure VI including Annexure A thereof.

13. RTGS/NEFT details as per Annexure- VII

14. Annexure IX duly filled in.

15. Self-attested copy of a certificate, confirming that the applicant is working contractor or has executed any work within the last five years reckoned from the date of opening of tender, issued by Government O rganizations / S emi G overnment O rganizations of

Central or S tate Government; or by P ublic S ector U ndertakings / A utonomous Bodies of

Central / State Government or their Subsidiaries / by Public Ltd. Companies listed in Stock

Exchange in India or Abroad or subsidiaries of such companies or by one of the aforesaid organizations as a lead member (having equity stake of 51% or more) of a Joint Venture (JV) for a w ork executed for the JV or for PPP projects, if the bidder has executed a work for a concessionaire who is one of the aforesaid organizations, then the certificate issued by such concessionaire or by the public authority concerned, will also be acceptable.

17

.

16. Self-Attested Copy of Partnership Deed/ Memorandum and Articles of Association of the firm.

17. Self-Attested copy of Corrigendum(s), if any.

18. Any other document if specified in the correction slips to the Tender Document.

19. Self-certified co py of t he Jo int V enture A greement/Memorandum o f Understanding as per

Annexure II & Annexure IV-DELETED

20. Power of A ttorney i n favor of Lead M ember as t he Lead M ember o f J V ex ecuted by t he authorized representatives of all the members of JV-DELETED

21. Self-attested co py o f a certificate, confirming t hat t he P artners including Lead P artner dul y signed by the Authorized representative of each Partner/Member of Joint Venture is a working contractor o r has executed any work w ithin t he l ast five years reckoned f rom t he dat e o f opening of Tender, issued by Railways, CPWD, MES, DOT, RITES, State PWD or any other

Central/State Government Undertaking, Municipal Body, Autonomous Body of Central or State

Government or Public Limited Company listed on NSE/BSE-DELETED

22. Self-Attested co py of details regarding service tax registration/ VAT registration/ Sales Tax registration as per Clause 24.0 (ii) of NIT

Note: - Any clarification / deficient document(s) sought by RITES Ltd. as per Clause 12.4 & Clause

12.6 (c) shall be submitted by the bidder.

29.0 List of Documents to be submitted physically by Lowest (L1) Bidder within a week of the opening of Financial Bid: -

1.

Self-attested copy of PAN/TAN issued by income Tax Department

2.

Self-attested copy of registration under Labour Laws like PF, ESI etc.

3.

Self-attested copy of ISO 9000 Certificate. (if any)

4.

Self-attested copies of all the documents specified in Clause 28.0 above.

30.0 RITES Ltd. may approach any Bank, Individual, Employer, Firm or Corporation, whether mentioned in the documents submitted by bidders or not, to verify the credentials and general reputation of the bidder and where JV is allowed the credentials and general reputation of lead member & each Member of Joint Venture.

18

-

ANNEXURE – I

QUALIFYING CRITERIA FOR WORKS CONTRACTS

1.

Annual Financial Turnover :

Notes:

-

-

The bidder should h ave achieved a minimum annual financial t urnover of

Rs. 30.42 Crore in any one of the last 3 Financial Years.

The financial turnover will be taken as given under the head “Income” in audited Profit and Loss Account and excluding non-recurring income, income from other sources and stock. It is clarified that the Financial Turnover means relevant revenue as recorded in the Income side of Profit and Loss Account. It does not mean Profit.

Closing stocks in whatsoever manner should not form part of turnover.

-

Weightage of 7% (compounded annually) shall be given for equating the financial turnover of the previous years to the current year.

-

For considering the Financial Years, for example for a work for which the Tender is being opened in Financial Year 2014-15, the last three Financial Years will be 2013-14, 2012-

13 and 2011-12. For a Tender opened on (say) 05.09.14 (F.Y. 2014-15), with weightage of 7% compounded annually, the weightages to be applied on the Turnover of the previous three Financial Years will be: F.Y. 2013-14 = 1.070; F.Y. 2012-13 =

1.145; F.Y. 2011-12 = 1.225.

-

The Bidder should furnish Annual Financial Turnover for each of the last 3 Financial

Years in tabular form and give reference of the document (with page no.) relied upon in support of meeting the Qualification Criterion.

-

The Bidder should su bmit self-attested copy of Auditor’s R eport along with Balance

Sheet and Profit and Loss Statement along with Schedules for the relevant Financial

Year in which the minimum criterion is met. Provisional audit reports or certified statements will not be accepted.

-

If the Audited Balance Sheet for the immediately preceding year is not available in case of t ender opened before 30th Sept., audited Balance Sheets, Profit and Loss

Statements and other financial statements of t he three Financial Years immediately preceding the previous Financial Year may be adopted for evaluating the credentials of the Bidder.

In case JV is permitted the following provisions will apply: - Not Applicable

19

2.

WORK EXPERIENCE

a) Similar Works Experience

(i)

For works in normal areas (other than difficult areas)

The Bidder should have satisfactorily completed in his own name or proportionate share as a member of a Joint Venture, at least one similar work of minimum value of

Rs. 12.17 Crore OR at l east t wo si milar w orks each o f m inimum v alue o f

Rs. 7.61 Crore OR at l east t hree si milar w orks each o f m inimum v alue o f

Rs. 6.08 Crore during the last 5 (five) years prior to the last stipulated date for submission of the Bid. Works completed prior to the cutoff date shall not be considered.

Similar Works :

Similar Works shall mean the

Work of Construction of RCC Framed Structure

Residential / Institutional / Commercial / Hospital / Office Complex carried out in India.

Notes :

-

A weightage of 7% (compounded annually from the date of completion of the work to the submission of the Bid) shall be given for equating the value of works of the previous years to the current year.

-

Only such works shall be considered where physical completion of entire work is over or commissioning of work has been done, whichever is earlier.

-

The Bidder should submit the details of such similar completed works as per the format at

Proforma-1 enclosed.

-

Works carried out by another Contractor on behalf of the Bidder on a back to back basis will not be considered for satisfaction of the Qualification Criterion by the Bidder.

-

Credential certificate i ssued by G ovt. Organizations / S emi Govt. Organizations of

Central or State Government; or by Public Sector Undertakings / Autonomous Bodies of

Central or State Government; or their subsidiaries / by Public Ltd. Companies listed in

Stock E xchange i n India or A broad or su bsidiaries of su ch co mpanies shall onl y be accepted for assessing the eligibility of a Tenderer. Certificates issued by one of the aforesaid organizations as a lead member (having equity stake of 51% or more) of a joint venture ( JV) for a w ork executed f or t he JV, w ill al so be acce ptable. I n ca se o f P PP projects, i f the bi dder h as executed a w ork for a co ncessionaire w ho i s one o f t he aforesaid or ganization, t hen t he ce rtificate i ssued by such co ncessionaire or by the public authority concern, will also be acceptable.

-

The cutoff date shall be calculated backwards from the last stipulated date for submission/ opening of Tender i.e. for a Tender which is being opened on 06.08.2014, the cutoff date shall be 07.08.09.

-

In case JV is permitted the following provisions will apply:

Not applicable

20

Large Works: All the partners shall jointly meet this criterion.

Normal Works: The Partner-in-charge/Lead Member shall singly meet this criterion.

b)

Construction Experience in key activities/specified components: Not Applicable

3.

SOLVENCY CERTIFICATE AND SERVICING OF LOAN / CREDIT LIMIT:

(i)

A Solvency Certificate of minimum solvency of Rs. 6.08 Crore (suggested format at Proforma 2) from a Scheduled Commercial Bank issued not earlier than 6 months from the last date for submission of tender is required to be submitted by the bidder.

Notes:

-

The certificate so produced by the Bidder may be got verified from the issuing Bank.

-

In case JV is permitted the following provisions will apply:

Not applicable

- In case JV is permitted the following provisions will apply: Not applicable

4.

PROFITABILITY :

The Bidder should be a profit (net) making firm and should have made profit during any two of the past 3 Financial Years immediately preceding the deadline for submission of b ids. If the audited Balance Sheet for the immediately preceding year is not available in case of tenders opened before 30th September, Audited Balance Sheets of the three financial Years immediately preceding the previous Financial Year shall be considered.

The Bidder should furnish figures of net profit of last 3 years in a tabular form and submit attested copies of Auditor’s Reports along with audited Balance Sheets and Profit and Loss Statements for the last three Financial Years. Specific reference with page no. of document which proves satisfaction of this Qualifying Criterion should be indicated in the tabular statement.

Notes:

In case JV is permitted, the following provisions will apply:

Not Applicable

5.

NET WORTH : The Bidder should have positive Net Worth of at least Rs. 2.28 Crore.

21

Notes:

-

Net Worth shall be computed from the bidder’s audited balance sheet of the last financial year ending on a date not prior to 18 months from the due date of submission of the tender (or, if the date is extended, such extended date of submission).

-

In case JV is permitted, the following provisions will apply: Not Applicable

6.

POINTS TO NOTE ON SATISFACTION OF QUALIFYING CRITERIA IN CASE OF BOTH

LARGE AND NORMAL WORKS

a) Sub-Contractor’s Experiences and Resources

Sub-Contractors’ Experiences and Resources will not be taken into account in determining the Bidder’s compliance with the qualifying criteria.

b) Experiences and Resources of the Parent Company and other subsidiary companies

If the Bidder is a wholly owned subsidiary of a company, the experience and resources of the owner/parent company or its other subsidiaries will not be taken i nto account. However, if the Bidder is a Company, the Experience and

Resources of its subsidiaries will be taken into consideration.

7.

DISQUALIFICATION ON CERTAIN GROUNDS

Even though the Bidders may meet the above qualifying criteria, they are subject to be disqualified if they have a)

Concealed any information/document which may result in the Bidder’s disqualification or if any statement/information/document furnished by the Bidder or issued by a

Bank/Agency/third party and submitted by the Bidder, is subsequently found to be false or fraudulent or repudiated by the said Bank/Agency/Third Party. In such a case, besides Bidder’s liability to action und er para 9.4 of Instructions to Tenderers, the

Bidder is liable to face the penalty of banning of business dealings with him by RITES. b)

Records of any contract awarded to them, having been determined during the past three years prior to the dead line for submission of bids. c)

Their business banned or suspended by any Central/State Government Department/

Public Undertaking or Enterprise of Central/State Government and such ban is in force. d)

Not submitted all the supporting documents or not furnished the relevant details as per the prescribed format.

A declaration to the above effect in the form of affidavit on stamp paper of Rs. 10/- duly

attested by Notary/Magistrate should be submitted as per format given in Proforma 3 enclosed.

22

Proforma-1

LIST OF SIMILAR WORKS SATISFYING QUALIFICATION

CRITERION COMPLETED DURING THE LAST 5

YEARS

S.

No.

Client's

Name and

Address

Name of the

Work &

Locatio n

Scope of work carried out by the

Bidder

Agreement

/ Letter of

Award No. and date

Contract Value

Awarded Actual on completion

Date of start

Date of Completion Reasons for delay in completi on if any

As per

LOA/

Agreement

Actual

Ref. of documen t (with page no.) in support of meeting

SEAL AND SIGNATURE OF THE

BIDDER

Note:

1.

In support of having completed above works, attach self-attested copies of the completion certificate from the owner/client or Executing Agency / Consultant appointed by owner /

Client indicating the name of work, the description of work done by the Bidder, date of start, date of completion (contractual & actual) and contract value as awarded and as executed by the Bidder. “Contract Value” shall mean gross value of the completed work including cost of materials supplied by the owner/client but excluding those supplied free of cost.

2.

Credential certificate issued by Govt. Organizations / Semi Govt. Organizations of Central or State Government; or by Public Sector Undertakings / Autonomous Bodies of Central or

State Government; or their subsidiaries / by Public Ltd. C ompanies l isted i n S tock

Exchange in India or Abroad or subsidiaries of such companies shall only be accepted for assessing the eligibility of a Tenderer. Certificates issued by one of the aforesaid organizations as a lead member (having equity stake of 51% or more) of a joint venture

(JV) for a work executed for the JV, will also be acceptable. In case of PPP projects, if the bidder has executed a work for a concessionaire who is one of the aforesaid organization, then the certificate issued by such concessionaire or by the public authority concern, will also be acceptable.

23

3.

Information must be furnished for works carried out by the Bidder in his own name or proportionate share as member of a Joint Venture. In the latter case details of contract value including extent of financial participation by partners in that work should be furnished.

4.

If a Bidder has got a work executed through a Subcontractor on a back to back basis, the Bidder cannot include such a work for his satisfying the Qualification Criterion even if the Client has issued a Completion Certificate in favour of that Bidder.

5.

Use a separate sheet for each partner in case of a Joint Venture.

6.

Only similar works completed during the last 5 years prior to the last stipulated date for submission of Bid, which meet the Qualification Criterion need be included in this list.

7.

Only those works mentioned in Annexure IX shall be given in this Performa.

24

Proforma 2

SOLVENCY CERTIFICATE FROM A NATIONALISED OR A

SCHEDULED BANK:

This is to certify that to the best of our knowledge and information, M/s having their registered office at

,

, a customer of our Bank, is a reputed company with a good financial standing and can be treated as solvent to the extent of Rs. .

This certificate is issued without any guarantee or risk and responsibility on the Bank or any of its officers.

Signature with d ate

Senior Bank Manager (Name of Officer issuing the C ertificate)

Name, address & Seal of the Bank/ Branch

Note:

Banker’s Certificate should be on letter head of the Bank.

25

Proforma 3

DECLARATION BY THE BIDDER

(Affidavit on Non-Judicial Stamp Paper of Rs.10/- duly attested by Notary / Magistrate) This is to certify that We, M/s. confirm that: - i)

in submission of this offer

We have visited the site of work and seen the working conditions, approach road / path, availability of water, electricity, construction labour, construction materials and other relevant requirements connected with the work. ii)

We have neither concealed any information/document which may result in our disqualification nor made any misleading or false representation in the forms, statements and attachments in proof of the qualification requirements; iii)

During the past three years prior to the deadline for submission of bids, no contract awarded to us has been determined. iv)

No Central / State Government Department/ Public Sector Undertaking or Enterprise of

Central / State Government h as b anned/suspended business dealings with us as on date. v)

We have submitted all the supporting documents and furnished the relevant details as per prescribed format and we agree to submit, without delay additional information / documents which may be demanded by RITES Ltd. vi)

List of Similar Works satisfying Qualification Criterion indicated in Proforma 1 does not include any work which has been carried out by us through a Subcontractor on a back to back basis. vii)

The information and documents submitted with the Tender and those to be submitted su bsequently by way of clarifications are correct and we are fully responsible for the correctness of the information and documents submitted by us. viii)

We have not failed to service the principal amount or interest or both of a loan account

/ credit limit from any Bank or Financial Institution during a period of one year prior to the deadline for submission of bids. ix)

*The original instruments of EMD and Cost of Tender Document, in physical form shall be deposited by us with RITES Ltd. within a week from the date of opening of Technical

Bid failing which RITES Ltd. may reject the bid and also take action to debar us from participating in Tenders invited by RITES Ltd. for a period of two years.

OR

*We are exempted from payment of cost of Tender Document and EMD and the certified copies of original documents in support of such exemption shall be deposited by us with

26

RITES Ltd. within a week from the date of opening of Technical Bids and original documents produced on demand, failing which RITES Ltd. may reject the bid and also t ake action t o debar us from p articipating in Tenders i nvited by RITES Ltd. for a period of two years.

(* Delete whichever is not applicable)

x)

We understand that in case any statement/information/document furnished by us or to be furnished by us in connection with this offer, is found to be misleading or false, our

EMD in full will be forfeited and business dealings will be banned.

SEAL, SIGNATURE & NAME OF THE BIDDER signing this document

27

ANNEXURE II

DRAFT MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING EXECUTED BY MEMBERS OF THE

CONSORTIUM / JOINT VENTURE

(On each firm’s Letter Head)

NOT APPLICABLE

28

ANNEXURE III

FORMAT FOR POWER OF ATTORNEY TO AUTHORISED SIGNATORY

POWER OF ATTORNEY

(To be executed on non-judicial stamp paper of the appropriate value in accordance with relevant

Stamp Act. The stamp paper to be in the name of the firm/ company who is issuing the Power of

Attorney).

We, M/s. (name of the firm/company with address of the registered office) hereby

Constitute, appoint and authorise Mr./Ms. (Name and residential address) who is presently employed with us and holding the position of and whose signature is given below as our Attorney to do in our name and our behalf all or any of the acts, deeds or things necessary or in cidental to our bid for

“Construction of B alance W ork of P olice S tation and

Residential Staff Quarters at Greater Kailash-I, New Delhi”, including signing and submission of application / proposal, participating in the meetings, responding to queries, submission of information / documents and generally to represent us in all the dealings with RITES or any other

Government Agency or any person, in connection with the works until culmination of the process of bidding, till the Contract Agreement is entered into with RITES and thereafter till the expiry of the

Contract Agreement.

We hereby agree to ratify all acts, deeds and things lawfully done by our said Attorney pursuant to this Power of Attorney and that all acts, deeds and things done by our aforesaid Attorney shall always be deemed to have been done by us.

(Add in the case of a Consortium/Joint Venture)

Our firm is a Member/Lead Member of the Consortium of

.

Dated this the day of 20

(Signature and name of authorized signatory being given Power of Attorney)

, and

29

(Signature and name in block letters of *All the partners of the firm, * Authorized Signatory for the Company)

(* Strike out whichever is not applicable)

Seal of firm/ Company

Witness 1:

Name:

Address:

Occupation:

Notes:

-

-

Witness 2:

Name:

Address:

Occupation:

In case the Firm / Company is a Member of a Consortium/ JV, the authorized signatory has to be the one employed by the Lead Member.

The mode of execution of the Power of Attorney should be in accordance with the procedure, if any, laid down by the applicable law and the charter documents of the executant(s) and when it is so required the same should be under common seal affixed in accordance with the required procedure.

30

ANNEXURE IV

FORMAT FOR POWER OF ATTORNEY TO LEAD MEMBER OF CONSORTIUM / JOINT

VENTURE

NOT APPLICABLE

31

ANNEXURE V

FORM OF AGREEMENT

(ON NON JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE)

Agreement No. _............................................................................. dated

THIS AGREEMENT is made on day of Two thousand between

RITES Ltd. a Government of India Enterprise and a Company registered under Companies Act,

1956 having its registered office at SCOPE Minar, Laxmi Nagar, Delhi - 110092 and its

Corporate Office at RITES BHAWAN, Plot No.1, Sector 29, Gurgaon (Haryana) representing through , RITES LIMITED acting for and on behalf of and as an Agent /Power of

Attorney Holder of “ Delhi P olice” hereinafter called the Employer (which expression shall, wherever the context so demands or requires, include their successors in office and assigns) on one part and M/s. hereinafter called the Contractor (which expression shall wherever the context so demands or requires, include his/ their successors and assigns) of the other part.

WHEREAS the Employer is desirous that certain works should be executed viz.

Construction of Balance Work of Police Station and Residential Staff Quarters at Greater

Kailash-I, New Delhi (brief description of the work) and has by Letter of Acceptance dated _ accepted a tender submitted by the Contractor for the execution, completion, remedying of any defects therein and maintenance of such works at a total Contract Price of Rs. (Rupees only)

NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH as follows:-

1.

In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meaning as are respectively assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to.

2.

The following documents in conjunction with addenda/ corrigenda to Tender Documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this agreement viz.

The Letter of Acceptance dated…….

Priced Schedule (Bill) of Quantities

.

Notice Inviting Tender and Instructions to Tenderers.

RITES Tender and Contract Form

[DELETED]

Special Conditions

Schedules A to F.

Technical S pecifications and a pproved m akes

Drawings and

Amendments to Tender Documents (List enclosed)

General Conditions of Contract (read with Correction Slip Nos. Nil) comprising of

(i)

Conditions of Contract

(ii)

Clauses of Contract

(iii)

RITES Safety Code

(iv)

RITES - Model Rules for the protection of Health and Sanitary arrangements for Workers

(v)

RITES – Contractor's Labour Regulations.

32

3.

In consideration of the payment to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to execute, complete, remedy defects therein and maintain the works in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the Contract.

4.

The Employer hereby covenants to pay to the Contractor in consideration of the execution, completion, remedying of any defects therein and maintenance of the works, t he contract price or such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the contract at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.

IN WITNESS whereof the parties hereto have caused their respective common seals to be hereinto affixed (or have herewith set their respective hands and seals) the day and year first above written.

SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED BY

____________________________

In the capacity of _____

On behalf of M/s. _________

______________________________ representing RITES LIMITED

In the capacity of Agent / Power of

Attorney Holder

For and on behalf of Delhi Police, New Delhi

(The Contractor)

In the presence of

2.

Witnesses (Signature, Name &

Designation)

1.

2.

(The Employer)

In the presence of

Witnesses (Signature, Name &

Designation)

1.

33

ANNEXURE VI

INTEGRITY PACT

Between

RITES LTD. acting for and on behalf of and as an Agent / Power of Attorney Holder of

_________________________________________hereinafter called the “Employer” AND -

___________________________________hereinafter referred to as "The Bidder/Contractor"

Preamble

The Employer intends to award, under laid down organizational procedures, contract/s for

Construction of Balance Work of Police Station and R esidential Staff Quarters at Greater

Kailash-I, New Delhi” The Employer values full compliance with all relevant laws and regulations, and economic use of resources, and of fairness and transparency in his relations with the Bidder/s and/or contractor/s.

In order to achieve these goals, the Employer will appoint an Independent External Monitor

(IEM) who will monitor the Tender process and execution of the contract for compliance with the principles mentioned above.

Section 1 – Commitments of the Employer

(1)

The Employer commits himself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption and to observe the following principles: -

1.

No employee of the Employer, personally or through family members, will in connection with the tender or for the execution of the contract, demand, take a p romise for or accept, for self or third person, any material or immaterial benefit which the person is not legally entitled to.

2.

The Employer will, during the tender process, treat all Bidders with equity and reason. The Employer will in particular, before and during the tender process, provide to all Bidders the same information and will not provide to any Bidder confidential/additional information through which the Bidder could obtain an advantage in relation to the tender process or the contract execution.

3.

The Employer will exclude from the process all known prejudiced persons.

(2)

If the Employer obtains information on the conduct of any of his employees which is a criminal offence under the IPC (Indian Penal Code) /PC (Prevention of Corruption) Act, or if there be a substantive suspicion in this regard, the Employer will inform its Chief

Vigilance Officer and in addition can initiate disciplinary action.

34

Section 2 – Commitments of the Bidder/Contractor

(1)

The Bidder/Contractor commits himself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption. He commits himself to observe the following principles during his participation in the tender process and during the contract execution.

1.

The Bidder/Contractor will not directly or through any other person or firm, offer, promise or give to any of the Employer’s employees involved i n t he tender process or the execution of the contract or to any t hird person any material or other benefit which he is not legally entitled to, in order to obtain in exchange any advantage of any kind whatsoever during the tender process or during the execution of the contract.

2.

The Bidder/Contractor will not enter with other Bidders into any undisclosed agreement or understanding, whether formal or informal. This applies in particular to prices, specifications, certifications, subsidiary contracts, submission or non-submission of bids or any other actions, to restrict competitiveness or to introduce cartelization in the bidding process.

3.

The Bidder/Contractor will not commit any offence under the relevant IPC/PC

Act; further the Bidder/ Contractor will not use improperly, for purposes of competition or personal gain, or pass on to others, any information or document provided by the Employer as part of the business relationship, regarding plans, technical proposals and business details, including information contained or transmitted electronically.

4.

The Bidder/Contractor will, when presenting his bid, disclose any and all payments he has made, is committed to or intends to make to agents, brokers or any other intermediaries in connection with the award of the contract.

(2)

The Bidder/ Contractor will not instigate third persons to commit offences outlined above or be an accessory to such offences.

Section 3-Disqualification from tender process and exclusion from future contracts

If the Bidder/Contractor, before award or during execution has committed a transgression through a violation o f Section 2 above, o r in any other form su ch as to put hi s reliability or credibility in question, the Employer is entitled to disqualify the Bidder/Contractor from t he tender process or take action as per the procedure mentioned in the "Guideline on banning of business dealing" annexed and marked as Annexure "A".

Section 4- Compensation for Damages

(1)

If the Employer has disqualified in terms of the provisions in Section 3, the

Bidder/Contractor from the tender process prior to the award of contract, the Employer is entitled to demand and recover the damages equivalent to Earnest Money Deposit/

Bid Security.

35

(2)

If the Employer has terminated the contract during execution in terms of the provisions under Section 3, the Employer shall be entitled to demand and recover from the

Contractor the damages equivalent to Earnest Money Deposit, Security Deposits already recovered and Performance Guarantee, which shall be absolutely at the disposal of the Employer.

Section -5 Previous transgression

(1)

The Bidder/ Contractor declares that no previous transgression occurred in the last 3 years with any other Company in any country conforming to the Anti-Corruption approach or with any other Public Sector Enterprise in India that could justify his exclusion from the tender process.

(2)

If the Bidder/Contractor makes incorrect statement on this subject, he can be disqualified from the tender process or action can be taken as per the procedure mentioned in "Guideline on banning of business dealing".

Section -6 Equal treatment of all Bidders/Contractors/Sub-Contractors

(1)

The Bidder/Contractor undertakes to demand from all partners/sub-contractors (if permitted under the conditions/ clauses of the contract) a commitment to act in conformity with this Integrity Pact and to submit it to the Employer before signing the contract.

(2)

The Bidder/ Contractor confirms that any violation by any of his partners/sub-contractors to act in conformity with the provisions of this Integrity Pact can be construed as a violation by the Bidder/Contractor himself, leading to possible Termination of Contract in terms of Section 4.

(3)

The Employer will disqualify from the tender process all bidders who do not sign this Pact or violate its provisions.

Section 7- Criminal charges against violating Bidders/Contractors/Sub-Contractors

If the Employer obtains knowledge of conduct of a Bidder, Contractor or Partners/Sub-

Contractor, or of an employee or a representative or an associate of a Bidder, Contractor or

Sub- Contractor, which constitutes corruption, or if the Employer has substantive suspicion in this regard, the Employer will inform the same to its Chief Vigilance Officer.

Section -8 Independent External Monitor/Monitors

(1) The Employer shall appoint competent and credible Independent External Monitor for this

Pact. The task of the Monitor is to review independently and objectively, whether and to what extent the parties comply with the obligations under this agreement.

(2) The Monitor is not subject to instructions by the representatives of the parties and will perform his functions neutrally and independently. He will report to the MD/RITES Ltd.

(3) The Bidder/Contractor accepts that the Monitor has the right of access without restriction to all Project documentation of the Employer including that provided by the

Contractor. The Contractor will also grant the Monitor, upon his request and demonstration of a valid

36

interest, unrestricted and unconditional access to his project documentation. The same is applicable to Partners/Sub-Contractors. The Monitor is under contractual obligation to t reat the information and documents of the Bidder/Contractor/Partners/Sub-

Contractor with confidentiality.

(4) The Employer will p rovide to t he Monitor sufficient i nformation about all m eetings among the parties related to the Project provided such meetings could have an impact on the contractual relations between the Employer and the Contractor. The parties offer to the Monitor the option to participate in such meetings.

(5) As soon as the Monitor notices or has reason to believe that violation of the agreement by the Employer or the Bidder/ Contractor, has taken place, he will request the

Party concerned to discontinue or take corrective action, or to take any other relevant action. The Monitor can in this regard submit non-binding recommendations. Beyond this, the Monitor has no right to demand from the parties that they act in a specific manner or refrain from action or tolerate action.

(6) The Monitor will submit a written report to the MD/RITES Ltd. within 8-10 weeks from the date of reference or intimation to him by the Employer and should the occasion arise, submit proposal for correcting problematic situations.

(7) If the Monitor has reported to the MD/RITES Ltd. of a substantiated suspicion of an offence under relevant IPC/PC Act, and the MD/RITES Ltd. has not, within reasonable time, taken visible action to proceed against such offender or reported it to the

Chief Vigilance Officer, the Monitor may also transmit this information directly to the

Central Vigilance Commissioner.

(8) The word Monitor would include both singular and plural.

Section – 9 Pact Duration

This pact begins when both parties have legally signed it. It expires for the Contractor when his

Security Deposit is released on completion of the Maintenance Period and for all other

Tenderers six months after the Contract has been awarded.

If any claim is made/lodged during this time the same shall be binding and continue to be valid despite the lapse of this pact specified above, unless it is discharged/determined by

CMD/RITES Ltd.

Section 10 Other Provisions

(1)

This agreement is subject to Indian Law. Place of performance and jurisdiction shall be as stated in the Contract Agreement.

(2)

Changes and supplements as well as termination notices need to be made in writing.

37

(3)

If the Contractor is a partnership or a consortium, this agreement must be signed by the P artner in charge/ Lead Member nominated as being in charge and who holds the

Power of Attorney signed by legally authorized signatories of all the partners/Members.

The M emorandum of Understanding /Joint Venture Agreement will incorporate a provision to t he effect that all Members of the Consortium will comply with the provisions in the Integrity Pact to be signed by the Lead Member on behalf of the

Consortium. Any violation of Section 2 above by any of the Partners/Members will be construed as a violation by the consortium leading to possible Termination of

Contract in terms of Section 3

(4)

Should one or several provisions of this agreement turn out to be invalid, the remainder of t his agreement remains valid. In this case, the parties will strive to come to an agreement to their original intentions.

RITES Ltd.

Agent / Power of Attorney Holder

(For & on behalf of the Employer) (For the Bidder/Contractor)

(Office Seal) (Office Seal)

Place:………………………… Date:……………………….

Witness 1:

(Name & Address) -----------------------------

-----------------------------

-----------------------------

-----------------------------

Witness 2

(Name & Address) -----------------------------

-----------------------------

-----------------------------

-----------------------------

38

ANNEX-A

Guidelines on Banning of Business Dealings

1.

Introduction

1.1 RITES, being a P ublic Sector Enterprise and ‘ State’, within the meaning of Article 12 of

Constitution of India, has to ensure preservation of rights enshrined in Chapter III of the

Constitution. RITES has also to safeguard its commercial interests. It is not in the interest of RITES to deal with Agencies who commit deception, fraud or other misconduct in the execution of contracts awarded / orders issued to them. In order to ensure compliance with the co nstitutional m andate, i t i s incumbent on R ITES t o obse rve pr inciples of nat ural justice before banning the business dealings with any Agency.

1.2 Since banni ng o f busi ness dealings involves ci vil co nsequences for an A gency concerned, i t i s incumbent t hat ade quate oppo rtunity o f hear ing i s provided and t he explanation, if tendered, is considered before passing any order in this regard keeping in view the facts and circumstances of the case.

2.

Scope

2.1 The procedure of (i) Suspension and (ii) Banning of Business Dealing with Agencies, has been laid down in these guidelines.

2.2 It is clarified that these guidelines do not deal with the decision of the Management not to entertain any particular Agency due to its poor / inadequate performance or for any other reason.

2.3 The banning shall be with prospective effect, i.e., future business dealings.

3.

Definitions

In these Guidelines, unless the context otherwise requires: i)

`Bidder / Contractor / Supplier' in the context of these guidelines is indicated as

‘Agency’. ii)

‘Competent Authority’ and ‘Appellate Authority’ shall mean the following: a)

The Director shall be the ‘Competent Authority’ for the purpose of these guidelines. CMD, RITES shall be the ‘Appellate Authority’ in respect of such cases. b)

CMD, RITES shall have overall power to take suo-moto action on any information available or received by him and pass such order(s) as he may t hink appropriate, including m odifying t he order(s) passed by any authority under these guidelines.

39

iii)

‘Investigating Department’ shall mean any Department, Division or Unit investigating into the conduct of the Agency and shall include the Vigilance

Department, Central Bureau of Investigation, the State Police or any other department set up by the Central or State Government having powers to investigate. iv)

‘Banning Committee’ shall mean a Committee constituted for the purpose of these guidelines by the competent authority. The members of this Committee shall not, at any stage, be connected with the tendering process under reference.

4.

Initiation of Banning / Suspension:

Action for banning / suspension business dealings with any Agency should be initiated by the department/ unit having business dealings with them after noticing the irregularities or misconduct on their part.

5.

Suspension of Business Dealings

5.1 If the conduct of any Agency dealing with RITES is under investigation by any department, the Competent Authority may consider whether the allegations under investigation are of a serious nature and w hether pendi ng i nvestigation, i t w ould be advi sable t o co ntinue business dealing with the Agency. If the Competent Authority, after consideration of the matter including the recommendation of the Investigating Department/Unit, if any, decides that it would not be in the interest to continue business dealings pending investigation, it may suspend business dealings with the Agency. The order to this effect may indicate a brief of the charges under investigation. The order of such suspension would operate for a period not more than six months and may be communicated to the Agency as also to the

Investigating Department.

The I nvestigating D epartment/Unit may ensu re t hat t heir i nvestigation i s completed and whole process of final order is over within such period.

5.2 As far as possible, the existing contract(s) with the Agency may be co ntinued unless the

Competent Authority, having regard to the circumstances of the case, decides otherwise.

5.3 If the A gency co ncerned as ks for de tailed r easons of su spension, t he Agency m ay be informed t hat i ts co nduct i s under i nvestigation. I t i s not ne cessary t o ent er i nto correspondence or argument with the Agency at this stage.

5.4 It i s not nece ssary t o give an y sh ow-cause not ice or per sonal hear ing t o t he A gency before issuing the order of suspension. However, if investigations are not complete in six months t ime, the Competent Authority may extend t he period of suspension by another three months, during which period the investigations must be completed .

40

6.

Grounds on which Banning of Business Dealings can be initiated

6.1 If the security consideration, including questions of loyalty of the Agency to the State, so warrants;

6.2 If the Director / Owner of t he Agency, pr oprietor or partner of the firm, is convicted by a

Court of Law for offences involving moral turpitude in relation to its business dealings with the Government or any other public sector enterprises or RITES, during the last five years;

6.3 If there is strong justification for believing that the Directors, Proprietors, Partners, owner of the Agency have been guilty of malpractices such as bribery, corruption, fraud, substitution of tenders, interpolations, etc;

6.4 If the Agency employs a public servant dismissed / removed or employs a person convicted for an offence involving corruption or abetment of such offence;

6.5 If business dealings with the Agency have been banned by the Govt. or any other public sector enterprise;

6.6 If the Agency has resorted to Corrupt, fraudulent practices including misrepresentation of facts;

6.7 If the A gency use s intimidation / threatening or br ings undue ou tside pr essure on t he

Company (RITES) or its official in acceptance / performances of the job under the contract;

6.8 If the Agency indulges in repeated and / or deliberate use of delay tactics in complying with contractual stipulations;

6.9 Based on t he findings of the i nvestigation r eport o f C BI / P olice a gainst the Agency f or malafide / unlawful acts or improper conduct on his part in matters relating to the Company

(RITES) or even otherwise;

6.10 Established litigant nature of the Agency to derive undue benefit;

6.11 Continued poor performance of the Agency in several contracts;

(Note: The examples given above are only illustrative and not exhaustive. The Competent

Authority may decide to ban business dealing for any good and sufficient reason).

7. Banning of Business Dealings

7.1 A decision to ban business dealings with any Agency shall apply throughout the Company.

7.2 If the Competent Authority is prima-facie of view that action for banning business dealings with the Agency is called for, a show-cause notice may be issued to the Agency as per paragraph 8.1 and an enquiry held accordingly..

8. Show-cause Notice

8.1 In case where the Competent Authority decides that action against an Agency is called for, a show-cause notice has to be issued to the Agency. Statement containing the imputation of misconduct or m is-behaviour m ay be appended t o t he show-cause not ice

41

and t he A gency sh ould be as ked to su bmit w ithin 30 day s a w ritten statement i n i ts defence. If no reply is received, the decision may be taken ex-parte.

8.2 If the Agency requests for inspection of any relevant document in possession of RITES, necessary facility for inspection of documents may be provided.

8.3 On receipt of the reply of the Agency, or in case no reply is received within the prescribed time, the Competent Authority shall refer the case along with relevant details to the

Banning C ommittee, which shall examine the r eply of the Agency and other facts and circumstances o f t he c ase and su bmit i ts final r ecommendation t o the C ompetent

Authority f or banni ng or ot herwise. A f inal deci sion f or C ompany-wide b anning sh all be taken by the Competent Authority. The Competent Authority may consider and pass an appropriate sp eaking or der: For ex onerating t he A gency; or For banni ng t he busi ness dealing with the Agency.

8.4 The decision should be co mmunicated to the Agency concerned along with a r easoned order. I f i t deci ded t o b an busi ness dealings, the per iod for w hich t he ban w ould be operative may be mentioned.

9. Appeal against the Decision of the Competent Authority

9.1 The A gency m ay f ile a n appeal ag ainst the or der o f the C ompetent A uthority banni ng business dealing, etc. The appeal shall lie to Appellate Authority. Such an appeal shall be preferred within one month from the date of receipt of the order banning business dealing, etc.

9.2 Appellate Authority would consider the appeal and pass appropriate order which shall be communicated to the Agency as well as the Competent Authority.

10. Review of the Decision by the Competent Authority

Any petition / application filed by the Agency concerning the review of the banning order passed or iginally by C ompetent A uthority under t he ex isting guidelines either be fore or after filing o f appeal bef ore t he A ppellate A uthority or af ter di sposal of appeal by t he

Appellate Authority, the review petition can be decided by the Competent Authority upon disclosure o f new f acts / circumstances or s ubsequent dev elopment ne cessitating su ch review..

11. Circulation o f t he na mes of Agencies with whom B usiness D ealings hav e been banned.

11.1 Depending upon the gravity of misconduct established, the Competent Authority of RITES may circulate the names of Agency with whom business dealings have been banned, to the Ministry of Railways and PSUs of Railways, for such action as they deem appropriate.

11.2 If Ministry of Railways or a Public Sector Undertaking of Railways request for more information about the Agency with whom business dealings have been banned a co py of the report of Inquiring Authority together with a copy of the order of the Competent

Authority/ Appellate Authority may be supplied

42

12. Restoration

12.1 The validity of the banning order shall be for a s pecific time & on expiry of the same, the banning order shall be considered as "withdrawn".

12.2 In case any agency applies for restoration of business prior to the expiry of the ban order, depending upon m erits of each ca se, the C ompetent A uthority w hich had passe d t he original banning orders may consider revocation of order of suspension of business/lifting the ban on busi ness dealings at an appropriate time. Copies of the restoration orders shall be sent to all those offices where copies of Ban Orders had been sent

43

ANNEXURE VII

MANDATE FORM

To

RITES Ltd.

Dear Sir,

Authorization for payments through Electronic Fund Transfer System (RTGS/NEFT)

We hereby authorize RITES Ltd. to make all our payments, including refund of Earnest Money, through Electronic Fund Transfer System (RTGS/NEFT). The details for facilitating the payments are given below:

(TO BE FILLED IN CAPITAL LETTERS)

1 NAME OF THE BENEFICIARY

2 ADDRESS WITH PIN CODE

3 (A) TELEPHONE NO. WITH STD CODE

(B) MOBILE NO.

4 BANK PARRTICULARS

A BANK NAME

B BANK TELEPHONE NO. WITH STD CODE

C BRANCH ADDRESS WITH PIN CODE

D BANK FAX NO. WITH STD CODE

(EITHER

ENCLOSE A CANCELLED CHEQUE OR

IN THE

G BANK ACCOUNT TYPE (TICK ONE) SAVING

CREDIT

CURRENT

OTHERS

LOAN CASH

H IF OTHERS, SPECIFY

5 PERMANENT ACCOUNT NUMBER (PAN)

6 E-MAIL ADDRESS

I / We hereby declare that the particulars given above are correct and complete. If the transaction

Date: SIGNATURE

(AUTHORISED SIGNATORY)

Name

BANK CERTIFICATION

It is certified that the above mentioned beneficiary holds bank account No. ……..with our branch and the Bank particulars above are correct.

Date: SIGNATURE

(AUTHORISED SIGNATORY)

Name______________________

OFFIICAL STAMP

44

ANNEXURE VIII

Form of Earnest Money Deposit Bank Guarantee Bond

BLANK

45

ANNEXURE IX

Pre-Qualification Performa

Name of Work

Tender No.

Name of the Bidder:

Details of Cost of Tender

Document Paid by

Name & Address

of Issuing Bank

Banker’s Cheque / Pay

Order / Demand Draft

Details of EMD paid by

(i)Banker’s Cheque/ Pay

Order/ Demand Draft

(ii) Bank Guarantee

Annual Financial Turnover :

S.No. Financial Years Turn Over

(Rs In Lacs)

1 2015-16

Amount Date of Issue Instrument

Documents

Placed at:

placed at

Remarks

2 2014-15

2013-14 3

Profitability :

S.No. Documents

Placed at:

Remarks

1

2

Financial Years Profit with (+)

sign or Loss

with (-) sign

2015-16

(In Lacs)

2014-15

46

3

2013-14

Similar Work Experience

S. No. Name

of work

Name

of

Client

1

Actual

Date of

Start

2

3

Actual

Date of

Completion

Actual

Completion

Cost

Completion

Certificates

Placed at :

Remarks

4

Net Worth :

S.No.

1

Financial Years Net worth in Rs. Documents

Placed at:

2015-16

Solvency Certificate :

Sl No. Name &

Address of

Issuing

Bank

1.

Solvency

Amount in

Rs.

Date of

Issuance

Document

Placed at:

Remarks

Remarks

Other documents to be submitted along with Tender documents:

Sl No.

1

Particulars

Declaration by the bidder as per Proforma-3

Document

Placed at:

47

Remarks

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Self- Attested Copy of Partnership Deed/

Memorandum and Articles of Association of the firm.

Written Power of Attorney of the signatory of the Tender on behalf of the tenderer. (Annexure-III)

Self-attested copy of a certificate, confirming that the ap plicant i s w orking contractor or has executed any work within the last five years reckoned from the date of opening o f tender, i ssued by Government

Organizations/ S emi G overnment

Organizations of C entral or State

Government; or b y P ublic S ector

Undertakings/ A utonomous B odies of

Central/State G overnment or t heir

Subsidiaries / by P ublic L td. C ompanies listed in Stock Exchange in India or Abroad or subsidiaries of such companies shall be accepted f or assessing the eligibility of a

Tenderer. Certificates issued by one of the aforesaid or ganizations as a lead m ember

(having eq uity s take of 51% or more) of a

Joint V enture ( JV) for a work executed for the J V, will al so be ac ceptable. In c ase of

PPP projects, if the bidder has executed a work for a concessionaire who is one of the aforesaid organizations, then the certificate issued by s uch c oncessionaire o r by t he public au thority c oncerned, w ill al so be acceptable.

List of similar works satisfying qualification criterion completed during the last 5 years as per Proforma-1

Integrity Pact as per Annexure-VI

Self-attested

Corrigendum/Minutes copy of of

Pre-Bid

Meeting, if any.

RTGS/NEFT details as per Annexure- VII

9 Details of Construction Experience in key activities / specified components

10 Details regarding service tax registration/

VAT registration/ Sales Tax registration as per Clause 24.0 (ii) of NIT

48

N.A.

S. No.

29

30

31

32

25

26

27

28

33

34

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

List of 60 districts covered under IAP

State

Andhra Pradesh

Andhra Pradesh

Bihar

Bihar

Bihar

Bihar

Bihar

Bihar

Bihar

Chhatisgarh

Chhatisgarh

Chhatisgarh

Chhatisgarh

Chhatisgarh

Chhatisgarh

Chhatisgarh

Chhatisgarh

Chhatisgarh

Chhatisgarh

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Jharkhand

Madhya Pradesh

District

Adilabad

Khammam

Arwal

Aurangabad

Gaya

Jamui

Jehanabad

Nawada

Rohtas

Bastar

Bijapur

Dantewada

Jashpur

Kanker

Kawardha

Koriya

Narayanpur

Rajnandgaon

Surguja

Bokaro

Chatra

Garhwa

Gumla

Hazaribagh

Kodarma

Latehar

Lohardaga

Pachim Singhbhum

Palamu

Purbi Singhbhum

Ram Garh

Saraikela

Simdega

Anuppur

ANNEXURE X

49

47

48

49

50

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

35

36

37

38

55

56

57

58

51

52

53

54

59

60

Madhya Pradesh

Madhya Pradesh

Madhya Pradesh

Madhya Pradesh

Madhya Pradesh

Madhya Pradesh

Madhya Pradesh

Maharashtra

Maharashtra

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Orissa

Uttar Pradesh

West Bengal

Balaghat

Dindori

Mandla

Seoni

Shahdol

Sidhi

Umaria

Gadchiroli

Gondiya

Balangir

Debagarh / Deogarh

Gajapati

Kalahandi

Kandhamal / Phulbani

Kendujhar / Keonjhar

Koraput

Malkangiri

Mayurbhanj

Nabarangapur

Nuapada

Rayagada

Sambalpur

Sonapur

Sundargarh

Sonbhadra

Paschim Medinipur

50

SECTION 2

TENDER AND CONTRACT FORM FOR

WORKS

DELETED

51

SECTION 3

SPECIAL CONDITIONS/SPECIFICATIONS

The Special Specifications are meant for Non- DSR items. However, in case of inadequacy of the sp ecifications, t he following docu ments shall be r eferred as per t he a dvice of t he engineer-in-charge: i) Relevant BIS codes ii) Manufacturer’s Specifications iii) Relevant ASTM/ BS codes iv) Standard Engineering Practice v) Decision of Engineer – in - Charge

----000----

52

SPECIAL CONDITIONS/SPECIFICATIONS

Special Conditions of contract

1. In RCC work FE 500 and above TMT bars shall be used.

2. The malba during the construction will be removed at least on weekly basis or more frequently as desired by local Authorities. If the same is not done, the contractor will be solely responsible for all the consequences including penalties by the local Authorities.

3. During co nstruction, i t i s mandatory on the pa rt o f the co ntractor t o properly scr een the construction si te o ff t he roads & adjacent structures by means of erecting a screen wall o f necessary / specified height (not less than 8.00 ft.) from ground level which is to be painted to avoid unpl easant l ooks. I n addi tion to this, a n et or so me ot her p rotective m aterial sh all be hoisted at t he facades of t he bui lding to ensu re t hat any falling material r emains within t he protected area.

4. Noise related activities will only be taken up for construction during the period as permitted by local Authorities.

5. Only specified brand of materials shall be used subject to the approval of sample by Engineer-

In-charge

6. The contractor shall make his own arrangements for Electricity required for the work including for the site office of the employer.

7. The contractor will be f ully responsible for getting the Sewer, Water Connection from the local bodies after completing all the formalities & obtaining their mandatory permission/ approval /

N.O.C. and also final clearance/N.O.C. from the Fire & Lift Department. However, the fees paid to the concerned local body for this purpose will be reimbursed / paid by the employer along with all possible assistance.

8. The r ates for al l i tems of w ork sh all be valid f or al l dept hs and hei ghts unless otherwise specified in the nomenclature of the item.

9. Arrangements for foundation st one l aying ce remony and i nauguration of t he bui lding w ill b e made by the contractor for at least 250 Person.

10. Specialized item will be ex ecuted through specialized agency and t heir credential will be g ot approved by Engineer in Charge before deployment.

11. Extra Items if any which are not covered in C.P.W.D / A.O.R. specifications will be paid on the basis of lowest market rate and the component used in activity confirmed by site in charge and contractor jointly. The factor / Coefficients of i tems not co vered i n the C .P.W.D Analysis of

Rates (Latest) and is necessarily t o be ex ecuted a fter obt aining o f w ritten appr oval of the

Engineer-in-charge. The contractor shall su bmit the co mplete d etails, sp ecification, methodology o f i tem supported w ith r elevant documents and du ring execution the ent ire component utilized to execute the item shall be observed on actual basis and daily record shall

53

be maintained at project site which shall be signed by the contractor and site –in- charge from

RITES L td. The rate of the items shall be derived on the recorded observation and submit along with extra item statement for final approval of rate of such items.

12. The co ntractor sh all ar range al l r equired appr ovals from co ncerned l ocal bodi es for i ssue of necessary completion certificate and sh all provide maintenance/manual oper ation agreement as provided by the manufacture /suppler for all mechanical /electrical devices.

13. The di screpancies found i f any , w ell bef ore h anding ov er t he pr oject, t hese di screpancies should be r ectified/removed before handing over of project. The contractor will be r esponsible for maintenance o f completed bui lding for 12 months after the handi ng ov er of the bui lding maintenance means removal/rectification of any defect, shrinkage or other faults.

14. The contractor shall ar range v isit o f t he o fficials to t he manufacturing plant o f t he app roved brand before placing order to the specialized agency for start of supply.

15.

TESTING OF MATERIAL

a) The contractor shall produce all the materials well in advance so that there is sufficient time for testing of the materials and clearance of the same before incorporation in the work. b) All the materials to be used in and on every part of the works shall be subjected from time to t ime at such tests as given in Li st of Mandatory Tests or as required as per C PWD specifications. These tests/norms are the M inimum requirement and the Engineer-in-

Charge may supplement these with additional tests/checks according to the site condition, at no extra cost. Such test shall be performed at the expenses of the contractor. The samples for tests shall be i n all cases selected by the Engineer-in-charge and su pplied by the contractor as part of the contract. If at any time, any material so tested, fails to meet the acce ptance criteria, the same sh all be r emoved f rom the site o f works and other materials su bstituted t herefore, but i n t he abse nce of any sp ecified test/acceptance criteria, the decision of the Engineer-in-charge shall be final and binding as to whether the said material or materials shall be used on the works, or forthwith removed and other material substituted. c) The co ntractor sh all pr oduce on dem and from E ngineer-in-charge, t he m anufacturers’ certificates certifying that the materials conform to the technical specifications. For cement and r einforcement st eel, m anufacturers certificate sh all be co nsidered su fficient test certificate against mandatory testing required for 80% o f supply i.e. two samples out of each ten samples required for mandatory testing shall be got tested from the approved outside laboratory and for balance manufacturers certificate can be considered All charges for testing shall be borne by the contractor and department will not reimburse any testing charges. For other materials which are ISI/ BIS marked, manufacturer’s certificate shall be considered as fulfilling t he mandatory test r equirement. However, in case E ngineer-incharge feels that the material supplied is not of required specifications even if it is ISI/BIS approved and have manufacturers certificate, he can send the sample to the approved lab for testing at contractors cost. d) The contractor has to establish, at his own cost, a testing Laboratory / Field laboratory and

Minimum Labor atory equipment as r equired for t he Field Q uality C ontrol for t he i tems of

54

work shall be provided in the Laboratory to conduct regular and routine daily tests on materials, measurements of temperature and any other tests stipulated in the particular specifications of the i tems to be ex ecuted i n the co ntract. I n ca se c ontractor do not establish his laboratory, the Engineer shall be at liberty to send the required samples to any outside Laboratory and the cost of sampling, testing, transportation etc. shall be borne by the contractor. In ca se the co ntractor does not deposi t the r equired / demanded amount within 7 da ys of dem and by t he out side l aboratory t he am ount w ill be deposi ted by

Engineer and t he r ecovery @ t wo t imes of the t esting co st sh all be m ade from the contractors next payment. The decision of Engineer-in-charge shall be final and binding on the contractor. e) The contractor sh all permit the Engineer-in-charge or his authorized r epresentative t o be present during any of or all the tests. The notification to the Engineer-in-charge that the work has been co mpleted, the co ntractor sh all m ake unde r t he di rection and i n t he presence of Engineer-in-charge such tests and inspections as have been specified or as the en gineer-in-charge sh all co nsider nece ssary t o de termine whether or not the full intent of r equirements of the pl ans and sp ecifications have been f ulfilled. in ca se t he work does not m eet t he f ull i ntent o f t he sp ecifications it sh all be r ectified by t he contractor at no extra cost and the contractor shall bear all the expenses for any further tests considered necessary. f) For any t ests as di rected by t he E ngineer-in-charge, that hav e t o be carried ou t a t an outside laboratory, the cost of such tests, materials, transport etc., shall be bor ne by the contractor. g) In case there is any discrepancy in frequency of testing as given tender or BIS Codes and as shown in the list of mandatory tests and that in individual sub-heads of work as per

CPWD Specifications, 2009 (Vol. I to Vol.III) the higher of the two frequencies of testing shall be followed, and nothing extra shall be payable to the contractor on this account. h) The contractor shall arrange for conducting the tests specified in Quality Plan in the presence of an officer, authorized by the Engineer-in-Charge. Full records of all the tests conducted shall be maintained by the contractor in the format given by Engineer-in-

Charge which will be made available to the Engineer-in-Charge or to any officer authorized by him whenever required. i) The purchaser representative shall be free to visit the manufacturer work at all reasonable times to witness and inspect the testing of equipment. It is the duty of tenderer to see that all the equipments supplied are tested as per relevant IS specifications. The contractor shall f urnish m anufacturer t est ce rtificate for t he r outine and type t est c onducted on the equipment offered if necessary t he co ntractor s hall ar range t o conduct the ent ire r outine test a t t he manufacturer pr emises in pr esence o f R ITES r epresentative on r eceipt o f material/equipment at site the tenderer shall offer equipment/material for inspection and get approved before installations. j) OUTSIDE/INDEPENDENT TESTING FACILITIES:

Extensive testing of the materials used for construction is a pre-requisite for attaining high quality of the work. This shall also require specialized tests, physical, chemical, ultrasonic, x-ray and various other types of tests which cannot possibly be carried out in a site

55

laboratory. These t ests al so r equire sp ecialized per sonnel w ho r egularly deal i n su ch testing. Therefore the need arises for carrying out the tests in outside laboratories. These laboratories may be i n t he G overnment sector, Semi G overnment or pr ivate se ctor. The outside laboratories shall be short listed before hand and approval obtained from Engineerin charge. In case of laboratories in the private sector, the past record and reputation of the laboratory m ust i nvariably be g iven due co nsideration. The i nfrastructure i n t hese laboratories can also be inspected before they are short-listed. Contractor shall not be paid extra for any outside testing or for visits for inspection of outside laboratory

16. CONNECTIONS/COMPLETION CERTIFICATE:

a) It will be t he responsibility of the C ontractor t o get the w orks approved and obt ain completions, st age completions and occu pancy certificates and nece ssary co nnection for building work, Electrical work, main water supply & sewerage connection, NOC from Fire

Authority / Local Municipal / Govt. Authorities or other approved authorities for Delhi/New

Delhi region at his own cost. Rates quoted shall cover all expenses to be borne for obtaining above approvals / certificates. However, any statutory fees to be paid on account of above shall be paid by the Employer. b) The contractor will be fully responsible for getting the Sewer, Water Connection & Electrical connection f rom the l ocal bodi es after co mpleting al l t he f ormalities & obt aining t heir mandatory permission/ approval / N.O.C. and also final clearance/N.O.C. from the Fire &

Lift Department . However, the fees paid to the concerned local body for this purpose will be reimbursed / paid by the employer along with all possible assistance. c) The date of Physical completion shall be only af ter the building and external works are

physically

complete as certified by the Engineer. Completion certificate shall be issued only after all required connections and NOCs for main Electric supply, water supply, sewerage connection, NOCs and completion certificates from Fire Authority / Local Municipal / Govt.

Authorities or ot her appr oved aut horities for Delhi/New D elhi r egion, obt ained by the contractor and handed over to the Employer. d) Physical Completion certificate shall be recorded for the purpose of release of performance

Guarantee only. Performance guarantee of the contractor shall be released after Physical completion certificate.

17.SAMPLE FLATS (Wherever applicable): NOT APPLICABLE

18. MAINTENANCE PERIOD:

a) The normal period of maintenance sh all be one y ear r eckoned from t he dat e of issue of completion certificate by RITES for the completed work. A lso contractor shall provide and arrange throughout the maintenance period of one year, sufficient staff of each discipline , materials and E quipments etc for day t o day m aintenance to ca rry out the r epairs/ rectification’s immediately of t he co mplex, bui ldings etc whenever poi nted out by

RITES/DELHI POLICE free of cost. b) Bidders are requested not to get confused by defect liability period and maintenance period. Maintenance period will start from the date of issue of final completion certificate.

56

During the maintenance period the contractor shall be liable not only to remove the defects but also maintain the works for one year. c) However, all running cost shall be directly paid by the client to various authorities. d) Contractor has to su pply addi tional q uantities of t iles used for the i tems of each type

(Minimum 10sqm) for using at a later stage during maintenance, so that the uniformity of color is maintained. Nothing shall be payable extra for this supply. e) All defects noticed during the currency of the Contract and al so during the Maintenance

Period of 12 months after completion of the work shall be completely and sa tisfactorily rectified by the C ontractor w ithin a r easonable period without any extra payment for the same. In case the defects are such as cannot be rectified or the Contractor fails to rectify these satisfactorily and completely, RITES reserves the right to accept the work at reduced rates or t o g et the rectification w ork done a t the risk and co st o f t he

Contractor. The deci sion o f R ITES/DELHI P OLICE i n t his regard shall be final and binding on t he C ontractor and sh all be bey ond pur view of t he di spute se ttlement clause 25 of General Conditions of Contract. f) 90 % o f the S ecurity D eposit hel d by t he au thority w ill be r efunded to t he contractor on satisfactory completion of the maintenance period on the recommendations of the

Engineer-in-Charge. If the contractor fails to rectify the de fects pointed out during the maintenance period, then either the rectification work shall be got done through any other agency/agencies at the risk and cost of the contractor or the Maintenance period may be extended suitably to allow time for rectification of defects to the satisfaction of the

RITES/DELHI POLICE. T he defect liability dep osit sh all be refunded after adjustment of the co st o f rectification ca rried out pl us 20% as departmental ch arges, B alance 10 % security deposit shall be refunded as follows g) 50 % of 10 % security deposit after 3years of completion and satisfactory performance of the water proofing work. h) 30 % of 10 % security deposit after 6years of completion and satisfactory performance of the water proofing work. i) 20 % of 10 % security deposit after 10 years of completion and satisfactory performance of the water proofing work.

19. GUARANTEE AGAINST WATER PROOFING TREATMENT :

The Contractor shall carry out the work of water proofing treatment through a sp ecialized firm and shall submit the 10 years bank guarantee against leakage/ dampness to the RITES/DELHI

POLICE as per approved Performa. The guarantee sh all include r ectification of works within the guarantee period of 10 years free of cost if leakage/dampness is reported by the owner.

20. HANDING OVER THE WORKS ON COMPLETION

On satisfactory completion of all the works as per the provision of the Contract, the Contractor shall hand o ver t he bui lding t o t he D ELHI P OLICE t hrough R ITES. The C ontractor sh all ensure that all development works and bulk services are simultaneously carried out so as to make the buildings functional immediately on completion. The building, even if it is physically ready for occupations, shall be deemed to be completed from the date the services like Water

57

Supply, sewerage and e lectricity a re made available to make the building functional. The completion certificate shall be issued only after the building is found functional in all respect.

The co st o f i nstallation o f el ectric line f rom m ain l ine to ca mpus of t he bui ldings shall be payable b y R ITES/DELHI P OLICE on p roduction o f pr oof t owards payment m ade to S tate

Electricity B oard. A lso t he co st o f co nnecting Water S upply l ine of bu ilding f rom t he main

Water supply l ine of the municipality shall be payable t o t he Contractor; on p roduction of proof towards payment made to the municipality. The Contractor shall maintain sufficient staff and materials till the handing over of the building to the DELHI POLICE to protect the works and its installation from theft/damage from outside agencies.

Floors, room of offices /Flats shall be neatly cleaned, locked with Seven(7 ) lever pad lock of approved brand and make; set of keys along with key ring duly mark the flat number/location of rooms etc. shall be handed over to the client. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

21. Name Board at Site

The Contractor shall prepare and display name board at site as per design approved by the

Engineer. It shall have

• Name of Project

• Name of Employer

• Name of Consulting Architect (if any)

• Name of Project Management Consultant (if any)

• Name of Contractor

• Date of start

22. Hiring of Specialized agency

Specialized item will be ex ecuted through specialized agency and t heir credential will be g ot approved by Engineer in Charge before deployment.

23. Adherence to instructions of Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge

Contractor during the execution of the contract and during maintenance/ defect liability period have to adhere to the instructions of Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge. In case contractor does not take cognizance to the written instructions of Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge within seven days of issue of written instructions to execute or repair some particular item, Engineer – in-charge shall be at liberty t o g et t he particular work/ item executed from any ot her par ty by co llecting sp ot quotations as per departmental practice of quotations. In such case an amount equal to cost of work pai d t o t he ot her par ty pl us 20 % D epartmental ch arges plus 20 % penal ty sh all be deducted from the payments/ security of the contractor. In such case Risk and cost action shall not be required till the cost of such items exceed more than 10% of Contract value. No action under t his clause by Engineer –in ch arge, w ill r elieve t he co ntractor from act ion under ot her clauses of the contract. The decision of Engineer – in – charge shall be final and binding on the contractor in such case.

24. Labour Laws to be complied by the Contractor: The contractor shall get his construction workers, who are eligible for registration under the Delhi Building and Other Construction

58

Workers (Regulation o f E mployment and C onditions of S ervice) A ct, 1996 and r ules made thereunder, registered under the said Act and Rules.

25. Final finishing and successful testing & commissioning of STP plant in terms of design and drawings. H anding ov er t he S TP co mplete i n a ll r espect w ith ci vil, el ectrical and m echanical installation in good running condition including handing over of warranty cards and operations and maintenance manual of equipment and “as built drawings” and getting NOC and final test certification related to the final quality of the treated effluent from all the concerned pollution and environmental authorities, operating &maintaining for defect liability period of 12 months.

26. Special Conditions relating to existing clauses of Contract:

CLAUSE 10: Clauses 10 C , 10CA & 10CC of RITES GCC are not applicable; instead the following clauses as per CPWD GCC (with amendments if any up to date of submission

of bid) will be applicable:

CLAUSE 10 C

Payment on Account of Increase in Prices/ Wages due to Statutory Order (s)

If after submission of the tender, the price of any material incorporated in the works

(excluding t he m aterials co vered under cl ause 10 C A and not bei ng a m aterial su pplied form the Engineer-in-Charge’s stores in accordance with clause 10 thereof ) and / or wages of labour increases as a direct result of the coming into force of any fresh law, or statutory or or der (but not due to any ch anges of rates i n sa les tax/VAT, C entral / State E xcise

/custom duty )beyond the prices /wages prevailing at the time of the last stipulated date of receipt of tenders including extensions, if any, for the work during contract period including the justified period extended under the provisions of clause 5 of the contract without any action under cl ause 2, then t he am ount o f the contract sh all acco rdingly be varied and provided further that any such increase shall be limited to the price/wages prevailing at the time of st ipulated dat e of co mpletion or as prevailing f or t he per iod under co nsideration, whichever is less.

If after submission of the tender, the price of any material incorporated in the works

(excluding the materials covered under clause 10CA and not being a material supplied from the ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE`S stores in accordance with clause 10 thereof) and/or wages of l abour as prevailing at t he t ime o f l ast st ipulated dat e o f r eceipt o f t ender i ncluding extensions, if any, is decreased as a direct result of the coming into force of any fresh lay or statutory rules or order(but not due to any changes of rate in sales tax/VAT, Central /State

Excise/custom duty), Employer/Government shall in respect of materials incorporated in the works (excluding the materials covered under clause 10CA and not being material supplied from the Engineer-in-charge’s stores in accordance with Clause 10 thereof) and/or labour engaged on the ex ecution o f t he w ork a fter the dat e o f co ming i nto force o f su ch l aw statutory rules or order be entitled to deduct from the dues of the contractor, such amount as shall be equivalent to the difference between the prices of the material and /or wages as prevailed at the time of the last stipulated date for receipt of tender including extension if any for the work and the prices of material and/or wages of labour on the coming into force of such law, statutory rules or order. This will be applicable for the contract period including the justified period extended under the provisions of clause 5 of the contract without any action under clause 2.

Engineer-in-charge may ca ll book s of acco unt and other r elevant do cuments from t he contractor to satisfy himself about reasonability of increase in prices of materials and wages.

59

The contractor shall , within a r easonable time of his becoming aware of any alteration in the price of any such material and /or wages of labour, give notice thereof to the Engineerin-charge s tating t hat t he sa me i s given pur suant to this condition t ogether w ith a ll information relating thereto which he may be in position to supply.

For t his purpose, the labour co mponent o f t he w ork ex ecuted dur ing pe riod under consideration sh all be per centage as specified in Schedule F, of t he value of work done during that period and the increase/ decrease in labour shall be considered on the minimum daily wages in rupees of any unskilled adult male mazdoor, fixed under any law statutory rule or order.

CLAUSE 10 CA

Payment due to variation in prices of materials after receipt of tender

If after submission of the tender, the prices of material specified in Schedule F increases/ decreases beyond the prices (s) prevailing at the time of the last stipulated date for receipt of tenders (including extensions, if any) for the work, then the amount of the contract shall accordingly be varied a nd pr ovided f urther that any su ch variations shall be ef fected for stipulated period of contract including the justified period extended under the provisions of

Clause 5 of the contract without any action under clause 2.

However f or work done/during the justified period extended as above, it will be l imited to indices prevailing at the time of stipulated date of completion or as prevailing for the period under consideration whichever is less.

The increase/decrease in prices of cement, steel reinforcement and structural steel shall be determined by the price indices issued by the Director General (works), CPWD .For other items provided in the Schedule’ F’, this shall be determined by the all India Wholesale price indices of materials as published by Economic Advisor to Government of India, Ministry of

Commerce and industry and base price for cement, steel reinforcement and structural steel as issued under t he au thority o f D irector General (Works) C PWD appl icable f or D elhi including Noida, Gurgaon, Faridabad & Ghaziabad and for other places as issued under the authority o f Zonal C hief E ngineer, C PWD and base pr ice of ot her m aterials issued b y concerned Zonal Chief Engineer, as indicated in schedule` F` as valid on the last stipulated date of receipt of tender, including extension if any and f or the period under consideration.

In case, price index of a par ticular material is not issued by Ministry of Commerce and industry, then the price index of nearest similar material as indicated in Schedule ‘F’ shall be followed.

The amount of the co ntract sh all acco rdingly be varied f or all su ch m aterials and will be worked out as per the formula given below for individual material:-

Adjustment for component of individual material

V = P x Q x CI –CIo

CIo

Where,

V = variation in material cost i.e. increase or decrease in the amount of Rupees to be paid or recovered.

60

.

P = Base price of material as issued under authority DG (W), CPWD or concerned zonal

Chief Engineer as indicated in schedule “F” valid at the time of the last stipulated date of receipt of tender including extensions, if any

Q = Quantity of material brought at site for bonafide use in the works since previous

bill.

CIo = Price index of cement, steel reinforcement bars and structural steel as issued by the

DG(W), CPWD as valid on the last stipulated date of receipt of tenders including extensions, i f any . For ot her i tems, i f any , pr ovided i n S chedule ‘ F’, A ll I ndia wholesale pr ice i ndex f or t he material as published by t he E conomic Advisor t o

Government o f India, Ministry of I ndustry an d C ommerce as valid on t he l ast stipulated date of receipt of tenders including extensions, if any.

CI = Price index for cement, steel reinforcement bars and structural steel as issued under the aut hority of DG (W), C PWD for per iod under co nsideration. For ot her i tems, if any, provided in Schedule ‘F’, All India Wholesale pr ice index for t he material for period under co nsideration as published by E conomic Advisor t o Government of

India, Ministry of Industry and Commerce.

Note: -

(i) In respect of the justified period extended under the provisions of clause 5 of the contract without any action under clause 2, the index prevailing at the time of stipulated date of completion or the prevailing index of the period under consideration, whichever is less, shall be considered.

Provided always that provisions of the preceding Clause 10 C shall not be applicable in respect of Materials covered in this Clause.

(ii) if during progress of work or at time of completion of work, it is noticed that any material brought at site is in excess of requirement, then amount of escalation of paid earlier on such ex cess quantity o f m aterial sh all be r ecovered on t he basi s of c ost i ndices as applied at the time of payment of escalation or as prevailing at the time of effecting recovery, whichever is higher.

CLAUSE 10 CC

Payment due t o i ncrease/decrease i n pr ices/wages ( excluding materials covered under clause 10 CA) after Receipt of Tender for Works

If the prices of materials (not being materials supplied or services rendered at fixed prices by the department/Employer in accordance with Clauses 10 & 34 thereof) and/ or wages of labour required for execution of the work increase, the Contractor shall be compensated for su ch i ncrease as per pr ovisions detailed bel ow and t he am ount of t he C ontract sh all accordingly be varied, su bject to the condition t hat such compensation for escalation in prices and wages shall be av ailable only for the work done dur ing the stipulated period of the contract including the justified period extended under the provisions of Clause 5 of the contract without any action under Clause-2. However, for the work done during the justified period extended as above, the compensation as detailed below will be limited to prices/wages prevailing at the time of stipulated date of completion or as prevailing for the period under consideration, whichever is less. No Such compensation shall be pa yable for

61

a work for which t he st ipulated per iod of co mpletion is equal t o or less t han t he t ime as specified in Schedule `F`. Such compensation for escalation in the prices of materials and labour, when due, shall be worked out based on the following provisions:- i) The base date for working out such escalation shall be the last stipulated date of receipt of tenders including extension, if any. ii) The cost of work on which escalation will be payable shall be reckoned as below: a) Gross value of work done upto this quarter: (A) b) Gross value of work done upto the last quarter: c) Gross value of work done since previous quarter (A-B)

(B)

(C) d) Full assessed value of Secured Advance (excluding materials covered under

Clause 10CA) fresh paid in this quarter: (D) e) Full asse ssed v alue of Secured A dvance ( excluding m aterials Covered under cl ause

10CA) recovered in this quarter f) Full assessed value of Secured Advance for which escalation

(E)

(F) is payable in this quarter (D-E) g) Advance payment made during this quarter: h) Advance payment recovered during this quarter: i) Advance payment for which escalation is payable in this quarter:

(G)

(H)

( I) j) Extra items, Substituted Items and Deviated Quantities paid

As per Clause 12 based on prevailing market rates during this quarter:

Then, M = C + F + I – J

N = 0.85 M k) Less cost of material supplied by the Employer/Department as per

Clause 10 and recovered during the quarter

(J)

(K) l) Less cost of services rendered at fixed charges as per

Clause 34 and recovered during the quarter (L)

Cost of work for which escalation is applicable:

W = N - (K + L) iii) Components of materials (except ce ment, r einforcement bar s, st ructural st ee or other materials covered under cl ause 10C A) l abour; P OL, et c. sh all be pr edetermined for every work and incorporated in the conditions of Contract attached to the tender papers included in Schedule 'F'. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge in working out such percentage shall be binding on the Contractors.

62

iv) The co mpensation for esca lation for o ther m aterials (excluding ce ment, reinforcement bars, structural steel or other materials covered under clause 10 CA) and POL shall be worked as per the formula given below: a) Adjustment for civil component (except ‘Cement, structural steel, reinforcement bars and ot her m aterials covered under cl ause 10CA) el ectrical co mponent o f construction ‘Materials’

Vm = W x Xm x MI-MIo

100 MIo

Vm = Variation in m aterial co st i.e. increase or decrease in t he amount in r upees to be paid or recovered.

W = Cost of work done worked out as indicated in sub-para (ii) of clause 10CC.

Xm= Component of` `materials` (except cement, structural steel, reinforcement bars and other materials covered under clause 10CA) expressed as percent of the total value of work.

MI= All I ndia wholesale pr ice i ndex for ci vil co mponent / electrical co mponent* of construction material as worked out on t he basis of All India wholesale price index for i ndividual co mmodities / group i tems for t he per iod under co nsideration as published by Economic Advisor to Govt. of India, Ministry of Industry & Commerce and appl ying weightages to t he i ndividual co mmodities/group i tems (in r espect o f the justified period extended under the provisions of clause 5 of the contract without any action under clause 2, the index prevailing at the time of stipulated date of completion or the prevailing index of the period under consideration, whichever is less, shall be considered.)

Mio= All I ndia Wholesale pr ice I ndex for ci vil co mponent / electrical co mponent* of construction material as work out on the basis of All India Wholesale price index for individual co mmodities /group i tems valid on t he l ast st ipulated dat e o f r eceipt of tender including extension, if any, as published by the Economic Advisor to Govt. of

India, Ministry of I ndustry & Commerce and applying weightages to the individual commodities/group items.

*Note: relevant component only will be applicable.

(b) Adjustment for component of ‘POL’

Vf = W x Z x FI-FIo

100 FIo

Vf = Variation in cost of fuel, oil & Lubricant i.e. increase or decrease in the amount in rupees to be paid or recovered.

W = Cost of work done worked out as indicated in sub-para (ii) of clause 10CC.

Z = Component of Fuel, Oil & Lubricant expressed as percent of the total value of work.

FI = All I ndia Wholesale P rice I ndex for Fuel , Oil & Lubr icant for the pe riod under consideration as published by Economic advisor t o govt. o f I ndia, M inistry of industry & Commerce, New Delhi. (In respect of the justified period extended under

63

the provisions of clause 5 of the contact without any action under clause 2, the index prevailing at the time of stipulated date of completion or the prevailing index of the period under consideration, whichever is less, shall be considered).

Flo = All India Wholesale Price index for Fuel, Oil & Lubricant valid on t he last stipulated date of receipt of tender including extension, if any.

(v) The following principles shall be followed while working out the indices mentioned in para (iv) above.

(a) The compensation for escalation shall be worked out at quarterly intervals and shall be with respect to the cost of work done as per bills paid during the three calendar months of the said quarter. The first such payment shall be made at the end of three months after t he m onth (excluding t he month i n which t ender was accepted) and thereafter at three months’ interval. At the time of completion of the work, the last period for payment might become less than 3 months, depending on the actual date of completion.

(b) The index (MI/FI etc.) relevant to any quarter/period for which such compensation is aid sh all be t he ar ithmetical average of t he indices relevant t o t he t hree ca lendar months. If the period up t o date of completion after the quarter covered by the last such installment of payment, is less than three months, the index MI and FI shall be the average of the indices for the months falling within that period.

(vi) The compensation for escalation for labour shall be worked out as per the formula given below:-

VL = W x Y x LI - LIo

100 LIo

VL: Variation in labour cost i.e. amount of increase or decrease in rupees to be paid or recovered.

W: Cost of work done, worked out as indicated in sub-para (ii) above.

Y: Component of labour expressed as a percentage of the total value of the work.

LI: Minimum wage in rupees of an unskilled adult male mazdoor fixed under any law, statutory rule or order as applicable on the last date of the quarter previous to the one under consideration. (in respect of the justified period extended under the provisions of cl ause 5 of the co ntract w ithout any act ion unde r cl ause 2, t he

Minimum w age pr evailing on t he l ast dat e o f q uarter pr evious to t he q uarter pertaining to stipulated date of completion or the minimum wage prevailing on the last date of the quarter previous to the one under consideration, whichever is less, shall be considered.)

LIo: Minimum daily wage in rupees of an unskilled adult male mazdoor, fixed under any law, st atutory r ule or o rder as on t he l ast st ipulated dat e o f r eceipt o f t ender including extension, if any.

(vii) The following principles will be f ollowed while working out the compensation as per sub-para (vi) above.

64

(a) The minimum wage of an unskilled male mazdoor mentioned in sub-para (vi) above shall be t he higher of the wage notified by Government if India, Ministry of Labour and that notified by the local administration both relevant to the place of work and the period of reckoning.

(b) The esca lation for l abour al so sh all be pai d at t he sa me quarterly i ntervals when escalation due to increase in cost of materials and/ or POL is paid under this clause.

If such revision of minimum wages takes place during any such quarterly intervals, the escalation compensation shall be payable at revised rates only for work done in subsequent quarters.

(c) Irrespective of variations in minimum wages of any category of labour, for the purpose of this clause, the variation in the rate for an unskilled adult male mazdoor alone shall form the basis for working out the escalation compensation payable on the labour component. viii) In the event the price of materials and/ or wages of labour required for execution of the work decrease/s, there shall be a do wnward adjustment of the cost of work so that such price of materials and/or wages of labour shall be deductible from the cost of work under this Contract and in this regard the formula herein before stated under this Clause 10CC shall mutatis mutandis apply, provided that:

(a) no su ch adj ustment for t he decr ease i n t he p rice of m aterials and/ or w ages of labour aforementioned would be m ade in case of Contracts in which the stipulated period of co mpletion of the work i s equal t o or less than t he time as specified i n

Schedule `F`.

(b) The E ngineer-in-Charge sh all ot herwise be ent itled t o l ay do wn t he pr ocedure by which the provisions of this sub-clause shall be implemented from time to time and the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge in this behalf shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

(ix) Provided always that :-

(a) Where provisions of clause 10CC are applicable, provisions of clause 10C will not be applicable but provisions of clause 10CA will be applicable.

(b) Where provisions of clause 10CC are not applicable, provisions of clause 10 C and

10CA will become applicable.

27. Safety and D efect Li ability of works: A s mentioned i n t he N otice I nviting T ender

(Section-1), scope of the subject work is execution of balance works. The already completed works, which are largely the structural works, conforms to the drawings and specifications.

The balance works are to be constructed on/ ‘in sync” with the existing incomplete works, in order to co mplete t he building and ut ilities etc. While the C ontractor will be required t o execute t he bal ance w ork, he/ she w ill h ave t he r esponsibility o f the structural safety/soundness of t he entire building/utilities during execution and on completion of the works. On co mpletion, the co ntractor w ill be r esponsible for D efect Li ability of t he ent ire works, including those already executed by the previous contractor.

65

28. Use of available material in works:

The materials which were procured and paid under the previous contract are available at site “as is and where is basis” and the same has to be incorporated in the balance works.

Details of such material is placed in the tables below: a) For Civil and Firefighting works:

S. No. Description of Materials

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Reinforcement Steel

Vitrified Tiles

Ceramic Wall Tile

Aluminium

Flush Door Shutter

M.S. Pipe

PVC Pipe

Structural Steel

White Sand Stone

Red Sand Stone

Unit

MT

Dia / Size Approx.

8 mm

10 mm

12 mm

16 mm

Qty.

18.029

2.664

8.335

12.500

20 mm

25 mm

5.504

11.786

Sqm 600 x 600 1130.40

Sqm 450 x 300 410.840

Kg

Sqm

1785.00

136.500

Mtrs.

Mtr.

Kg

Sqm

Sqm

1000 x

2100

25 mm

32 mm

50 mm

80 mm

100 mm

150 mm

110 mm

75 mm

1344.00

258.00

198.00

150.00

120.00

402.00

1098.00

288.00

50 x 5 mm 51150.00

115.98

110.00

2.1 The above material shall be su pplied free of cost to the Contractor. Specific reference in this regard has been given in particular item of work in the BOQ.

2.2 The bidders are encouraged to inspect the material at site while bidding.

2.3 On award of work, the aforesaid material shall be handed over by RITES to the contractor, who shall take the entire responsibility of the materials with respect to its safe upkeep, watch and ward, handling etc. till successful incorporation in the works.

2.4 While RITES has ensured that the materials conform to the contract specification, the contractor shall examine and br ing out deficiency if any, at the time of taking over the aforesaid m aterials. N o su bsequent r equest about any def iciency i n t erms of quantity/quality shall be entertained by RITES after handing over.

2.5 No separate payment over and above BOQ rates shall be made for the above.

----000----

66

SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

PART -A

1. INSPECTION OF WORKS AND RECOMMENDATION BY CONSULTANT

(1) Materials, its sample approval, procurement and storage: The Contractor should make his own arrangement to obtain all materials required for the work, except otherwise stated. All materials shall, so far as procurable, be of the respective kinds described in the Schedule of

Items/Quantities and/ or specifications an d i n acc ordance with t he E ngineer I n-charge instructions, and the Contractor shall furnish with all invoices, accounts, receipts and other vouchers to prove that the materials comply therewith upon the direction of the Engineer Incharge. The C ontractor shall at hi s o wn c ost ar range for and/ or c arry out any t est of any materials which the Engineer In-charge may require.

(2)

The C ontractor s hall s ubmit, s amples o f t he materials and c atalogue, t echnical dat a sheets of capital equipments to the Engineer In-charge for approval in advance, so as to avoid any complications regarding availability. Also, whenever samples are to be prepared for approval the same shall be pr epared immediately on receipt of the drawings and got approved by the Engineer In-charge.

Approval of t he s amples of v arious m aterials g iven b y t he E ngineer-in-charge s hall not absolve the Contractor from the responsibility of replacing defective material brought on site or materials used in the work found defective at a later date. The Contractor shall have no claim to any payment or compensation whatsoever on ac count of any such materials being rejected by t he E ngineer-in-charge. N o c ollection of m aterial s hall be made bef ore i t i s approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Engineer-in- Charge will check that the work is done satisfactorily and the contractor has complied with all the remarks, comments, defects or deficiencies suggested by t he E ngineer-in- Charge. A ll t he t esting facilities and al l t he consumables including the fuel etc. shall be provided by the contractor and nothing extra shall be paid on this account.

2. WARRANTIES and GUARANTEES:

All warranties and guarantees of all equipments/installations/fixtures etc. procured by the contractor shall be in the name of client.

3. NO OBJECTION CERTIFICATES:

Contractor to ensure for all statutory inspections and checks and shall be responsible to provide the no obj ection certificates from all statutory/local authorities like pollution control board, electricity department, Lift, Fire deptt., Municipal corporation, PHED etc. for getting the completion certificate from statutory authorities. All statutory charges, if any, applicable shall be reimbursed on production of valid documentary proof.

4. TRAINING:

67

Contractor shall impart training of operation and maintenance of equipments to client’s staff

(for one month) free o f co st and submit t he o peration and maintenance m anuals of al l equipments/ systems.

5. SHOP DRAWINGS

The contractor shall prepare and submit to RITES for approval detailed shop/working drawings of all works on award of the work where applicable. Four set of all such drawings shall be submitted to RITES for approval.

The co ntractor sh all al so t ake pa rallel act ion ( after aw ard o f w ork) for su bmission o f applications along w ith t he dr awings, docu ments & det ails etc. t o v arious Statutory

Bodies/Authorities for obtaining their approval/clearances.

The contractor shall re- submit 3 se ts of all the drawings to the RITES within 7 day s from date of receiving comments, if any, from the RITES after incorporating the comments.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS - PART - B

1. GENERAL:

The following Special Conditions shall be r ead i n co njunction with G eneral Conditions of

Contract. If there are any provisions in these Special Conditions, which are at Variance with the provisions in the above-mentioned documents, the Provisions in this Special Conditions shall take precedence.

2. Contractor should have ‘A’ Class electrical contractor’s license, for the work and registered with CP WD or M ES or R ailways or P &T or any ot her ce ntral/state govt/PSU el igible f or tendering.

3. HT/LT CONNECTION, INSPECTION & APPROVAL OF THE WORK BY LOCAL AUTHORITY

Contractor shall be responsible for Liaisoning with Government authorities including Safety /

Chief E lectrical I nspector and WBSEB or any other concerned authorities, Bose In stitute, getting t he Electrical load sa nctioned f rom authorities, getting t he H.T. m eter installed and site inspection from Safety / Electrical Inspector, getting the load released and energizing the whole system. No extra payment shall be paid to The contractor for all these scopes of work.

However, the nece ssary r eimbursement o f t he fee dep osited by t he co ntractor to an y statutory authority (as mentioned above) will be m ade on production/submission of the valid documentary proof/evidence/receipt challan.

The co ntractor sh all al so t ake pa rallel act ion ( after aw ard o f w ork) for su bmission of applications along w ith t he dr awings, docu ments & det ails etc. t o v arious Statutory

Bodies/Authorities for obtaining their approval/clearances.

4. Pre-delivery Inspection & approval: The contractor shall offer the pre-delivery inspection of all the m aterials at manufacturers work t o the E ngineer-in-charge. T he i ntimation f or such inspections shall be g iven at least 15 da ys in advance from the date of proposed inspection.

RITES al ong w ith C LIENT r epresentative m ay inspect any /all t he m aterials required i n t his project. A ll t he t esting facilities and al l t he co nsumables including t he fuel et c. dur ing t he testing shall be provided by the contractor and nothing extra shall be paid on this account.

68

5. C ompletion D rawings: After co mpletion o f work, t he co ntractor s hall ha ve t o su bmit t he following set of drawing to RITES.

4 sets of hard copies + 3 Soft Copy (in ‘Auto CAD’ applicable version) in CD of the related all drawings.

6. DOCUMENTS TO BE FURNISHED ON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION

Six sets of the following shall be furnished to RITES / CLIENT by the contractor on completion of the work: - a) Completion Drawings. b) Manufacturer's c atalogues of al l eq uipment and ac cessories, oper ation and maintenance manuals of all major equipment, detailing all adjustments, operation and maintenance procedure. c) Manufacturer’s G uarantee /Warrantee certificates of all t he eq uipments & m aterials etc. d) Clearances/approval of various Statutory Bodies/Authorities for this system. e) Any other information the Engineer-in-charge may deem fit.

No co mpletion ce rtificate w ill be issued unt il t he abov e dr awings and docu ments are submitted to the Engineer-in-charge.

7. Performance Testing at Site:

After completion of erection at site & a preliminary warm up period, acceptance trial run of a minimum period of 7 days duration shall be conducted at site. The trial shall be conducted in t he pr esence o f t he Engineer-in-charge and the t est r esults shall be r ecorded i n an approved format. The contractor at his cost shall provide all facilities labour, instruments, materials and co nsumables etc. as required for t he t est. T ests proving t he satisfactory performance of all operating gear and safety functions and controls shall be carried out. All calibrated instruments, materials, load configuration, fuel, lubricating oil and labour required for carrying out of the test shall be p rovided by the contractor free of cost. The contractor shall give ample notice of the test to the Engineer-in-charge.

8. The contractor shall be fully responsible for the maintenance including watch and ward of all the installations provided by him until the works are handed over to client. Thereafter, the work can be handed ov er to the Client along with all inventories, completion plans etc. as required.

9. CO-ORDINATION:

The C ontractor sh all co -operate w ith any other ag ency working i n t he sa me pr oject, compare plans, specifications and the time schedules and so arrange his work that there will be no interference. T he C ontractor sh all f orward t o t he E ngineer-in-charge al l correspondence and drawings so ex changed. Fai lure t o check plans f or conditions will render the contractor responsible for bearing the cost of any subsequent change found necessary or damages done.

However, contractor shall afford necessary facilities to execute the work simultaneously with ot her agencies executing the works like electrification, horticulture, external se rvices

69

and ot her bui lding w orks for t he sa me pr oject. R ITES sh all ent ertain no cl aim on t his account.

The electrical work sh all be ex ecuted in close C oordination with t he pr ogress of bui lding work. This being the essence of the contract, an activity chart clearly showing critical areas should be furnished before commencing the work for proper monitoring and coordination.

10. HANDING OVER THE WORKS ON COMPLETION:

On sa tisfactory co mpletion of al l t he w orks as per t he pr ovision of t he C ontract, the

Contractor sh all hand o ver t he works to t he cl ient/ Delhi P olice. T he C ontractor sh all ensure t hat al l t he t esting co mmissioning & t rial r un oper ation of al l t he sy stem ar e simultaneously carried out so as to make the same functional immediately on completion.

It sh all be t he r esponsibility of the co ntractor t o obt ain cl earances from al l t he S tatutory

Bodies like E lectrical I nspector, Fi re O fficer & Li ft I nspector et c. a s required for t he installations prior to commissioning & handing over the same after completion of work.

11. All material to be used on works shall bear I.S. Certification work unless otherwise the make sp ecified i n t he i tem or sp ecial co nditions appended w ith t he t ender d ocument. I n case I.S. marked materials or the materials mentioned in the tender document are not used due t o non -availability, t he m aterials used sh all co nform t o I .S. code or C PWD

Specifications applicable in this contract. In such cases the Engineer-in-charge shall satisfy himself about t he quality of su ch m aterials and g ive his approval in writing. O nly ar ticles classified as “First Quality” by the manufacturers shall be use d unless otherwise specified.

All materials not having I.S. marking shall be tested as per provision of the Mandatory Tests in C PWD Specifications and the relevant I S specifications. The Engineer-in-charge may relax the condition regarding testing if the quantity of materials required for the work is small. For the products bearing ISI certification work, no further testing is required at site. In all such cases of use of IS certified materials, proper proof of procurement of materials from authentic manufactures shall be pr ovided by the contractor to the satisfaction of Engineerin-charge.

12. Other agencies doing work of electrification, air-conditioning, external services, other building work, horticulture work etc. for this project will also simultaneously execute the works and the contractor shall afford necessary facilities for the same. The contractor shall leave su ch nece ssary h oles, openi ngs, e tc. for laying/burying i n t he work pi pes, ca bles, conduits, clamps boxes and hooks for fan clamps, etc. as may be required for the electric, sanitary, air-conditioning, fire-fighting, PA s ystem, telephone system, C.C.T.V. system etc. and nothing extra over the agreement rates shall be paid for the same.

13. The work shall be carried out in a manner complying in all respects with the requirements of relevant bye-laws of local body under the jurisdiction of which the work is to be executed or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge and nothing extra shall be paid on this account.

14. For items, where so required, samples shall be prepared before starting the particular items of work for prior approval of the engineer-in-charge and no thing extra shall be pay able on this account.

15. TERMS OF PAYMENT:

Progressive on acco unt pay ment i n form o f running acco unt B ills will be m ade to t he

Contractor as follows:

70

a) 70% of quoted rate as per Contract against supply of material at site in good condition accompanied by r elevant t est ce rtificates and d ocuments after deduct ing towards any recovery as per contract. b) 20% of quoted rate as per Contract against satisfactory installation of equipment at site after deducting towards any recovery as per contract and the payment already made. c) Balance 10% o f quoted r ate as per C ontract u pon su ccessful t esting, commissioning, handing over of installation including submission of final approval from the various

Statutory B odies/Authorities or any ot her S tatutory B ody ( if r equired) a fter deduct ing towards any recovery as per contract and the payments already made.

16. CLARIFICATIONS OF DISCREPANCIES

In the case of Discrepancies between the schedules of quantity, the specifications and/ or the Drawings, the following order of preference shall be observed

1. Description of schedule of Bill of Quantities.

2. Specific conditions & Technical Specifications and Special Conditions, if any.

3. Drawings.

4. CPWD Specifications.

5. Indian standard Specifications of BIS.

71

SECTION 4

SCHEDULES A TO F

72

SECTION 4

PROFORMA OF SCHEDULES

SCHEDULE ‘A’

Schedule of quantities (As per Bill of Quantities attached with Financial Bid)

SCHEDULE ‘B’

Schedule of materials to be issued to the contractor. (Refer Clause 10 of Clauses of Contract)

S.

No

1

Description of items Quantity Rates in Figures & words at which the material will be charged to the contractor

2 3 4

Place of Issue

5

- Not Applicable -

SCHEDULE ‘C’ –

Tools and plants to be hired to the contractor. (Refer clause 34 of Clauses of Contract).

S.No Description

1 2

Hire charges per day

3

Place of Issue

4

- Not Applicable -

SCHEDULE ‘D’

Extra schedule for specific requirements / documents for the work, if any.

- Not Applicable -

SCHEDULE ‘E’

Schedule o f co mponents of C ement, S teel, o ther materials, P OL, Lab our et c .for pr ice escalation. (Refer Clause 10CC of clauses of contract)

The above clause 10 CC of RITES GCC shall not be applicable instead escalation clause as per

CPWD GCC as stipulated in Clause 26 of Special conditions of Contract shall be applicable

SCHEDULE ‘F’

Reference to General Conditions of Contract

Name o f Work

: “Construction o f B alance Work o f P olice S tation and R esidential S taff

Quarters at Greater Kailash-I, New Delhi”.

Estimated cost of work

Rs. 15.21 Crore

Earnest money :

Rs. 15.21 Lakh

Performance Guarantee (Ref. Clause 1)

5% of Tendered value

Security Deposit: (Refer clause 1A) 5% of Tendered value

Notice Inviting Tender and Instruction to Tenderers

Officer inviting tender : GGM/GM/CP/RITES

73

CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

Definitions

2 (iv) Employer

DELHI POLICE

2(v) Engineer-in-Charge GGM/GM/CP/RITES

2(vii) Accepting Authority GGM/GM – SBU-Head ( RITES )

2(ix) Percentage on cost of materials and labour

to cover all overheads and profits. 15%

2(x) Standard Schedule of Rates : CPWD DSR 2014 (for civil items) and

CPWD SOR-2014 (for electrical items)

2(xiii) Date of commencement of work :

15 days from the date of issue of LOA or the first

day of handing over of site whichever is later.

9 (a) (ii) General Conditions of Contract :

RITES General Conditions of Contract 2015 Edition as m odified & cor rected up t o C orrection S lip

No. NIL (In case of clause 10: Clause 10C,10CA and 10 CC of RITES GCC shall not be applicable instead c lause 26 o f S pecial condi tions of contract shall be applicable)

CLAUSES OF CONTRACT

Clause 1

1 (i) Time allowed for submission of P.G. from the

date of issue of Letter of Acceptance subject to

maximum of 15 days :

15 days.

Maximum allowable extension beyond the period

provided in (i) above subject to a maximum of 7 days : 07days.

Clause 2 :

Authority for fixing compensation under Clause 2 GGM/GM – SBU-Head (RITES)

Clause 2A :

Whether Clause 2A shall be applicable

No

Clause 5 :

5.1 (a) Time allowed for execution of work 10 months from the date of start

Date of start : 15 days from the date of issue of Letter of A cceptance o r t he first dat e of handing over of site whichever is later

74

5.1 (b) TABLE OF MILESTONE(S) :

S.No

1

Description of

Milestone (Physical)

1/8 th

3/8 th

of Accepted

Value

Time allowed in days

(from date of start)

1/4 th

1/2 nd

the time of completion period th

the t ime o f completion period

3/4 the time of completion period

Full

Amount to be withheld in case of non achievement of milestone

Rs 25, 000.00 for each day elapsed

-Do-

2

3

3/4 th

of Accepted

Value

of Accepted

Value

Full Work

-Do-

4

As per clause 2 of RITES GCC

Clause 5 A Shifting of stipulated date of completion : GGM/GM – SBU-Head ( RITES )

Competent Authority

Clause 6 A Whether Clause 6 or 6A applicable : Clause 6A Applicable

Clause 7 : Gross work to be done together with net Payment / adjustment of advances for material collected, if any, since the last such payment for being eligible to interim payment :

Rs. 75.00 Lakh

Clause 10A

i) Whether Material Testing Laboratory is to be provided at site.

Yes.

ii) If “YES” list of equipments to be provided

Adequate for field testing of materials at site. Refer Annexure B-1 of GCC .

Clause 10 B

Whether Clause 10 B (ii) to (v) applicable

Clause 10B (ii), 10B (iv), 10B (v) and

10B (iii) Not Applicable

Clause 10 C

25% Component of labour expressed as percent of value of work

Clause 10 CA

S.No Material covered under this clause

1 Cement

2 Steel

Base price of all materials covered under clause 10CA*

Base price declared by DG/CPWD for Delhi in the month of submission of tender

Price of all the materials covered under clause 10CA is to be mentioned at the time of approval of

NIT.

Clause 10 CC

75

Clause 10CC to be applicable in contracts with stipulated period of completion exceeding the period shown in next column 12 Months

Schedule of component of other materials, labour,

POL etc. for price escalation. Component of civil

(except materials covered under clause 10CA)

/ Electrical construction materials expressed as

percent of total value of work: -

Xm 40 %

Component of labour :-(Y) expressed as percent of total value of work

25 %

Component of P.O.L:(Z)

expressed as percent of total value of work Nil

Clause 10 CC : Whether Clause 10CC applicable As per clause 26 of Special

Condition of Contract

Note: Clause 10 CC of RITES shall not be applicable instead Clause 26 of Special Condition of Contract shall be applicable

Clause 11

Specifications to be followed for execution

For CPWD DSR Items:-

of work

CIVIL WORKS

CPWD Specifications 2009 Vol. I & II

ELECTRICAL WORKS

CPWD General Specifications

Part I

Part II

Part III

Part IV

Part V

Part VI

Part VII

Part VIII

Internal 2013

External 2013

Lifts & Escalators 2003

Substations 2013

Wet Riser Sprinkler System 2006

Heating, V entilation &

Conditioning Works 2004

DG Sets 2013

Gas Based Fire Ext. System 2013

Air

For N on D SR I tems and i tems of S pecialised nature / S pecial S pecifications / M akes r efer

Technical Specifications under Section No. 5.

Clause 12

Clause 12.2 Deviation Limit beyond which

12.3 & 12.5 Clauses 12.2,12.3 & 12.5 shall

apply i) For Non-foundation items.

Plus 25%

Minus No limit

ii) For Foundation Items

Plus 100%

Minus No limit

76

Note: For Earthwork, individual classification quantity can vary to any extent but overall Deviation Limits will be as above.

Clause 12.5 Definition of Foundation item if NOT APPLICABLE

other than that described in

Clause 12.5

Clause 16 Competent Authority for

Deciding reduced rates GGM/GM – SBU-Head (RITES )

Clause 17 Maintenance Period

Clause 18 List of machinery, tools & plants t o be deployed by the

Contractor at si te

(Commensurate w ith approved w ork schedule) :-

12 months

As per r equirement of w ork & dul y approved by E ngineer-in-Charge t o complete t he w ork within g iven t ime schedule.

Note: All concreting above 5 c ubic metre per day shall be do ne by RMC f rom

Contractor Own Batching Plant or Approved RMC Plant. Other tools and plants are as per the direction of Engineer-in-Charge required from time to time.

Clause 25

25 (i) Appellate Authority

Appointing Authority

-

-

GGM/GM – SBU-Head ( RITES )

Director (RITES)}

Divisional H ead { Executive

Whether Clause 31A or 32 is applicable Clause 32 is applicable

Clause 36 (i) & (iii)

Minimum Qualifications & Experience required and Discipline to which should belong

Designation Minimum

Qualification

Minimum w experience orking Discipline t which sh belong o ould

Principal Technical

Representative

Technical

Representative

Project P lanning /

Site / B illing

Engineer

Project P lanning /

Site / B illing

Engineer

Engineering G raduate with at least 10

Years experience

Engineering G raduate with at l east 05

Years experience

Engineering G raduate w ith Nil Years experience or D iploma E ngineer w ith at least 05 years experience

Engineering G raduate w ith Nil Years experience or D iploma E ngineer w ith at least 05 years experience

Civil

Civil

Civil

Electrical

Number

1

1

1

1

77

36 ( iv) Recovery f or non -deployment o f P rincipal T echnical R epresentative and D eputy

Technical Representative

Designation

Principal Technical Representative

Technical Representative

Rate o f R ecovery per m onth ( in R s.) for non deployment

45,000.00

30,000.00

Project Planning/ Site / Billing Engineer 20,000.00

Clause 42 :

i) (a) Schedule/statement for determining theoretical quantity o f ce ment & bi tumen on t he ii) basis of Delhi Schedule of Rates printed by CPWD : DSR 2014

Variations permissible on theoretical quantities a) Cement

- for works with estimated cost

put to tender not more than Rs.5 lakhs

- for works with estimated cost put to

tender more than Rs.5 lakhs b) Bitumen for All Works c) Steel Reinforcement and structural steel sections for each diameter, section and category d) All other materials

3% plus / minus

2% plus / minus

2.5% plus only & nil on minus side

2% plus / minus

Nil

RECOVERY RATES FOR QUANTITIES BEYOND PERMISSIBLE VARIATION

Sl.

No.

Description of

Item

1 Cement

Rates in figures and words at which recovery shall be made from the Contractor

Excess beyond permissible

Less use beyond the permissible variation reinforcement

3 Structural Sections

5 free

Bitumen issued at stipulated fixed

NOT APPLICABLE

78

Clause 46

Clause 46.10

Details of temporary accommodation including number of rooms and their sizes as well as furniture to be made available by the Contractor

The C ontractor w ill pr ovide t he following t emporary f urnished accommodations for cl ient e ngineer and his staff at site of work free of cost:

2 rooms & one conference room o f appropriate size with attached toilet.

• Distempering of the three nos. rooms and toilets available.

• 2 rooms provided with air conditioner

(2 t on c apacity) and dur able v inyl sheet flooring

• Meeting room/Conference room with

AC f acility h aving 1 2-15 p ersons capacity with centre table and chairs and durable vinyl sheet flooring

• Providing su fficient l ights (300 flux) and plug points

Two tables of 2”6’ X 5’ size and on e table of 5’X9’ size

A small pantry of 6’x6’ size.

• 3 low height executive cushion chairs and 10 visitors’ chairs of good quality

• 3 t ables of 3’ X4’ si ze and 6 c aned steel chairs

1 almirah 6’ size

2 D esktop w ith 18. 5” monitor

(equivalent to HP P-6382) & UPS

• 1 C olour Las erjet Printer A 3 w ith facility of scan, xerox etc. (latest from

HP)

On ex piry of maintenance period, t he si te o ffice shall be di smantled a nd si te cl eared unl ess the

Employer di rects otherwise. T he furniture w ill be returned t o the C ontractor at w hatever co ndition they are on expiry of maintenance period.

Whether Clause 46.11.1A applicable NO

Whether Clause 46.13A applicable YES

79

Clause 46.17

City of Jurisdiction of Court:

NEW DELHI

Clause 47.2.1

Sum for which Third Party Insurance to be obtained: Rs. 10.00 lakh per occurrence

with the number of

occurrences limited to four.

Clause 55 : Whether clause 55 shall be applicable. No

80

SECTION 5

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND

APPROVED MAKES

81

SECTION 5

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

(A) CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS

1. Schedule of Quantities also termed Bill of Quantities, will include the following: i) ii)

DSR 2014 items

Non DSR or Non Schedule Items

There are a few DSR Items such as Road Work items where DSR items are not as well drafted as corresponding MOST (Ministry of Surface Transport) items. In such cases, it may be desirable to take them under Non Scheduled items.

2. In the case of Delhi Schedule of Rates 2014 items, there should normally be no need f or dr afting any Specifications for M aterials, Workmanship, M ethod o f

Measurement et c. C PWD S pecifications for C ivil Works 2009 Vols I t o VI and

Revised C PWD S pecifications for C ement M ortar, C ement C oncrete a nd R CC

Works 2002 cover in detail the specifications for Materials, Workmanship, Method of measurement etc in the case of DSR Items. If required for each DSR item, reference may be drawn to the relevant CPWD Specifications. In rare cases where it is felt that CPWD Specifications concerned do not cover the full scope of work under any item, reference may be given to IS or any other relevant Specifications

3. In t he ca se o f N on S chedule I tems, nece ssary S pecifications on materials, workmanship, m ethod o f m easurement et c w ill hav e t o be m ade t o reflect t he exact requirements under each item. Depending on t he nature of work reference may be g iven t o C PWD sp ecifications, IS S pecifications, M OST ( Ministry o f

Surface Transport) S pecifications or any ot her sp ecification. There i s al so a possibility that some distinctive part of the work may have to be carried out as per one specification and another part based on a different Specifications

4. In t he P reamble t o S pecifications, i t ca n be i ndicated t hat for i tems where no specific reference has been made to any Specifications, the following should be adopted i n t he or der of precedence s tarting from top and i n al l ca ses t he l atest edition with up to date correction slip should be followed. i) CPWD Specifications ii) Indian Standard Specifications issued by Bureau of Indian iii) MOST (Ministry of Surface Transport) Specifications

In case of doubt, the Engineer in Charge’s Directives may be sought.

82

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.0 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ISSUED BY CPWD

1.1 Civil Engineering Works

CPWD Specification 2009 Vol. I & II. These Specifications have replaced CPWD

Specifications 1996 al ong w ith C orrection S lips issued on t hem. T hese

Specifications cover all types of Building Works. The specifications are available as a printed document issued by CPWD and also in soft copy PDF Format in

CPWD website.

1.2

Electrical Engineering Works

Part No. Description Year of issue

I

II

III

IV

V

VI

VII

Internal

External

Sub Stations

D.G.Sets

Lifts and Escalators

Conditioning Works

Heating, Ventilations & Air

2005

1994

2003

2007

Wet Riser and Sprinkler Systems 2006

2005

2006

The above documents are available as Priced Document issued by CPWD and in soft copy PDF Format in CPWD website.

2.0 STANDARD S PECIFICATIONS I SSUED B Y M INISTRY O F SU RFACE

TRANSPORT

Specifications for R oad and B ridge w orks (Fourth R evision) A ugust 20 01 hav e been published by I ndian Road Congress as a priced docu ment. These

Specification cover exhaustively various Road and Bridge works.

3.0

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ISSUED BY INDIAN RAILWAYS

Railway Board vide their letter No. 2009/LMD/01/03 dated 14/01/2010 have advised t hat t hey hav e appr oved i ssue o f “ Indian R ailways Unified Standard

Specifications or Materials and works with corresponding Indian Railways Unified

Standard S chedule o f i tems (for rates of Materials and works)”. These documents are to be published by Northern Railway on behalf of Railway Board after the Zonal Railways have made out “Schedule of Rates” as applicable to them based on “Standard Analysis of Rates of items”. These Specification however cover only Building and Road works generally on the lines of CPWD and Ministry of S urface Transport. They do not co ver Track w orks which ar e governed by

Manuals and RDSO/Indian Railway Specifications. Pending publication of Unified

Standard S pecifications, t he sp ecifications issued by t he z onal R ailways will be applicable.

83

4.0 SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS (NOT COVERED B Y ANY STANDARD

SPECIFICATIONS)

ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL WORKS:

1. Chicken Wire Mesh:

Providing & Fi xing ch icken wire m esh 24 gauge and 18 mm mesh si ze ch icken wire mesh at junction of concrete & brick work and other locations at all heights including cutting to required size & fixing in position with U nails 150 mm centre to centre etc. as directed by Engineer In Charge. Complete Job.

2. Chicken Wire Mesh over APP:

Chicken Wire Mesh over APP cladding on r etaining wall with the pasting with the pieces of APP Complete Job

3. Stainless Steel Railing:

Stainless steel Railing of Grade 304, consist of 50mm diameter round pipe of 16

Gauge at t op, V ertical post s of 38 m m di ameter r ound pi pe of 16 g auge at 1. 0 meter centre to centre or less including end posts and in between 4 nos. of 12 mm diameter round pipes of 16 Gauge horizontal / slanting as required including necessary fittings complete including fixing in stair or ramp etc. as per the direction of Engineer- In- charge.

Measurements: Railing shall be measured in running meter at top.

Rate: - This includes the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations described above, and is measured in running meter on top.

4. Fire door: MINIMUM 2 HOURS RATING

General

The shutter of the door of approved make shall be so designed so as to provide the specified fire Resistance when tested as per IS: 3614 ( part 2): 1992 and BS:

476 part 20 & 22 to su it t he sp ecified requirement and the manufacturer must produce ce rtificates of a R ecognized of a l aboratory t o t he sa tisfaction of the

Engineer.

Frame

Door frames of 16 S WG G.I sh eet formed t o double r ebate pr ofile o f su itable section as per manufacture with heat activated in tumescent fire seal strips of size

10mmx4mm (for smoke sealing) mounted in the groove in frame of EPDM gasket to act as smoke seal suitable for mounting 120 minutes fire rated shutter with one coat of anti- termite fire retardant prime.

Sill

The sill shall be of 16 SWG G.I tube (not required in escape route doors).

(a) Panels

Providing & fixing o f 4 6 m m t hick steel fire door o f 120 minutes fire r ating fabricated w ith 1. 6 m m t hick galvanized st eel sh eet w ith infill o f fire r ated proprietary insulation filler, both faces of sheet with lock seam joints at style edges and internal reinforcement at top, bottom and style edges for fire rating. The door

84

frame i s manufactured from 1 .6 m m t hick Galvanized S teel sh eet pressed f orm single rebate of profile size 150 m m x 60 mm nominal. The door frame and door shutters are pri-primered with primer and finished with PU paint or powder coating for door shutters, including 200 X 300 mm vision panel made with 6.0 mm thick fire rated g lass, SS- 304 grade bal l bear ing hi nges(2x4=8Nos), 2 hour s fire r ating conforming t o B S: 476 part 22, I S:3614 P art II as per t he prototype ce rtified by

CBRI R oorkee, dul y appr oved by T AC ( Tariff Advisory C ommittee) su itable for mounting on st andard door frame , doo r frame shall be of P CGI sheet 1.6 m m thick knock- down shall be filled with rock wool and exposed surface towards walls shall be pr operly t reated and finished w ith fire r ated pai nt. The door frame & shutter sh all be 60 t o 65 m icron pol yester po wder co ating o f s tandard co lour

(approved by Engineer-in-Charge or Post Office Red) with scripts advised by fire authorities such as "EXIT I N C ASE O F FI RE " or any ot her sl ogan with use jatunral number including fittings & accessories of approved make. (All fittings & accessories also to be 2 hours fire rated) for payment area of door opening shall be m easured. Fi xing sh all be done with S S-304 g rade ex pansion dash f astener with similar fire rating Fittings: all fittings of approved make having minimum 2 hours fire rating of SS 304 grade (brush satin finished).

Lock: 1 No. of approved make with double through locking bolt operated with one side key and other side thumb turn complete in all respect

Door closer: 2 Nos.

Tower bolts: 1 Nos.(Concealed)

Handle: 2 Nos.

Vision panels 200 x 300 mm : 2 Nos.

Double leaf shutter with rebate

HINGES: 304 GRADE S tainless steel bal l hi nges of si ze 125m m*75mm*3mm

Indian make minimum 4 nos. on each door.

Hardware / fittings

(b) Door closer: Fire rated Briton 121 or equivalent imported from Europe /USA having following specification:

• Fixed Strength size 3, CE marked;

• Certifier Approve CF390- suitable for fire doors;

• Strip steel arm set is pressed for increased rigidity;

• Pressure Die Cast Aluminum body;

•Hardened and ground st eel r ack and pi nion m echanism for s mooth and operation;

•High Quality hydraulic fluid with built in temperature compensation ensure

reliable operation between- 15degree C to +40degree C;

• Independently certified for conformity to all requirements of EN1 154, tested to

5,00,000 cycles;

• Independently certified for both closing speed and latching speed;

• Carries a manufacturer ten (10) year warranty,

(c) MORTICE LOCK:

Fire Rated mortice lock ME 60 / E-Series for equivalent imported form Europe

/USA having following specifications:

85

• Lock case European Standard EN12209 /DIN18251 and cylinder to EN1303

• Grade 304 stainless steel faceplate to resist fire / corrosion

• Non-handed and field reversible

• Lock case is in steel

• Latch /Deadbolt/Follower in cast Stainless steel

• Follower suitable for 8mm spindles

(d) DOOR CO-ORDINATOR: Ingersoll Rand makes ‘IVES’ or equivalent door Cocoordinator for Double leaf door Co-ordination.

(e) T OWER B OLT: 304 g rades S.S co ncealed t ower bol t 300m m l ong I ndian make.

(f) Panic bar / exit / Devices

These shall be of press type / pul l type panic bars either si ngle or triple latch.

Briton 376 E series or equivalent imported from Europe /USA having the following specifications:

• Successfully tested for panic application and ex ceeds to the requirement of EN

1125;

• Successfully tested for emergency application to the requirement of EN 179;

• Carries a manufacturer 5yrs. Warrantee certificate;

(g) Seal: A heat activated in tumescent seal of size 10mm*4mm of approved and make or EPD gasket shall be provided on all edges of door to check the spread of smoke in case of fire.

(h) Paint: The door frame and panel shall be primed and finished in polyurethane paint.

(i) V ision pane ls wherever r equire t o be fixed with cl ip on w indow f rames with screws and fasteners on the surface ,fire rated vision glass to be m inimum 6mm thick fire glass with Clear vision and should have tested for thermal properties and hose steam test.

5. Aluminum Grill:

Material: The powder used for powder coating shall be Epoxy/polyester powder of make approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

The co ntractor sh all give det ailed pr ogramme for powder co ating in advance, to facilitate the inspection by Engineer-in-Charge.

Pre-treatment: Each Aluminium alloy extrusion or performed section shall be thoroughly cleaned by alkaline or acidic solutions under the conditions specified by chemical conversion coating supplier and then rinsed. A chemical conversion coating sh all be appl ied by t reatment w ith a so lution co ntaining esse ntially chromate i ons or ch romate and phosp hate i ons as the act ive co mponents as applicable. The amount of the conversion coating deposited depends on the type used by the conversion coating chemical supplier. The conversion coating shall be thoroughly r insed ei ther w ith t he so lution sp ecified by t he co nversion co ating chemical supplier or with de-mineralized water and then dried at the temperature for the time specified by the conversion coating chemical supplier. The contractor shall submit the detail specifications and application procedure for application of conversion coating for approval of Engineer-in-Charge. The metal surface after the

86

conversion coating pretreatment and prior to the application of the coating shall be free from dust or powdery deposits.

Process: The pol yester pow der sh all be appl ied by el ectrostatic powder sp ray method. B efore st art of pow der co ating the co ntractor sh all su bmit det ail specification for application of polyester powder from manufacturer of the polyester powder for approval of Engineer-in-Charge. The powder coating shall be applied as per the specification approved by Engineer-in-Charge.

Thickness: The thickness of the finished polyester powder coating measured by micron meter shall not be less than 50 micron nor more than 120 micron at any point.

Performance Requirements for the Finish

(i) Surface appearance: The finish on significant surfaces shall show no scratches when illuminated and is examined at an oblique angle, no blisters, craters; pinholes or scratches shall be visible from a distance of about 1 m. There shall not be any visible variation in the colour of finished surfaces of different sections and between the colours of different surfaces of same section.

(ii) Adhesion: When a coated test piece is tested using a spacing of 2 mm between each of the six parallel cuts (the cut is made through the full depth of powder coating so t hat metal su rface i s visible) a nd a pi ece o f adhesi ve t ape, approximately 25 m m x 150 mm approved by the Engineer-in-Charge is applied firmly to the cut area and then removed rapidly by pulling at right angles to the test area, no pieces of the finish other than debris from the cutting operation shall be removed from the surface of the finish.

Protection of Powder Coated / Anodizing Finish : It is mandatory that all

Aluminium members shall be wrapped with self adhesive non-staining PVC tape, approved by Engineer-in-Charge.

Measurement: All t he A luminium g rill se ctions including sn ap beadi ng f ixed i n place sh all be m easured al ong t he outer periphery of opening co rrect to a millimeter. The weight calculated on the basis of actual average (average of five samples) weight of composite section in kilogram correct to the second place of decimal shall be taken for payment. (Weight shall be taken after anodizing). The weight of cl eat sh all be added f or pay ment. N either any deduct ion nor any thing extra shall be paid for skew cuts.

Polyester powder coated Aluminium Grill :-

The Grill shall be bent at right angles at ends. Over this, U beading shall be fixed with small screws at about 75 m m centres.The space between the beading and rebates, where the grill is bent, shall be neatly finished with putty, so that the end of the grill may not be visible.

Rate: - This includes the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations described above, and is measured in Kgs.

6. Stainless Steel Wire Gauge

The stainless steel wire mesh shall be m ade out of stainless steel wires of grade

316 with average width of aperture 1.4 mm in both directions and dia. of wire 0.63 mm. The st ainless st eel wire m esh sh all be i nstalled i n t he al uminum s hutter i n

87

tight position to avoid any shrinkage in plane with the help of clips etc. and thereafter f ix aluminum beadi ng as per the a pproved sh op dr awings and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge Providing and f ixing fly proof Stainless Steel wire g auze t o windows and clerestory w indows using S .S. wire gauge w ith average width of aperture 1.4 mm in both directions with wire of dia. 0.63 mm. with aluminum powder coated (Heavy duty) beading.

7. Glazing for Aluminium Windows:

The glass shall be clear float glass as approved by Engineer. It shall be clear,float transparent and free from cracks subject to allowable defects. The float glass shall conform to I S 14900. The t hickness of float glass shall depend on t he si ze o f panel. The tolerance in thickness shall be as as per Table above and clause

21.2.3.2 of CPWD Specifications 2009.

Thickness: T he thickness of f loat g lass shall de pend on the size of panel. The tolerance in thickness shall be as under:

TABLE

Nominal t hickness

(in mm)

4.0

5.0

6.0

8.0

Tolerance (in mm)

± 0.3

± 0.3

± 0.3

± 0.6

Allowable defects

The allowable defects shall be as per IS 14900.

Tests

Thickness

The thickness of float glass shall be measured with micrometer or a caliper which is graduated to 0.01 mm.

Scratches, Rubs, Crush, Bow, Reams, Strings, lines and perspective distortion

Thickness: The thickness float glass shall be measured w ith m icrometers or a caliper which is graduated to 0.01 mm or with a m easuring instrument having an equivalent capacity.

Scratches, Rubs and Crush : Place the sample of float glass in a vertical position approximately 50 cm from the viewer’s position and l ook through it using either day light without direct sunlight or a background light suitable for observing each type of defect.

88

Intensity of Scratches, Rubs, Crush I ntensity

Distance Limit

Faint Shall not be detectable beyond 50 cm

Light Detectable between

50-100 cm and not beyond 100 cm.

Bow: Depending on the side on which bow is present, stand the sample vertically on a wooden pl ank. Stretch a t hread ed ge t o edge. M easure t he longest perpendicular. Distance f rom the thread to t he su rface of f loat g lass facing the thread and express it as percentage of the length of float glass from edge along the thread.

Reams, S trings and Lines: Focus a l ight projector with a 500 w l amp and an objective lens with an approximate 5 cm aperture and about 30 cm focal length on a flat white projection screen placed about 760 cm from the light source in dark room. Place the float glass in a vertical position parallel to the screen between the light and t he sc reen. The sh adowgraph r ead out i s the di stance a t w hich t he distortion just blends with the general shadow of the glass on the screen.

TABLE

Intensity of Reams, Strings and Lines

Intensity Distance Limit

Light 7.5 cm

Medium 5.0 cm

Heavy

2.5 cm

Perspective Distortion: When tested as per test procedure described below it shall not give distorted vision of straight stripe pattern.

EPDM GASKETS AND SEALANTS

The E PDM G askets sh all be of si ze and pr ofile as shown i n dr awings and as called for, to render the glazing, doors, windows, ventilators etc. air and water tight. Samples of gaskets shall be su bmitted for approval and t he EPDM gasket approved by Engineer sh all onl y be use d. The co ntractor sh all submit documentary proof of using the above material in the work to the entire satisfaction of Engineer.

The EPDM gasket shall meet the requirements as given in Table below:

89

TABLE

SI.

No.

1

2

3

4

Description Standard Follow

Tensile strength

Kg.f/cm2

Compression set % at

O° CC 22 Hrs.

Ozone resistance

ASTM-D 412

Elongation at break % ASTM-D 412

Modulus 100% kgf/cm2 ASTM-D 412

ASTM-D 395

Specification

70 Min.

250 Min.

22 Min.

50 Max.

5 ASTM-D 1149 No visible cracks

The sealants of approved grade aand colour shall only be used. The silicone for perimeter joints (between Aluminum section and RCC/Stone masonry) shall be of make approved by the Engineer.

Reflective Glass

This is an ordinary glass with a metallic coat to reduce solar heat.

Types of coatings

Pyrolitic coating and vacuum coated glass are generally used.

Performance o f reflective g lass: The pe rformance o f reflective glass 6 m m of nominal thickness is given below:

SI.NO. Parameter

1.

Threshold Ratio In

%age

15-46

12-24

2.

3.

4.

5.

Visible Light

Transmittance (%)

Reflectance (%)

Total Solar Energy:

- Transmittance (%)

- Reflectance (%)

Ultra Violet Rays:

- Transmittance (%)

U-Value

- Summer

- Winter

Shading Coefficient

16-24

8-12

2-10

0.58

0.45

0.25-0.35

8. Structural Glazing:

Structural G lazing sh all be f abricated out o f heavy dut y a luminium ex truded

Profiles comprising o f Mullion, T ransom, Glazed P anel S hutter – Vision P anel

Shutters and Spandrel Panel Shutters suitable to accommodate 6mm thick single glass and IGU comprising of 6mm thick Low ‘E’ Heat Reflective Toughened Glass on su rface 1 + 15mm Argon filled G ap + 6mm Clear T oughened inside. T ypical

Proposed se ction & Typical P rofiles combination dr awing sh all be as attached here-with. All profiles shall be confirming to IS – 733 for chemical composition and

90

Mechanical properties; and confirming to IS -8147 -1976 as per design complete in all r espect. The lump sum r ate q uoted sh all be deem ed t o include for structural glazing complete all as specified and shown on drawing.

Structural g lazing work shall be executed by the specialist f irm. T he nam e o f specialist firm shall be approved by Project Manager.

9. Insulation Panel:

Providing and fixing of insulation panel (spandrel area) comprising of glass wool insulation of Density 48Kg/ Cum UP Twiga make or equivalent with one side tissue and the other side with aluminium foil including 1mm thick GI sheet powder coated and fixed between glass and insulation panel. Shop drawings to be g ot approved by EIC before execution. Complete Job

10. Smoke Seal

Providing and fixing of smoke seal with cover frame work fabricated from 1mm thick GI sheet dully filled with loose glass wool.

Shop drawings to be got approved by EIC before execution. Complete Job

11. Cinder Filling

Supplying and filling cinder in sunken floors including, ramming consolidating and dressing complete. (Design as approved by EIC). Complete Job

12. Cupboard & Shutters: The Appearance shall be as of st andard steel almirahs, manufactured by reputed safe manufacturers. The shutter shall be double l eaf.

Frame and sh utter to b e fabricated ou t o f sp ecified M S sh eet w ith nece ssary welding. The sh utter sh all be pr ovided with l ocking ar rangement with nece ssary lock and keys with handle, hinges and hold fasts etc.

Fixing: - Frame shall be f ixed to walls by means of adjustable lugs with split end tail to jambs.

Painting: - Before the members / frame and shutters are placed in position or taken out of workshop shall have hot dip painted. Inner face to be enamel painted and outershall be t eak finish over under coat of primer and nece ssary steel putty etc. complete.

Measurements: - Out to out surface measurements shall be measured in Sqm.

Rates: - Rates includes the co st o f l abour a nd m aterials required i n al l t he operations including fixing at site of work.

13. Magic Eye:

Irrespective of whether shown on drawings or not one number magic eye shall be provided to each entrance door (one per DU) as directed by Project Manager and shall be as per sample approved by the PM. It shall be of brass body, with both sides lenses, and of approved make.

14. High Strength Aluminium Rod

Drapery Rod, wherever shown on dr awings, shall be of high strength aluminium rod powder coated thickness 40-60 micron of outer dia 19/20 mm & inner dia 16

91

mm with plastic rings made of ABS plastics for JCO’s & OR’s DUs. For the officers/Major DUs the rod shall be of outer dia 28 mm & inner dia 24.5 mm. The brackets shall be of galvanized st eel 1. 6 m m thick. The drapery r od sh all be of make MAC-Sleek Line type – I / Vista Levolor Soffio-I for JCO’s / OR’s DUs. For officers / Major DUs, the drapery rod shall be of make: MAC-Sleek Line type II /

Vista Levolor Soffio-II.

15. Dismantling of Exposed Grit Plaster:`

Dismantling of existing Exposed Grit finish plaster / stone work including sub base mortar and di sposal o f m alba ou t o f si te i ncluding al l l eads , t ransportation, loading, unloading complete.

92

LIST OF MATERIALS OF APPROVED MAKES/BRANDS

S.NO.

1.

2

3

4

5

MATERIALS BRAND NAMES

Cement

Steel

Flush doors

Marine Plywood/

BWP plywood for panelled shutters

Particle board for panelled shutters

ACC, Vikram, Shree, Diamond, J.K Cement work,

Binani, G ujarat A mbhuja, S hriram or ot her reputed manufacturer of Cement to ISI certification. Cement from mini cement plant shall not be allowed.

TATA/TISCON, SAIL, VIZAG / Rashtriya Ispat

Nigam L td. o r E quivalent w ith written appr oval only

KITPLY(Swastik) GREENPLY, Archidply,

Century

Kitply /DURO /Archidply/CENTURY/ GREENPLY

Archidply/ECOBOARD/Century/Greenply

6

7

8

9

Adhesive

Screws

Glass

FEVICOL/VEMICOL or Equivalent

GKW/ Nettle fold or Equivalent

MODIFLOAT/ Saint Gobain /ASAI

Paints & Distemper Asian/ Berger/Nerolac/ICI

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Water proofing

Cement Paint

Snowcem Plus/Aquacem/ Ceco-Cem

Water proofing

Compound

Ceramic

Tiles/Vitrified tiles

Pidilite/CICO/ACC/Roffe

Somany Pilkington (first quality)

Johnson (first quality)

Kajaria (first quality) or Equivalent

Hindware/Parryware/Cera Vitreous China

Sanitary ware

W.C. seat and cover

(IS-2548) a) Commander I.S. (solid heavy duty) b) Admiral (solid heavy duty)

PVC Flushing Cistern Duralite/Commander/Jindal

Stainless Steel Sinks

(ISI Mark)

Neelkanth /Cobra/Jayna/Nirali

C.P. brass fittings, fixtures & C.P. Waste

Parryware/ GEM/Jaquar

93

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

36

37

38

32

33

34

35

39

20

21

18

19

22

23

C.P Bottle Trap Parryware/ GEM/Jaquar

Stainless Steel Sink Neelkanth/Jayna or equivalent

Bath Room C.P.

Accessories

Health Faucet (With

S/S)

Mirror

Centrifugal Cast iron spun pipe & fittings

(IS:3989)

D.I. Pipes & fittings

(water supply)

G.I. pipes (ISI

Mark)

M.S Pipes

Parryware/ GEM/Jaquar

Parryware/ GEM/Jaquar

Modi Float Glass/ATUL/Saint Gobain

NECO/HEPCO/HIF

ELECTROSTEEL/ KESSO / KDUPL/ KAZECO

Jindal (Hissar)/Prakash Surya/ TATA or

Equivalent

Jindal (Hissar)/ TATA/GST/BST or Equivalent

U.P.V.C. pipes and fittings

G.I. fittings

GI / MS Forged Steel fittings IS:1239(Part-

II)

Aluminium

Accessories

Gunmetal valves (Full way valve)

(a) Class-I

(b) Class-II

Sluice Valve

Supreme /Finolex or Equivalent

UNIK/Kent or Equivalent

VS/DRP/True Forge/SS

Classic/ Argent/Everite/Crown

Zoloto/Leader/Sant/CIM

Leader/Sant/CIM

Kirlosker/Leader/IVC

Non Return valve

Mechanical Seal

Cable/Wires (Power

& Control)

Pressure Gauge

Fire Hose

Cabinet/M/s Frames

Landing Valve

Hose Reel Drum

Kirlosker/Leader/IVC

Sealol/Burgman

Skytone/Finolex/Grindlays

H Gurn/Febiq or equivalent

Omax/Superex/Newage

Omax/Superex/Newage

Omax/Superex/Newage

94

59

60

61

56

57

58

47

48

49

44

45

46

40

41

42

43

50

51

52

53

54

55

62

Fire Brigade

Inlet/outlet Conn.

Branch pipe

Rubber Hose

MV Board/MCC

Moulded Case circuit breaker

Switch fuse and fuse switch units

Contactors and starters

ERW M.S. Conduits

(ISI mark)

Anti Vibration

Mountings

Battery

Omax/Superex/Newage

Omax/Superex/Newage

Jyoti/Padmini/Maruti/ISI made

Diamond/CPRI Approved makes

L&T/Siemen/ABB

L&T/Siemen/GE/English Electric/Crompton

Greaves

L&T/SIEMEN/ABB

BEC/Steelcraft/AKG/ISI marked

Dunlop

PVC wires/Cables

(Copper)

Exide/AMCO

National/Finolex/skytone

Manual Break Glass Agni/Burnex

Agni/Burnex Sounder With LMT including Hooter

Manual Alarm Panel Agni/Burnex

Fire Hose

Cabinet/MS frame

Omex

Ball Valve Leader/CIM

Butterfly Valve

Air Release Valve

C.I. covers &

Manhole covers

(IS:1726)

SFRC covers for manhole

C.I. double flanged

Sluice valve &

Non Return Valve

CI Disk Type non return valves (65mm dia and above-Dual plate type)

Float Valve

(gunmetal) upto

40mm

Audco/KSB/Castle/Inter Valve

Kirlosker/IVC/RBM

NECO/HEPCO/SRIF

Thermodrain/KK

Kirloskar / Leader

Kirloskar / Leader/Inter Valve/KSB

Leader/Sant

95

82

83

84

63

64

65

66

Float Valve (CI)

50mm and above

Plastic Encapsulated foot Rest

Grating for Floor Trap

& Floor Drain

CI Strainer more than

65mm dia.

67 Insulation

t ernal

x ternal

68 Fire Extinguishers

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

Leader/Sant/Sarker

KGM or Equivalent

Vijay/GMGR

Leader/Kartar

Super Cera/Kaiflex

Pykote / Makpolykote

Minimax/Alert/Life Guard/ Omex

Fire fighting first aid hose reel a) Hose reel b) Rubber

Tubing c) Thermo

Plastic Hose reels

R.R.L Hose

Newage/Minimax/Omex

Padmini/Omex

Kesara Plast/Omex

Newage/Padmini/Kesara Plast/Omex

Fire Fighting equipment not covered elsewhere

Landing valves

Newage/Minimax/Omex

Punps for fire &

Plumbing

PPR Pipes for water supply

Newage/Minimax/Omex

CRI/Wilo/Kirlosker/Seimens/Crompton

SFMC/Supreme/Fusion

Motor Control Panel Adlec/Advance/SRS

77

78

79

80

81

Sprinklers

Fire doors and Panic bars

PVC door shutters & frame

Wall Putty

Plaster Of Paris

Door Closer

Grinnell/Star/Tyco/Viking/Omex

GMP Technical Solutions/Guardian Shakti Met /

Pacific fire control / Sukri Fire

Rajshri Plastic wood, Caprihance Industries,

Finolex or Equivalent

Birla/J.K/Asian/ Shalimar &Kamdhenu

Adhar stambh or equivalent (ISI mark)

Hardwyn Everite/Door king/Godrej/Dorma

85

86

Aluminium works

Polysulphide Sealent Fosroc, Pidilite, Latrite

Epoxy resin bonding coat

MS Structural steel sections

Cupboard/drawer lock

Hindlaco /Jindal/ or Equivalent

Hindustan Cibagiegy, Sika

TATA, SAIL, VIZAG

Hettich/Godrej/Dorma

96

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

87

88

89

Stainless steel

Harware

Powder Coated MS hardware

Pure Polyester

Powder coated material

PVC Water Stops

White Cement

Dash Fasteners./

Anchor bolts

Stainless Steel Bolts,

Washers and Nuts.

Stainless

Pressure P

Screws.

Stainless Steel

Steel

Friction Stay

E.P.D.M. Gaskets late

Motor

Exit Signage

Hettich/Godrej/Dorma/Earlbehari

Everite/Hemco/Shalimar/Gadget

Jotun/Berger/GoodlassNerolac.

Supreme, Fixopan or approved equivalent

.Birla White/ J.K/Kamdhenu

Hilti, Fischer, Bosch

Kundan, Puja, Atul

Kundan, Puja, Atul.

Securistyle, Earl Bihari

Anand Reddiplex, Enviro Seals

Crompton/Kirloskar/Siemens

Utoglo/Agni

97

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR

PLUMBING WORKS

98

ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING WORKS:

1.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 List of Standards

a. Codes and r eference s tandards referred t o i n t he co ntract sh all be understood to form a part of the contract. b. The Vendor shall be r esponsible for ad herence t o r eference standard requirements by sub Vendors and suppliers. c. Where edi tion dat e is not specified, co nsider that reference to manufacturer's and publ ished codes, standards and specifications are made to the latest edition (revision or amendment) approved by the issuing organization current at issue date of the Tender.

d. The specified reference standards are Indian Standard Codes and are intended to establish the quality of materials and workmanship required for the works. Reference standards published in other countries may, in the sole judgment o f the Client's consultant, also be acceptable providing that the Vendor furnishes sufficient dat a for the Client's

Consultant to determine if the quality of materials and workmanship at least equals or exceeds all tests prescribed by the specified reference

Indian Standards codes. e. Such ot her r eference standards published by t he following w ill be considered:

BSI : British Standards Institute

AFNOR : Association Francise de Normalisation (French

Standards Institute)

DIN :

ANSI :

ASTM :

Deutsche I ndustries N orman ( German

Standards)

American National Standards Institute

American Society for Testing and Materials f. Should regulatory requirements or the contract conflict with specified reference standards or specifications, the more st ringent in each ca se shall govern. g. Where reference i s made t o m anufacturer's directions, i nstructions or specifications they sh all i nclude f ull i nformation on st oring, handl ing, preparing, m ixing, i nstalling, er ection, appl ying or ot her m atters concerning t he m aterials pertinent to t heir use i n t he w orks and their relationship to materials with which they are incorporated. h. Standards, sp ecifications, asso ciations, and r egulatory bodi es are generally referred to throughout the specifications by their abbreviated designations. The materials workmanship shall be in accordance with the requirement o f the appr opriate I .S co de w herever appl icable t ogether with any building regulations or bye-laws governing the works.

The following list is included for guidance only and the omission of any

Code of P ractice from t he l ist does not r elieve t he V endor f rom compliance therewith:

The more important Codes, Standards and Publications applicable to this section are listed hereinafter:

99

-

General

IS 1200

IS 12183(Part 1)

IS 12251

IS 3844

Mode of Measurement

Code of practice for plumbing in m ulti- storied buildings (Water Supply)

Code of p ractice for dr ainage o f bui lding basements

Code of pr actice for i nstallation and maintenance of internal fire hydrants and hose reel on premises

SP 7

IS 27 Pig Lead

IS 325

IS 554

National bui lding co de of India (Part IX plumbing services)

IS 694

IS 779

IS 1172

IS 1367

IS 1367

Three phase induction motors

Dimensions for pi pe threads where pr essure light joints are required on the threads

PVC insulated cables for working voltages up to

& including 1100 V

Specification for water meters (domestic type)

Code of B asic requirements for w ater su pply drainage and sanitation

Technical su pply co nditions for t hreaded st eel fasteners: Part I Introduction ( Part 1) and general information.

Technical su pply co nditions for t hreaded st eel fasteners

Part 2 Product grades and tolerances.

PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables:

Part 1 for working voltages up to and i ncluding

(Part 2)

IS 1554

(Part 1)

1100 V.

IS 1554 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables:

(Part 2) Part 2 for working voltages from 3.3 KV upto and including 11KV

IS 1726 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames

IS 1979 High test line pipe

IS 1742 Code of practice for building drainage

IS 2064 Selection, installation and maintenance of

sanitary appliances-Code of practice

IS 2065 Code of practice for water supply in buildings

IS 2643 Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening

purposes

(Part 1) Part 1 Basic profile and dimensions

IS 2643 Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes

(Part 2) Part 2 Tolerances

IS 2643 Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes

(Part 3) Part 3 Limits of sizes

IS 2104 Specification for water meter boxes (domestic type)

IS 2373 Specification for water meters (bulk type)

IS 2379 Colour code for the identification of pipe lines

IS 7558 Code of practice for domestic hot water installations

IS 5329 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for buildings.

100

-

IS 2527 Code of practice for fixing rainwater gutters and down pipes for roof drainage

IS 9668 Code of practice for provision and maintenance of water Supplies and fire fighting.

Pipes and Fittings

IS 458

IS 651

IS 1239

Part 1

IS 1239

Part 2

IS 1536

Specification for pr essure co ncrete pi pes (with and without Reinforcement)

Salt glazed stone-ware pipes and fittings

Mild steel tubular and ot her wrought steel pipe fittings

- Mild steel tube

Mild steel tubular and other wrought steel pipe fittings

IS 1538

Centrifugally cast (spun)iron pressure pipes for water, gas and Sewage

Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage

(Parts 1 to 23)

IS 1729 Sand ca st i ron sp igot and so cket so il, w aste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories

IS 1879

(Parts 1 to 10)

Malleable cast iron pipe fittings

IS 2501

IS 3486

IS 3589

Copper tubes for general engineering purposes

Cast iron spigot & socket pipes

Seamless or electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage (168.3 mm to 2032 mm outside

IS 3989

IS 6418

IS 7181 diameter) centrifugally ca st (spun) i ron sp igot an d so cket so il, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories

Cast i ron and m alleable cast iron f langes for g eneral engineering practice.

Specification f or hor izontally ca st i ron doubl e f langed pipes for water, gas and sewage.

-

Valves

IS 780

IS 2906

IS 1703

IS 778

IS 3950

IS 5312

(Part 1)

IS 5312

(Part 2)

Specification for sluice v alves for water works purposes

(50 to 300 mm size)

Specification for sluice v alves for water works purposes

(350 to 1200 mm size)

Specification co pper al loy f loat v alves (horizontal plunger type) for water supply

Specification for co pper al loy g ate, globe and check valves for water works purposes

Specification for surface boxes for sluice valves

Specification for swing check type reflux

(non return) valves: Part 1 Single door pattern

Specification for swing check type reflux

(non return) valves: Part 2 Multi door pattern

101

-

Sanitary Fittings

IS 8931

IS 8934

IS 781

IS 782

IS 2692

IS 6249

IS 2326

IS 774

IS 775

IS 6411

IS 771

IS 5961

IS 7231

Specification for cast copper alloy fancy bib taps and stop valves for water services

Specification for cast copper alloy fancy pillar taps and stop valves for water services

Specification for cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop valves for water services

Specification for caulking lead

Specification for ferrule for water services

Specification for flush valves and fittings for marine use

Specification f or aut omatic flushing ci stern for urinals

Specification for flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals (other than plastic cistern)

Specification for ca st i ron br ackets and su pports for wash basins

Specification f or g el-coated g lass fibre reinforced polyester resin bath tubs

Specification for glazed f ire cl ay sa nitary appliances (Part 1 to 6)

Specification f or ca st iron gratings for drainage purposes.

Specification f or p lastic flushing ci sterns for water closets and urinals

IS 2548

IS 2556

(Part 1)

IS 2556

(Part 2)

IS 2556

(Part 3)

IS 2556

Specification for plastic seats and covers for water closets, Thermoset ( Part 1 ) se ats and co vers ,

(Part 2) S pecification for pl astic seats and co vers for water closets, Thermoplastic seats and covers

Specification for v itreous sanitary appl iances

(vitreous china)

Part 1 : General requirements

Specification for v itreous sanitary appl iances

(vitreous china)

Part 2: Specific requirements of wash-down water closets

Specification for v itreous sanitary appl iances

(vitreous china)

Specific requirements of squatting pans

Specification for v itreous sanitary appl iances

(vitreous china)

Part 4

IS 2556

Specific requirements of wash basins

Specification f or vitreous sanitary appl iances

(vitreous china)

(Part 6 Sec 2) Specific requirements of u rinals, S ection 2 H alf

IS 2556

Part 6

IS 2556 stall urinals

Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances

(vitreous china)

Specific requirements of urinals, Section 4 Partition slabs

Specification for vitreous sanitary

102

-

(Part 6 Sec 5)

Part 6 appliances (vitreous china)

Specific requirements of urinals, Section 5 waste

IS 2556 fittings

Specification for v itreous sanitary ( Part 6 S ec 6) appliances (vitreous china) S pecific requirements of urinals, Water spreaders for half stall urinals

IS 2556

IS 2556

IS 2556

IS 2556

Specification for v itreous sanitary ( Part 6 S ec 7) appliances (vitreous china) Part 7: Specific requirements of half round channels

Specification f or vitreous sanitary ( Part 7 S ec 7) appliances (vitreous china) Part 7: Specific requirements of half round channels.

Specification for v itreous sanitary ( Part 8) appliances (vitreous china) Part 8: Specific requirements of siphonic wash down water closets.

Specification for vitreous sanitary (Part 11) appliances (vitreous china) P art 11: S pecific requirements for shower rose

IS 2556

IS 2556

Specification for vitreous sanitary (Part 12) appliances (vitreous china) P art 12: S pecific requirements floor traps

Specification for vitreous sanitary (Part 15) appliances (vitreous china) P art 15: S pecific requirements of universal water closets

Water Quality Tolerance

IS 10500

IS 4764

IS 1700

IS 1978

IS 2002

IS 2629

IS 2717

IS 2825

IS 2963

IS 3025

IS 3114

IS 3311

IS 3468

IS 3589

IS 4127

IS 4346

IS 4711

Drinking water

Tolerance l imits for se wage ef fluents discharged into inland surface waters

Specification for drinking fountains

Line pipe

Steel plates for pressure vessels for intermediate & high temperature service including boilers

Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing on iron and steel

Glossary of terms relating to vitreous enamelware and ceramic-metal systems

Code for unfired pressure vessels

Specifications for copper alloy waste-fittings for wash basins and sinks

Method of sampling and test (physical and ( Part 1 to 44) chemical) for water and waste water

Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes

Specification for waste plug and its accessories for sinks and wash basins.

Pipe nuts

Seamless or electrically welded pipes for water, gas and sewage

Code of practice for laying glazed stoneware pipes

Specifications for washers for use with f ittings for water services

Methods of sampling steel pipes, tubes and fittings

103

IS 4853

IS 6159

IS 6411

IS 8090

IS 8321

IS 8419

Recommended practice for radiographic inspection of fusion welded butt joints in steel pipes

Recommended practice for design and fabrication of material prior to galvanizing.

Specification f or g el-coated g lass fibre reinforced polyester resin baths

Specification for co upling, br anch pi pe, noz zle, used in hose reel tubing for fire fighting

Glossary of terms applicable to plumbing work

Requirements for water f iltration equipment ( Part

1)

IS 8419

IS 6392

IS 9758

IS 9842

IS 9912

IS 10221

IS 10234

IS 10446

Part 1 Fi ltration m edia-sand and g ravel requirements for rapid sand gravity filtration equipments.

Requirements for water f iltration equipment ( Part

2)

Part 2 under drainage system

Steel pipe flanges

Specification for flush valves and fitting for water closets and urinals

Preformed fibrous pipe insulation

Coal tar based coating materials and suitable primers for protecting iron and steel pipe lines

Code of practice for coating and wrapping of underground mild steel pipelines

Recommendations for general pipeline welding

Glossary o f t erms relating t o w ater su pply and

IS 11149

Sanitation

Rubber Gaskets

IS 11790 Cod of practice for preparation of butt-welding ends

IS 12011 for pipes, valves flanges and fittings

Code of sa fety pr actice f or dom estic LPG installation

2.0 Technical Specification for plumbing Works:

2.1 CP Fittings & Fixtures:

General:

The r ates quoted by v endors shall be i nclusive of acce ssories (in s uch ca se) required for i nstallation. A ccessories shall i nclude pr oper fixing a rrangements, brackets, nuts, bolts, washers, screws and required connection pieces. Fixing screws shall be half round head chromium plated (CP) brass screws, with CP brass washers unless otherwise specified.

The sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be installed at the correct assigned position as shown on the drawings and as directed by the Architect / Client’s Site representative and shall fully meet with the aesthetic and symmetrical requirements as desired by the Architect .

Wall flanges shall be provided on all walls, floors, columns etc. wherever supply and disposal pipes pierce t hrough t hem. These wall ca ps shall be of ch romium plated brass fittings and the receiving pipes shall be large enough to cover the punctures properly.

104

Sizes of sanitary fixtures given in the Specifications or in the Bill of Quantities are for identification with reference to the catalogues of make considered. Dimensions of similar models of other makes may vary within + 10% and the same shall be provided without any claim for extra payment. No payment shall be deducted on this account.

Vendor shall fix all plumbing fittings such as water faucets, shower fittings, mixing valves et c. i n a ccordance w ith m anufacturer’s i nstructions and connect t o piping system. Vendor shall supply all fixing materials such as screws, rawl plugs, unions, collars, compression fittings etc., as required.

Joints / gaps between all sanitary appliances / fixtures and the floor / walls shall be caulked with an approved mildew resistant sealant, having antifungal properties, of colour and shade to match that of the appliances / fixture and the floor / wall to the extent possible

General Requirement

o

The fixtures and fittings shall be pr ovided with al l su ch accessories as ar e r equired t o co mplete t he i tem i n satisfactory working co nditions, whether sp ecifically m entioned or not in the bill of quantities, specifications and drawings. o

The sanitary fixtures and fittings sh all be i nstalled at the correct assigned position as shown on t he drawings and as directed by the Client / Architect, and shall fully meet with the aesthetic and symmetrical requirements as demanded by the Architect. o

All f ixtures and acce ssories shall be f ixed i n ac cordance w ith a set pat tern m atching t he t iles or i nterior f inish as per C lient /

Architect requirements. Wherever necessary, the fittings shall be centred to dimensions and pattern as called for. o

Fixtures & fittings shall be installed by skilled w orkman w ith appropriate tools according to the best t rade p ractice.

Manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed for the installation of fixtures. Fixtures in all toilets shall be standard height mounting as specified/shown for on the drawings. Fixtures shall be mounted r igid, pl umb, and t rue t o al ignment. Mock up and Trial

Assembly. o

The installation of the sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be as per the shop drawings approved by the Client / Architect / Consultant. o

The Vendor shall have to assemble for Mock Up at least one set of each type of sanitary fixtures and fittings in order to determine pr ecisely the r equired su pply and di sposal connections. R elevant i nstructions from m anufacturers shall be followed as applicable. This trial assembly shall be developed to facilitate det ermining t he l ocation o f punc ture hol es, hol ding devices etc., which will be required for final installation in position of all sanitary fixtures and fittings. The above assembly shall be subject to final approval by the Client / Architect.

105

o

The fixtures in the trial assembly can be r e-used for final installation without any addi tional payments for fixing o r dismantling of the fixtures.

Supporting and Fixing Devices

The Vendor shall provide all supporting and fixing devices necessary to install the sanitary fixtures and fittings securely in posi tion. The fixing devices shall be r igidly anchored into the building structure. The devices shall be rust resistant and shall be so fixed that they do not present an unsightly look in the final assembly. Where the location demands, the Client/ Architect / Interior Designer may instruct the V endor to pr ovide ch romium pl ated o r ot her similarly finished fixing devices. I n su ch circumstances the Vendor shall arrange to supply the f ixing devices and sh all be installed complete with appropriate vibration isolating pads, washers and gaskets.

Supporting and Fixing Devices for Final Installation

The V endor sh all i nstall al l sa nitary f ixtures an d fittings in their final position i n accordance w ith appr oved t rial asse mblies and as shown on dr awings. The installation sh all be c omplete w ith al l su pply and waste co nnections. The connection between building and piping system and the sanitary fixtures shall be through proper unions and flanges to facilitate removal/replacement of sanitary fixtures without disturbing the built in piping system. A ll unions and flanges shall match in appearance with other exposed fittings.

Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and to alignment. The outlets of water closet pans and similar appliances shall be examined to ensure that outlet ends are butting on the receiving pipes before making the joints. It shall be ensured that the receiving pipes are clear of obstruction. When fixtures are being mounted, attention shall be paid to the possibility of movement and settlement by other causes.

Protection against Damage

The V endor sh all t ake ev ery pr ecaution t o p rotect al l sa nitary fixtures against damage, misuse, cracking, staining breakage and pilferage by providing proper wrapping and l ocking arrangement till the completion of the installation. At the time of handing over, the Vendor shall clean, disinfect and polish all fixtures and fittings.

Any fixtures and fittings found damaged, cracked chipped stained or scratched shall be removed and new fixtures and fittings free from defects shall be i nstalled at his own cost to complete the work.

Chromium Plated Fittings:

All Chromium plated fittings shall be of brass/copper, heavy chromium plated, of the make and design approved by the Architects/Consultants. The fittings shall be cast fittings of screw type, machined and threaded properly for fixing to the supply pipes.

The ch romium pl ating shall co nform to I ndian S tandard I S:482 ( Electroplated coating of nickel and chromium of copper and copper alloys).

The fittings shall be supplied complete with chromium plated matching flanges wall cover plates, nuts and extension pieces of required lengths. Metallic washers where required shall also be of chromium plated brass. All bib cocks and stop cocks shall conform to Indian Standard IS: 781. Brass screw down pillar taps to IS: 1701 and all other fittings shall match the supply fitting in construction and appearance. All fixing accessories and scr ews shall be si milar t o f ittings. A ll washers shall conform t o

Indian Standard IS: 4346.

106

All waste f ittings (Waste, C hain, O verflow, S preaders Caps etc.) s hall be of brass/copper heavy chromium plated of the make and design specified and match the supply fittings. They shall conform to Indian standard IS: 2963.

Bottle traps (for wash basins, sinks, urinals etc) shall be deep seal (Min. 6 cm seal) cast b rass bottle traps, heavy ch romium pl ated. A ll bot tle t raps shall b e pr ovided with suitable cleaning eye, extension piece, flare nuts, all chromium plated.

Chromium plated brass flanges of suitable size shall be provided to screw the holes made for installing the pipes through walls, floors & columns.

Details of specific items are as described below:

Shower Set

Shower se t sh all co mprise o f t wo C P br ass concealed st op co cks, four/five w ay auto-diverter, ad justable t ype ov er-head sh ower w ith C P sh ower ar m, a ll with C P wall flanges of approved quality all as specified in the Bill of Quantities.

Bath sp out, hand sh owers and pop up w astes sh all al so be pr ovided w herever, specified.

Wall flanges shall be kept clear off the finished wall. Wall flanges embedded in the finishing shall not be accepted.

Toilet Paper Holder

Toilet paper holder shall be vitreous china or chrome plated of size, shape and type specified in the Bill of Quantities.

Porcelain toilet paper holder shall be f ixed in walls and set in cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling work.

The latter (chrome) shall be f ixed by means of screws/capping having finish similar to the toilet paper holder in wall/temper partitions with raw l plugs or nylon sleeves.

Towel Rail &Towel Ring:

Towel r ail sh all be ch romium pl ated br ass or o f st ainless steel or pow der co ated brass of size, shape and type specified in the Bill of Quantities.

Towel rail shall be fixed with screws/capping having finish similar to the towel rail in wall with rawl plugs or nylon sleeves and shall include cutting and making good as required or directed by the Site Representative.

Liquid Soap Dispenser

Liquid Soap Dispenser shall be wall/counter mounted suitable for dispensing liquid soaps, l otions, de tergents. The co ver sh all l ock to body w ith co ncealed l ocking arrangement, opened only be key provided.

Liquid soap dispenser body and shank shall be of high impact resistance material.

The piston and spout shall be stainless steel with 1 litre capacity polyethylene container.

The valve shall operate with less than 2.27 Kg (5 lbs) of force.

CP Brass Abultion Health Faucet

C.P brass health faucet shall be of specified size and shall conform to IS . These shall be polished bright and fixed as per the direction of Engineer-In-charge

107

Rate :- This includes the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations described above, and is measured in no.

CP Brass Single lever wall mixer

C.P. brass wall mixture is a draw off tap with a hor izontal inlets and free outlet and stop valve is a valve with suitable means of connections for insertion in a pi pe line for controlling or stopping flow. They shall be of specified size and sh all conform to

IS.

The closing device shall work by means of disc carrying a renewable non-metallic washer which shuts against water pressure which operates it. Valve shall be of the loose leather seated pattern. The cocks (taps) shall open in anti-clock/clock wise direction. The wall mixture shall be po lished bright and f ixed as per the direction of

Engineer-

In-charge

Rate: - This includes the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations described above, and is measured in no.

CP Brass Single lever Wash Basin mixer

A basin mixture is a draw off tap with a Vertical inlet and free outlet and a stop valve is a v alve w ith su itable m eans of connections for i nsertion i n a pi pe l ine f or controlling or stopping flow. They shall be of specified size and shall conform to IS.

The closing device shall work by means of disc carrying a renewable non-metallic washer which shuts against water pressure which operates it. Valve shall be o f the loose l eather se ated pa ttern. The co cks (taps) shall open i n ant i-clock/clock w ise direction. The basin mixture shall be polished bright and fixed as per the direction of

Engineer-In-charge.

Rate: - This includes the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations described above, and is measured in no

CP Brass Single lever Kitchen Basin mixer

A C.P. brass sink mixture is a draw off tap with a horizontal inlets and free outlet and stop valve is a valve with suitable means of connections for insertion in a pi pe line for controlling or stopping flow. They shall be of specified size and sh all conform to

IS. The cl osing dev ice sh all w ork by m eans of di sc carrying a r enewable non metallic washer which shuts against water pressure which operates it. Valve shall be of the loose leather seated pattern. The cocks (taps) shall open in anti-clock/clock wise di rection. T he w all m ixture sh all be pol ished br ight and fixed as per t he direction of Engineer- In-charge.

Rate :- This includes the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations described above, and is measured in no.

CP Shower Rose

Stainless Steel grating

CP Glass shelves

108

2.2 Providing & Fixing Stainless steel (SS 304) Water Cooler of Cap 40 LPH

Providing & Fi xing with electrical & plumbing co nnections all co mplete t he Water

Cooler ( ISI Mark & Approved Make) of capacity as mentioned in BOQ including all fittings, Pipes, connecter etc complete.

2.3 Providing & Fixing in-built Water Purifier with pre-filter, ACF & Membrane of Cap

60 LPH

Providing & Fi xing with electrical & plumbing co nnections all co mplete t he Water

Purifier ( ISI Mark & Approved Make) of capacity as mentioned in BOQ including all fittings, Pipes, connecter etc complete.

2.4 Valves

Unless otherwise specified all Gunmetal fittings such as gate, globe, check & safety v alves shall be f itted i n pi pe l ine i n workman l ike m anner. Necessary unions shall be provided on both ends of the valves for easy replacement. The joints between f ittings and pi pes shall be l eak-proof w hen t ested to a pr essure of

7Kg/Sq.Cm.The defective fittings and joints shall be replaced or redone.

All valves (gate, globe, check, safety) shall be of gun metal suitable for the particular service as specified. All valves shall be of t he par ticular dut y and design as specified. Valves shall either be o f screwed type or flanged type, as specified, with suitable flanges and non-corrosive bolts and gaskets. Tail pieces as required shall be supplied along with valves. Gate, globe and check valves shall conform to Indian

Standard IS: 776 and non-return valves and swing check type reflux to IS: 5312.

2.5 Storage type Hot Water electrical horizontal heaters

Providing & Fi xing w ith el ectrical & pl umbing co nnections all co mplete t he H ot

Water G eyser ( I SI Mark & A pproved M ake) of ca pacity as mentioned i n B OQ including all fittings, Pipes, connecter etc complete.

2.6 Internal Drainage: (Soil, Waste & Vent Pipes):

Piping Distribution System:

Soil, Waste and vent pipes in shafts and used for toilet/ wet areas shall be of SWR

Type-A Upvc pipe and ceiling level of basement shall be of cast iron pipe.

Every waste pipe shall discharge above the grating of a properly trapped gully. The

Vendor sh all ensu re that t his requirement i s adequately m et w ith. Wherever floor traps are provided, it shall be ensu red that at least one w ash is connected to such floor t raps to av oid drying of w ater se al in the trap. Ventilating pipes shall be of uPVC pi pes, co nforming t o t he r equirements laid dow n ear lier. A nti s yphon v ent pipes/relief v ent pi pes where ca lled f or on t he dr awings shall be of c ast i ron or galvanized mild steel pipes as specified. The pipes shall be of the diameter shown on the drawings. All traps on branch soil and waste pipes shall also be ventilated at a point not less than 75mm or more than 200mm from their highest part and on t he side near est to t he so il pi pe or w aste pi pes. A ll t he fittings used for co nnections, between waste and ventilation pipes and branch pipes shall be made by using pipe fittings with i nspection d oors for cl eaning. The doors shall be pr ovided w ith 3m m

109

thick r ubber i nsertion packing and w hen cl osed and bol ted sh all be ai r and water tight.

Where waste and ventilating pipes are accommodated in shafts ducts, adequate access to cleaning eyes shall be provided.

Piping Material:

uPVC pipes for SWR system

All pi pes shall be st raight and sm ooth and i nside f ree from c racks and ot her manufacturing de fects. Pipes shall be co nforming to I S 13952 t ype B for so il & waste and of type A for rain water.Pipes shall be joined by approved type of socket and ‘O’ rubber ring (confirms to IS 5382)joints with rubber lubricant.

Fittings:

Fittings shall co nform to t he I ndian S tandard r ecommended for the pi pes. P ipes and fittings must be o f matching I.S. specification. Interchange of pipes of one standard with fittings on the other standard will not be permitted. Fittings shall be of the required degree of cu rvature w ith or w ithout acce ss door.Connection t o v ertical st ack or posi tion t o a horizontal line shall be made only a `Y’ junction.

Galvanized Iron Pipes:

Waste pipes below 50mm dia and where specified for shall be galvanized iron pipes screwed and rocketed conforming to the requirements of IS: 1239 of medium grade.

The pipes and sockets shall be cleanly finished, well galvanized in and out and free from cracks, surface flaws laminations and other defects. All screw threads shall be clean and well cut. All pipes and fittings shall bear manufacturer’s trade mark and conform to the IS as specified.

a) Floor Clean out Plugs

Clean out pl ug for S oil, W aste or R ainwater pi pes laid under f loors shall be provided near pipe junctions bends, tees, “Y” and on straight runs at such intervals as required as per site conditions. Cleanout plugs shall t erminate flush w ith t he f loor l evels. T hey sh all be threaded and provided with key holes for opening. Cleanout plugs shall be C ast B rass su itable for t he P ipe di a. With scr ewed t o a

G.I.socket. The socket shall be lead caulked to the drain pipes. b) Waste pipe from appliances

- Waste pipe from appliances e.g. washbasins, sinks and urinals shall be of galvanised steel in toilets, kitchens, pantries and service areas where so r equired, and as given in t he S chedule of Q uantities or shown on the drawings.

- All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the connection to stack or drains. P ipes inside al l t oilets shall be i n ch ase unl ess otherwise shown on dr awings. Where so r equired and sh own on dr awings or directed by the Project Manager/ Site In charge/ Site In charge.

110

- Galvanised pipes (Where specified or required at site for Waste only)

Pipes shall be galvanised steel tubes conforming to IS 1239 (medium class) and quality certificates shall be furnished. Pipes shall be provided with all required fittings e.g. tees, couplings, bends, elbows, unions, reducers, nipples, plugs. All G.I. waste pipes shall be terminated at the point of connection with the appliance with an outlet of suitable diameter. Pipes in chase shall be painted with two coats of black bitumen paint and exposed pipes with one coat of red oxide primer and two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint or as given in the Schedule of Quantities.

Cleanout on Drainage Pipes (CO Plugs)

Cleanout pl ugs shall b e pr ovided on head of each dr ain and in between at l ocations indicated on pl ans or di rected by Cleanout plugs shall be of size matching the full bore of the pipe but not exceeding 150 mm dia. CO Plugs on drains of greater diameters shall be 150 m m di a. Fi xed w ith a su itable r educing adapt er. Fl oor cleanout plugs shall be cast brass.

- Cleanouts provided at ceiling level pipe shall be fixed to a CI flanged tail piece. The cleanout doors shall be sp ecially fabricated from light weight galvanised sheets and angles with hinged type doors with fly nuts, gasket etc. As per drawing.

2.7 Installation of Pumps & Water Treatment Equipments:

General:

Pump suction and delivery headers shall be Galvanized iron pipes/M.S. heavy class with m atching fittings. The pi pe joints shall b e t hreaded a s per manufacturer’s instructions.

Level controllers shall be electronic low voltage type using required number of stainless steel type probes, shrouded in PVC sheath or encapsulated in a stainless steel pi pe. T he l evel co ntroller w ill be use d f or filter feed pum ps, softener feed pumps, domestic water and soft water lifting pumps and sump pumps.

Vibration E liminators: P rovide on al l su ction an d del ivery lines as shown on t he drawings double flanged reinforced neoprene flexible pipe connectors. C onnectors should be suitable f or a working pressure of each pump and t ested t o t he t est pressure given in the relevant head. Length of the connectors shall be as per site requirements in accordance with manufacturer details.

Water Treatment Equipment (Wherever Applicable:

Work unde r t his section sh all co nsists of furnishing al l l abour, m aterials, equipment and appliances necessary and required to supply install and commission the water filtration & softening equipments as described hereinafter and given in the schedule of quantities and/or shown on the drawings.

111

Water Filters:

Filter sh all be desi gned i n acco rdance w ith t he co de o f un fired p ressure vessel conforming to IS 2825.

Water filter sh all be pr essure dual media filter may be al tered t o s uite

Vendor’s own design of the most efficient performance.

Filters shall be vertical type of required diameter. The shell and dished ends shall be fabricated from M.S. sh eet. Tank su itable t o with st and a w orking pressure given in Bill of quantities. The shell shall have a minimum thickness of 6 mm and dished ends 8 mm or as per manufactures recommendations.

Each filter shall have at least one pressure tight manhole cover for inspection and repairs.

Each filter sh all be p rovided with scr ewed or flanged connections for inlet,outlet i ndividual dr ain co nnections and all f ace pi ping, di aphragm valves and all other connections necessary and required.

Face piping shall be G.I. class ‘C’ as per IS: 1239.

Chemical Dosing Pump:

Chemical dosi ng system co mprising o f metering pu mp, 100 l ts. C apacity

HDPE solution tank with level gauge and lid on top.

Motor driven metering pump with mechanically activated diaphragm with oil lubricated gear mechanism. The output of the plug should be adjustable operation f rom 10-100%. P ump co nstruction sh all be co rrosion r esistant polypropylene or similar material dosing pump shall be used.

Each pum p sh all be pr ovided with an i njector assembly w ith su ction and delivery piping complete in all respects.

Water Softener:

Softeners shall be designed in accordance with the code of unfired pressure vessel conforming to IS 2825.

Softeners shall be desi gned t o give r equired h ardness. S oftener sh all be provided with su itable g rade o f C ation ex change r esins in quantity t o be indicated by the Vendor at the time of tendering.

Softener vessel shall be fabricated from MS sheet with dished ends and self supporting ar rangement. V essel sh all be su itable f or a w orking pr essure given in bill of quantities. The shell shall have a minimum thickness of 6 mm and dished ends 8 mm.

The vessel shall have an internal collecting and distribution system of manufacturer's design.

112

Softener shall have a set of face piping for inlet, outlet brine injection with all valves. Suitable drain shall be provided. Pipes shall be GI class ‘C’.

One se t o f hy draulic injector w ith co ntrol v alve, br ine del ivery p ipes with adjustable indicating lamps.

One cylindrical FRP saturator and mixing tank, provided with brine delivery piping w ith adj ustable l evel indicating cl amp and co ntrol v alves complete.

The tank shall be of capacity as given in the schedule of quantities.

One or ifice boar d for i ndicating w ash and r inse r ate to be filtered i n d rain sump.

One ch arge o f su pporting gravel, sa nd and “ Cation" r esin i n r equisite quantity.

One water testing kit with instructions for testing water samples.

Air Blower:

Air blower shall be r otary type for scouring filter and assi sting in back wash operation.

Air blower shall be driven by a totally enclosed fan cooled induction motor of r equired H .P. B lower sh all be o f ca pacity r ecommended by filter manufacturer and shall be of reputed make as approved by architects.

Measurement:

General:

Unit rate for individual items, e.g., Pumps, MCC and level controller are for purposes of pay ments only. P iping, header s, v alves, acce ssories, ca bling and MCC to measured separately in this contract only.

All i tems must i nclude al l acce ssories fittings as described i n t he specifications, BOQ and shown on the drawings.

Level controllers & Alarms

Level co ntrollers for e ach se t o f pu mps shall be m easured by number and inclusive of pr obes, cabling unto surface box near the pump and sh all i nclude al l i tems as given i n t he sp ecifications and schedule of quantities to provide a complete working system.

Piping Work:

Suction and del ivery h eaders for each pu mping sy stem sh all be measured per l inear m eter o f finished l ength and sh all include a ll items as given i n t he schedule o f quantities. P ainting sh all be included in rate of headers.

G.I. pipes between various equipment’s shall be measured per linear meter o f the finished l ength and shall i nclude al l f ittings, flanges, jointing, cl amps for fixing t o walls or hang ers and t esting. Fl anges shall include 3 mm thick insertion rubber gasket, nuts, bolts and testing.

Water T ank, V ibration el iminators, “ Y ” st rainers, but terfly valves, slim non r eturn v alves sh all be m easured by num bers and sh all

113

include al l items as given i n t he sch edule of quantities and specifications.

Painting & Cleanup:

On completion of the installation Vendor shall scrub clean all pumps, piping, filters and equipment and apply one coat of primer.

Apply two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved make and shade on steel pipes.

Provide painted identification legend and direction arrows on all equipment and piping as directed by engineer-in-charge.

On final completion of the work, Vendor shall cleanup the site and filter room of all surplus materials rubbish and leave the place in a broom-clean condition

114

LIST OF APPROVED MAKE

OF

PLUMBING ITEMS

115

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES

Sl.No. Material Description

1

2

3

4

5

6

VITREOUS CHINA

SANITARYWARE

Name of Manufacturer

PLASTIC W.C.SEATS & COVERS PARRYWARE / HINDWARE / CERA.

C.P. FITTINGS: BIB COCK

(LONG BODY/SHORT BODY),

PILLAR COCK,

SINGLE HOLE

BASIN MIXTURE, WALL MIXER,

SHOWER MIXER, ANGLE VALVE,

CONCEALED STOP COCK,

SHOWER WITH WALL FLANGE,

C.P. WASTE 32-40 mm DIA,BOTTLE

TRAP, HEALTH FAUCET, BRAIDED

CONNECTION PIPE.

AUTOMATIC WATER TAPS,

AUTOMATIC URINAL FLUSHING

SYSTEM

TOWEL RING, TOWEL ROD,

TOWEL RACK, COAT HOOK etc.

(304 Grade S.S.)

STAINLESS STEEL SINK

PARRYWARE / HINDWARE / CERA.

PARRYWARE / CERA

/KINGSTON/ VIJAY METAL

INDUSTRIES / JAQUAR AND

COMPANY LIMITED

PARRYWARE /CERA / VIJAY METAL

INDUSTRIES/ GEM/ PARKO

JAQUAR/VIJAY METAL INDUSTRIES/

PARRYWARE/ GEM

JAYNA /NEEL KANT/NIRALI

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

SAND CAST IRON SPUN

PIPE,CENTIFUGALLY CASTED S

& S AS PER IS: 3989

CAST IRON PIPE,

HORIZONTALLY / VERTICALLY

CASTED S & S AS PER IS:1729

G.I. & M.S. PIPES PART-I IS:

1239 UPTO 150 mm AND M.S.

PIPES PART-II IS: 3589 ABOVE

150 mm

G.I. AND M.S. FITTINGS uPVC PIPES & FITTINGS 4 kg./sqm, 6 kg./sqm, 10 kg./sqm

PRESSURE.

NECO LIMITED/ HEPCO/BP

HEPCO/BP/ RIF/ SKIF

TATA STEEL (TUBE DIVISION)/ JINDAL

PIPES LIMITED

UNIK/ZOLOTO/KS/KENT. cPVC PIPES SDR12.5

SCHEDULE-40

HDPE PIPE

SUPREME INDUSTRIES LIMITED/

FINOLEX INDUSTRIES/ PRINCE PIPES

& FITTINGS PRIVATE LIMITED/JAIN

IRRIGATION.

ASTRAL POLYTECHNIC PRIVATE

LIMITED/ ASHIRVAD ENTERPRISES

PRIVATE LIMITED/ JAIN PLASTICS &

CHEMICALS LIMITED

JAIN PLASTICS & CHEMICALS

LIMITED/ CHEMI PLAST INDUSTRIES

STUROY POLYMERS LIMITED/ KISAN

GROUP OF COMPANIES

116

14

15

16

17

18

19

22

23

20

21

24

25

26

27

C.I.CLASS LA PIPES

R.C.C. PIPES

STONEWARE PIPES & GULLY

TRAP

KESORMA SPUN PIPE & FOUNDRIES,

CALCUTTA/ SUPER ENTERPRISES/

INDIAN IRON & CO. LTD. CALCUTTA.

PRAGATI CONCRETE UDYOG/ K.K.

SPUN PIPES/ J. K. SPUN PIPES

DEVRAJ ANAND CERAMIC (P)

LIMITED./ PERFECT POTTERI JABAL

PUR (MP)/ BURN POTTERIES,

JABALPUR

LEADER VALVES LIMITED/ AIP

/ARKAY SALSE CARPORATION DELHI

GUNMETAL VALVES(FULLWAY,

CHECK, GLOBE AND NON

RETURN VALVES)

BALL VALVE

BUTTERFLY VALVE (LEVER

TYPE)

BUTTERFLY VALVE (GEAR

TYPE)

C.I.DOUBLE FLANGED SLUICE

VALVE & GATE VALVES

FLOAT VALVE (GUNMETAL)

UPTO 40M

FLOAT VALVE (CI) 50M AND

ABOVE

FOOT VALVE / CHECK VALVES

(BRASS)

AIR RELEASE VALVES (BRASS /

CAST IRON)

C.I. MANHOLES COVER & G.I.

GRATING

HAND DRIER (304 Grade S.S.)

TBS ENGINEERS PVT. LTD./

KIRLOSKAR / AIP/ AUDCO INDIA

LIMITED

LEADER VALVES LIMITED/ AIP /

AUDCO INDIA

LIMITED/KIRLOSKAR/LEADER/SANT/Z

OLOTO

LEADER VALVES LIMITED/ AIP

VALVES/ AUDCO INDIA LIMITED/

KSB/KIRLOSKAR/ZOLOTO

KIRLOSKAR BROTHERS LIMITED/

AARKO MANUFACTURING COMPANY/

AIP

SANT INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS (P)

LIMITED/ BOMBAY METAL & ALLOYS/

LEADER VALVES LIMITED/AIP

LEADER VALVES LIMITED/ INDIAN

VALVE CO. LTD.

SANT / LEADER /AIP

LEADER VALVES LIMITED/ INDIAN

VALVE CO. LTD. CALCUTTA/

ADVANCE VALVES (P) LIMITED/

SANT/AIP

LEADER VALVES LIMITED/ ADVANCE

VALVES (P) LIMITED/ AARKO

MANUFACTURING COMPANY/

KARTAR

K. K. MANHOLE & GRATING CO.

PRIVATE LIMITED/ BANGAL IRON

COMPANY WEST BANGAL/ SHINING

ENGINEERING WORKS (FOUNDRY)

AGRA.

EURONICS/ TOSHI /KOPAL/

KIMBERLEY CLARK

117

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

33

1

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

28

29

30

31

32

LIQUID SOAP DISPENSER (304

Grade S.S.)

STORAGE TYPE WATER

HEATER

WATERPROOFING

INSULATION

ELECTRICAL HOT WATER

HEATER

EURONICS/ TOSHI /KOPAL/

KIMBERLEY CLARK

VENUS HOME APPLIANCES (P) LTD./

RACOLD APPLIANCES LTD. NEW

DELHI/ BAJAJ/ VSTA

EMCO GENERAL PLASTIC

INDUSTRIES (P) LTD./ Acrylic

THERMAFLEX/KAIFLEX/ ITW Insulation

Systems

VENUS/ KINGSTON/ Rinnai/ Navien/

Bosch/ Richmond

PENTAIR/KENT/FONTUS/USHA R.O. UNIT.

PUMPS AND EQUIPMENTS

WATER TRANSFER PUMPS

IRRIGATION PUMP

NON RETURN VALVE (65mm DIA

& ABOVE)

BUTTERFLY VALVE (LEVER

TYPE)

BUTTERFLY VALVE (GEAR

TYPE)

FILTER AND SOFTENER

MOTORIZED VALVE

VIBRATION PAD

VIBRATION ELIMINATOR

Water purifier

Water Cooler

Hot Water Electric Geyser

ABB/ GRUNDFOS/ KIRLOSKAR/

SIEMENS/ CROMPTON/ITT/KSB

GROUNDFOS/ KIRLOSKAR/ITT

SUMP PUMP

WATER LEVEL INDICATOR

SALMSON/ ZENIT/ KSB/

GRUNDFOS/ITT

TECHNICA/ MINILEC/ ELEGENT

WATER LEVEL CONTROLLER TECHNICA/ MINILEC/ ELEGENT

ELECTRONIC SENSING PROBE TECHNICA/ MINILEC/ ELEGENT

WATER METER CRESENT/ KAYEE/ KAPSTAN/ SANT

KIRLOSKAR/ LEADER/AIP

LEADER VALVE LIMITED/ AIP VALVE

LIMITED/ AUDCO INDIA LIMITED

LEADER VALVE LIMITED/ AIP VALVE

LIMITED/ AUDCO INDIA LIMITED

ION EXCHANGE/THERMAX/ WATCON/

BHARTIYA TECHNO CRAFT/

MIGRANI/PENTAIR

DANFOSS/ HONEYWELL/ Elex

RESISTOFLEX/ KANWAL INDUSTRIES/

SANHENG

RESISTOFLEX/ KANWAL INDUSTRIES/

SANHENG

Aqua Guard, Kent, Philips

Voltas, Blue Star, clover

Bajaj, Havells, K power

118

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR

FIRE FIGHTING WORKS

119

1. SCOPE OF WORK

Following is the scope of work included in this Tender:

Installation o f P umps in pum p house co mplete as required st arting from su ction line f rom U G t ank. The di stribution M ain, but terfly V alves, N .R.V, A ir V essels,

Pressures G auges, P ressure S witches, E lect-Panel & Wiring for M otor P ressure

Switches, Flow switch, level indicators with Panel & interlocking of fire Panel with drinking water pump’s panel f or starting the bore well pump f or replenishment of water in u/g sump, painting of all pipes & installation as directed.

Necessary Foundation work for Pumps, Supports for Piping Bends, Tee’s, Dead ends, Tailpieces, Valves, and Vessel etc. as required. a) Laying of Main of MS pipe for the yard Hydrant in loose soil and down comer inside the building. b) Supports for vertical risers/ vertical pipes. Painting etc. as required. c) Fire fighting equipments, accessories and fitting as required. d) Installation of sprinklers, installation control valve, flow switch etc in basement. e) Installation, testing and commissioning of the entire installations to the satisfaction of Consultant and Local Fire Authorities. f) Obtaining NOC for the installations from Local fire Authorities. g) Maintaining t he i nstallation m inimum for a pe riod o f 1 y ear from the dat e of commissioning/ virtual completion, whichever is later, and imparting training to the workers/staff of the complex as asked for, Maintaining the installations as per IS requirement and ex ercising Fire drills as asked for by the client/Local fire

Authorities. h) Earth pits & earth strip for earthing the body of the motors is being provided by the

Electrical Contractor.

2. SCHEME:

The Complete Building is being provided with following Fire Fighting arrangements. a) Over Head/UG tank of adequate capacity. b) Automatic sprinklers system for basement. c) Yard Hydrants all around the building. d) Wet riser cum down comer with First Aid Reel inside the Building throughout and on different floors.

120

e) Portable fire extinguishers in the complete building. f)

Manual operated electrical fire alarm system

.

3. INSTALLATION SCHEMATIC

The i nstallation sh all co nfirm to t he sch ematic line di agram at tached i n t he sh ape of drawings for pu mp hou se. Wet r iser cu m D own C omer and P ipe l ayout dr awing for building attached along with Tender Papers.

Since the Agency executing the job is responsible for obtaining the NOC from the Local Fire

Service Authorities, deviation, if any, with respect to the scheme and drawing attached may be brought out clearly in the Tender Paper while quoting for the job.

4. SPECIFICATIONS

4.1 Work under Fire suppression system installation shall be carried out strictly in accordance with specifications attached with the tender.

4.2 Items not covered under these specifications due to any ambiguity or misprints, or additional works, the work shall be carried out as per specifications or the latest TAC manual up to date amendments as applicable in the work.

4.3 Works not co vered under par a 4. 1 and 4. 2 s hall be ca rried out as per r elevant I ndian

Standards and in case or its absence as per British Standard code of practice.

5.

EXECUTION OF WORK

The Contractor should visit and examine the site of work and satisfy himself as to the nature of the existing r oads and other m eans of co mmunication and ot her details pertaining to t he work and local conditions and facilities for obtaining his own information on all matters affecting the execution of work. No extra charge made in consequence of any misunderstanding, incorrect information on any of these points or on ground of insufficient description will be allowed.

The work shall be carried out in conformity with the fire drawings and within the requirements of

Architectural, HVAC, Electrical, and Structural and other specialized services drawings.

The Contractor shall cooperate with all trades and agencies working on the site. He shall make provision f or han ger, sl eeves, st ructural openi ngs and o ther requirements well in ad vance t o prevent hold up of progress of the construction schedule.

On award of the work, Contractor shall submit a schedule of construction in the form of a PERT chart or BAR chart for approval of the Project Manager/ Architect/ Consultant. All dates and time schedule agreed upon should be strictly adhered to, within the stipulated time of completion/commissioning along with the specified phasing, if any.

6. Drawings

6.1

Fire drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction permits.

Any deviations made shall be in conformity with the Architectural and other services drawings.

121

6.2 Architectural drawings shall take precedence over Fire drawing or other services drawings as to all dimensions.

6.3 C ontractor shall verify all dimensions at site and bring to the notice of the Project Manager all discrepancies or deviations noticed. Decision of the Project Manager shall be final.

6.4 Large size details and manufacturers dimensions for materials to be incorporated shall take precedence over small-scale drawings.

6.5 Any dr awings issued b y t he A rchitects/ C onsultant for the w ork ar e t he p roperty o f the

Architects/ Consultant and shall not be lent, reproduced or used on any works other intended without the written permission of the Architects/ Consultant.

7. Inspection and testing of materials

7.1

Contractor shall be required to produce original manufacturers test certificate for the particular batch of materials supplied to him. The tests carried out shall be as per the relevant Indian

Standards.

NO PAYMENT SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT TEST CERTIFICATE OF THE ITEM.

7.2 For examination and t esting of m aterials and works at t he site Contractor sh all pr ovide all testing and gauging equipment necessary but not limited to the following: -

a) Theodolite. b) Dumpy level. c) Steel tapes. d) Weighing machine. e) Plumb bobs, Spirit levels, Hammers. f) Micrometers, Tachometers. g) Thermometers, Stoves. h) Hydraulic test machine. i) Smoke test machine.

7.3 All such equipment shall be tested for calibration at any approved laboratory, if required by the Project Manager.

7.4 All testing equipment shall be preferably located in special room meant for the purpose.

8. Metric conversion

8.1

All di mensions and si zes of m aterials and eq uipment g iver i n t he t ender docu ment are commercial metric sizes.

8.2 Any weights, or sizes given in the tender having changed due to metric conversion, the nearest equivalent sizes accepted by Indian Standards shall be acceptable without any additional cost.

9.

Reference drawing

9.1

Contractor shall maintain one se t of all drawings issued to him as reference drawings. These shall not be use d on si te. A ll-important dr awings shall be m ounted on boar ds and pl aced i n racks indexed. No drawings shall be rolled.

9.2

All co rrections, deviations and ch ange m ade on t he site sh all be shown on t hese r eference drawings for final incorporation in t he completion dr awings. All ch anges t o be made sh all be initialed by the Project Manager or Architects

.

122

10.

Shop drawings

Shop drawings shall be submitted under following conditions: - a) Showing any changes in layout in the Fire drawings. b) Equipment layout, piping and wiring diagram. c) Manufacturer or Contractor’s fabrication drawings for any materials or equipment supplied by him.

11.

Completion drawings

11.1

On completion of work, contractor shall submit one complete set of original tracings and two prints of “as built” drawings to the Project Manager. These drawings shall have the f ollowing information. a) Run of all piping, diameters on all floors, vertical stacks and location of external services. b) Run of all fire lines with diameters, locations of control valves, access panels. c) Locations of all mechanical equipment with layout and piping connections.

The certificate of virtual completion shall not be issued unless the above drawings are submitted.

11.2 C ontractor sh all pr ovide f ive se ts of ca talogues, se rvice m anuals manufacturer’s drawings, performance dat a and l ist o f sp are par ts together w ith t he nam e and addr ess of t he manufacturer for all electrical and mechanical equipment provided by him.

11.3 All “warranty cards” given by the manufacturers shall be handed over to the Project Manager/

Consultants

12. Contractor‘s rates

12.1 Rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of cost of materials, labour, supervision, erection, tools, pl ant, scaffolding, se rvice co nnections, transport to si te, taxes, oct roi and l evies, breakage, wastage and all such expenses as may be necessary and required to completely do all the items of work and put them in a working condition.

12.2 Rates quoted ar e for all heights and dept hs and in all positions, leads & lifts et c. as may be required for this work.

12.1 All rates quoted are inclusive or cutting holes and chases in walls and floors and making good the sa me w ith ce ment m ortar/concrete/ w ater proofing o f appr opriate m ix and st rength a s directed by Project Manager. Contractor shall provide holes, sleeves, recesses in the concrete and masonry work as the work proceeds.

12.2 The Contractor sh all f urnish t he Architects with vouchers & t est ce rtificates to pr ove t hat t he materials are as specified and to indicate that the rates at which the materials are purchased in order to w orkout t he r ate anal ysis of non tendered i tems which he m ay be ca lled upon t o carryout.

13. Testing

123

13.1

Piping and d rainage w orks shall be t ested as specified under t he r elevant cl auses of the specifications.

13.2

Tests shall be performed in presence of the Project Manager/ Consultant.

13.3 All materials and equipment found defective shall be replaced and whole work tested to meet the requirements of the specifications.

13.4 C ontractor s hall per form al l su ch t ests as may be nece ssary and r equired by t he l ocal authorities to meet municipal or other bye-laws in force.

13.5 Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment and materials for the performance of the tests.

14.

Site clearance and cleanup

14.1

The contractor shall, from time to time, clear away all debris and excess materials accumulated at the site.

14.2 After the fixtures, equipment and appliances have been installed and commissioned, contractor shall clean-up the same and remove all plaster, paints, stains, stickers and other foreign matter or discoloration leaving the same in a ready to use condition.

14.3 On completion of all works, contractor shall demolish all stores, remove all surplus materials and leave the site in a br oom clean condition, failing which the same shall be done at Contractor’s risk and cost.

2.8 Recovery of cost for materials issued to Contractors free of cost.

2.9 If any materials issued free of cost to the Contractor, are damaged or pilfered, the cost of the same shall be r ecovered from the contractor on t he basis or actual cost to owner which shall include all freight and t ransportation, excise duty, sales tax, Octroi, import duty etc, plus 50% on the total. The decision on t he actual cost given by the Employer shall be final and bi nding on the Contractor.

3 Cutting of water proofing membrane.

No w alls terraces shall be cut for making and opening after waterproofing has been done without written approval of Project Manager/ Architects. Cutting of water proofing membrane shall be done very carefully so as other por tion of w ater pr oofing i s not dam aged. On completion o f w ork a t s uch pl ace t he w ater pr oofing membrane sh all be m ade g ood an d ensured that the opening/ cutting is made fully waterproof as per specifications and details of waterproofing approved by Architects

.

17. Cutting of structural members

No structural member shall be chased or cut without the written permission of the Project

Manager.

18. Materials supplied by employer

The Contractor shall verify that all materials supplied by the Employer conform to the specifications of the relevant item in the tender. Any discrepancy found shall be brought to the notice of the Project Manager.

19. Materials

124

Unless otherwise sp ecified and ex pressly appr oved i n writing by t he P roject M anager, onl y materials of makes and specification as mentioned in the list of approved makes attached herewith, shall be used

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

1. Pipes

a)

All pipes within and outside the building in exposed location and shafts including co nnections buried under floor shall be MS/GI pipes as follows” i) Pipes upto 150 mm dia - IS1239, Medium/Heavy class

ii) Pipes 200mm dia and above - IS3589 of thickness as specified.

1. Pipe Fittings

a)

Pipe fittings means tees, el bows, co uplings, flanges, r educers etc. and al l su ch co nnecting devices that are need to complete the piping work in its totality. b) Screwed fittings shall be approved type malleable with reinforced ring on all edges of the fitting suitable for screwed joints. c) Forged steel fittings of approved type with “V" groove for welded joints.

a) Fabricated fittings shall not be permitted.

e)

However if use of any fabricated fitting is found necessary by the Project Manager, fabrication of such fittings shall be taken up by the contractor on the written directives of the Project

Manager in a w orkshop whose welding procedures have been appr oved by the TAC as per

TAC rule 4102 applicable to hydrant and sprinkler system. For fabricating a Tee connection pipes shall be drilled a nd reamed and joint only welded. Gas cutting of pipes shall not b e permitted. Fabricated tee out of M.S. plates ‘Tee’ will not be acceptable.

2. Pipe Jointing:

3.1

Screwed jointing

Joints between black steel pipes and fittings upto 50 mm dia shall be metal to metal thread joints with Teflon tape suitable for pipe joints. Joints shall not be welded. All joints between GI

& MS pipes shall be made through MS forged fittings (screwed type),

3.

2 Welded

Joints between MS pipes (above 50 mm dia) and fittings shall be made with pipes and fittings having V groove and welded with electrical resistance welding in an approved manner.

3.3 Flanged

Flanged joints shall be provided on:

a) S traight r uns not ex ceeding 25 m on pipe lines of 65 mm dia and abov e an d as directed by Project Manager. b) For jointing all types of valves, appurtenances, pump connections with other types of pipes, to water tanks and other places necessary and required as good for engineering practice. c) Flanged shall be as per Table E of IS specification with appropriate number of GI nuts and bolts, 3mm neoprene gasket complete as per relevant specifications

3.4

Unions

125

Provide appr oved t ype of uni ons on pi pelines 50 m m di a and bel ow i n si milar pl aces as specified for flanges.

4.

Excavation

4.1 E xcavation for pipelines shall be in open trenches to levels and grades shown on the drawings or as required at site. Pipelines shall be buried with a minimum cover of 1.0 meter or as shown on drawings.

4.2 Wherever required contractor shall support all trenches or adjoining structures with adequate timber supports.

4.3 On completion of testing in the presence of the Project Manager and pipe protection, trenches shall be refilled with excavated earth in 15 cms layers and consolidated.

4.4 Contractor shall dispose off all surplus earth within a lead of 50 m or as directed by the Project

Manager.

5. Anchor Thrust blocks a) Contractor shall provide suitably designed anchor blocks in cement concrete to encounter excess thrust due to water hammer & high pressure. b) Thrust blocks shall be provided at all bends, tees and such other location as determined by the Project Manager. c) E xact l ocation, desi gn, si ze and m ix o f t he concrete bl ocks shall b e as shown on t he drawings or as directed by the Project Manager prior to execution of work.

6. Gun Metal valves

Valves of 50 mm dia and below shall be heavy-duty gunmetal full way valves or globe valves of approved make.

7.

Cast Iron Sluice Valves/Butterfly valve.

All valves 65 mm dia and above shall be a Sluice/butterfly valve of class PN 1.6 conforming to relevant IS codes.

8.

Non-return Valve

Non-return valves shall be as specified in schedule of quantities.

9.

Fire hydrants

9.1 Fire Hydrant (landing valve) shall be of Gun metal with 80 mm inlet and 63mm outlet, CI wheel conforming to IS 5290. Each valve shall have flanged inlet and i nstantaneous type outlets as shown on the drawings.

9.2 Instantaneous outlet for fire hydrant shall be of standard pattern approved and suitable for fire brigade hoses.

10.

RRL hoses

Each i nternal/external h ydrants shall be pr ovided w ith t wo nos. o f 63 m m di a. 15 m l ong rubberized fabric linen hose pipe with gunmetal male and female instantaneous type coupling machine wound with copper wire (Hose to IS 636 type II and couplings to IS 903 with IS certification)

126

11.

Hose reel

Hose reel drum shall be f abricated from 14SWG CRCA sheets powder coated red. Hose reel drum shall be pr ovided with 36 kg /sqcm bursting pressure 20 mm dia nominal bore high pressure 30 m long rubber tube, shut-off nozzle. Hose reel shall be connected directly to the wet riser. Hose reel shall conform to IS 884

.

12.

Fire Hose cabinet

Hose cabinet shall be fabricated from 14 SWG MS powder coated sheet of fully welded construction with hinged double door partially glazed with locking arrangement, stove enameled fire red paint with

FIRE HOSE ” written on it prominently.

13.

Pipe protection

All pipes above ground and in exposed location shall be painted with one coat of red oxide primer and two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint of red colour. a) Where specified, pipes buried in floors or below ground shall be protected against corrosion by the application of two coats of 4mm thick PYPKOTE membrane as specified in schedule of quantities

.

14.

Pipe support

14.

1 Pipe supports shall be as per NFPA13 code

14.2 All pipe clamps and supports shall be galvanized steel as per standard drawing. All the support shall be factory galvanized before use at site.

14.3 Pipes shall be hung by means of expandable anchor fasteners of approved make and des ign.

The hangers and clamps shall be fastened by means of galvanized nuts and bolts.

The size/diameter of the anchor fasteners and the clamp shall be suitable to carry the 3 times weight of water filled pipe and dead weight normally encountered.

14.4 Spacing

Pipe Diameter Spacing

Upto 65 mm diameter 2.5m

65mm to 100mm 3.0m

100-250mm 4.0m

14.5 At least one support shall be provided for a) Each pipe run connecting adjacent sprinkler b) The pipe runs connecting the distribution pipe and the first sprinkler on the range pipe.

14.6 Pipe support shall not be closer than 150 mm to any sprinkler axial central line.

14.7 The first support on a range pipe shall not be more than 2 m from the distribution pipe.

14.8

The last support on a range pipe shall not be at more than 1.5m from a) The range pipe end b) Where there is a horizontal arm pipe of 450 mm or longer, the arm pipe end. c) Where there is a drop or rise exceeding 600mm, the drop or rise pipe end.

15.

Installation Valve

127

15.1

Installation valves shall be installed in the pump room.

15.2 C ontractor sh all s ubmit hi s detailed sh op dr awings showing t he ex act l ocation, det ails o f installation of the valves and alarms.

15.3 Installation valve shall comprise of a cast iron sluice valve or butterfly valve with gunmetal trim, pressure gauge, double seated clapper check valves as alarm valve with pressure gauge, test valve and or ifice asse mbly and dr ain pi pe w ith pr essure gauge, by e pass on ch eck v alve t o r egulate differential pressure and false alarm, turbine water gong including all accessories necessary and required and as su pplied by or iginal equipment manufacturer and required f or f ull and satisfactory performance of the system.

16.

Sprinkler Heads/Quartzoid Bulb

16.1

Sprinkler heads shall be q uartzoid bul b t ype with g unmetal body fully appr oved and havi ng current certification of the fire laboratory of the C.B.R.I. Roorkee, Underwriter’s laboratory (UL) and under t he appr oved ce rtified l ist o f the Fi re O ffice C ommittee ( FOC) of U .K. o r N FPA o f U SA.

Acceptance of local authority of any of these certification as well as approval of the Site-in-charge shall be obtained by the Contractor prior to procurement of items.

16.2

Sprinkler heads shall be installed in conformity with approved shop drawings and in coordination w ith el ectrical f ixtures, v entilation duct s, ca ble gal leries and ot her se rvices along t he ceiling.

16.3 Following type of sprinklers shall be used:

S.No. Type of Sprinkler Temp rating deg.C.

1. Pendant or upright type 68

2. Special application side wall 68 Type

3. Pendent type 68 (Recessed in rosette)

16.4 Spacing and coverage of sprinkler shall be in accordance with risk classification of area in which they are installed, design density and TAC regulation.

16.5

Spare Sprinklers

a) Provide lockable enamel painted steel cabinet with hanging arrangement including following type of spare sprinklers i) Pendent type 28 ii) Upright 20 iii) Sidewall 2 b) The cabinet should also contain one pair wrenches (of each size) for the sprinklers. c) Spare sprinklers shall be of the same specifications as that of the original sprinklers specified.

17.

Fire, Sprinkler & Jockey Pumps

17.1

Pumping sets shall be si ngle/multi stage horizontal centrifugal single outlet with cast iron body and br onze d ynamically balanced i mpellers connecting sh aft sh all be st ainless steel w ith br onze sleeve and grease lubricated bearings.

17.2

Pumps shall be connected to the drive by means of spacer type love joy couplings, which shall be individually balanced dynamically and statically.

17.3

The coupling j oining the p rime movers with the pump shall be provided with a sheet metal guard.

128

17.4

Pumps shall be provided with approved type of mechanical seals.

17.5 Pumps shall be ca pable of delivering not less than 150% of the rated ca pacity of water at a head of not less than 65% of the rated head. The shut off head shall not exceed 120% of the rated head.

17.6 The pump shall meet the requirements of the Tariff Advisory Committee and the unit shall be design proven in fire protection services.

18. Electric drive

18.1

Electrically driven pumps shall be provided with totally enclosed fan cooled induction motors.

For fire pum ps the m otors should be r ated not t o dr aw st arting cu rrent m ore t han 3 t imes normal running current.

18.2 Motors for fire protection pumps shall be at least equivalent to the horse power required to drive the pump at 150% of its rated discharge and shall be designed for continuous full load duty and shall be design proven in similar service.

18.3 Motors shall be wound f or class B insulation and winding sh all be vacuum impregnated with heat and moisture resistant varnish glass fibre insulated.

18.4 M otors for fire pu mps shall m eet al l r equirements and sp ecifications of the Tariff A dvisory

Committee.

18.5 Motors shall be suitable for 415 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles a/c supply and shall be designed for 38 deg C ambient temperature. Motors shall conform to I.S. 325.

18.6 Motors shall be designed for two-start system.

18.7 Motors shall be capable of handling the required starting torque of the pumps.

18.8 Contractor shall provide inbuilt heating arrangements for the motors for main pumps to ensure that motor windings shall remain dry.

18.9 Speed of the motor shall be compatible with the speed of the pump.

19. Diesel Engine

19.1

Diesel engine shall be of multi cylinders with individual head assemblies. The engine shall be water-cooled/air-cooled and shall include heat exchanger/radiator and connecting piping, strainer, isolating & pressure reducing valves, bye-pass line complete in all respects.

19.2 Engine shall be direct injection type with low noise and exhaust emission levels.

19.3 The speed of the engine shall match the pump speed for direct drive.

19.4 The engine shall be capable of being started without the use of wicks, cartridge heater, plugs or either at engine room temperature of 7 de g.C. and shall take full load within 15 se conds from the receipt of the signal to start.

19.5 The engine shall efficiently operate at 38 deg.C ambient temperature at 50 metres above mean sea level.

129

19.6 N oise l evel of t he engine sh all not ex ceed 105 D BA ( free field so und pr essure) at 3 m etres distance.

19.7 T he engine sh all b e se lf-starting t ype upt o 4 deg C and sh all be provided with one 24 volts heavy duty DC battery, starter, cut-out, battery leads complete in all respects. One additional spare battery sh all be pr ovided. The battery sh all have a ca pacity of 180 to 200 am pere hour s and 640 amps cold cranking amperage.

19.8 Provide a battery charger of 10 to 15 amperes capacity with trickle and booster charging facility and regulator.

19.9 Arrangement for starting shall be automatic on receiving the signal but shutting off shall be manual.

19.10 T he engine sh all be pr ovided with an oi l bath or dr y t ype air cleaner as per m anufacturer's design.

19.11 Engine shall be suitable for running on high-speed diesel oil.

19.12 The system shall be provided with a control panel with push button starting arrangement also and wired to operate the engine on a differential pressure gauge.

19.13 T he en tire sy stem sh all be m ounted on a co mmon s tructural b ase pl ate w ith ant i v ibration mountings and flexible connections on the suction and delivery piping.

19.14 Provide one f ully mounted and su pported day oil tank fabricated from 5 m m thick M.S. Sheet electrically welded with a ca pacity of 8 hour s working load but not less than 200 l it. Provide level indicating gauge glass on the day oil tank and low fuel level indication on the control panel.

19.15 Provide one exhaust pipe with suitable muffler (residential type) to discharge the engine gases to outside open air as per site conditions.

19.16 Provide all accessories fittings & fixtures necessary and required for a complete operating engine set.

19.17 Contractor shall indicate special requirements, if any, for the ventilation of the pump room.

20.00

Air Vessel

20.01

Provide one air vessel fabricated from 12 mm M.S. plate with 10 mm thick-dished ends and suitable su pporting l egs. A ir v essel sh all be pr ovided with a 100 m m di a f langed co nnection from pump, one 25 m m di a drain w ith v alve, one gunm etal w ater l evel g auge and 15 m m so ckets for pressure sw itches. The vessel sh all be 450 mm dia x 1500 mm high and tested to 20-kg/sq cm pressure.

21.00

Pressure switches

Provide differential type pressure switches for operation of all pumps and for the various duties and settings required. P ressure sw itches shall be f or heav y-duty oper ation and o f appr oved m ake. All pressure switches shall be factory calibrated.

130

21.1

The fire pumps shall operate on drop of pressure in the mains. The pump operating sequence shall be arranged in a manner to start the pump automatically but should be stopped manually by starter push buttons only.

21.2 Jockey pump shall start and stop through pressure switch automatically.

21.3 Jockey pump shall stop when main pump starts.

21.4 Main Fire and Sprinkler pumps shall start independently and automatically on fall of pressure but stopping of the pump shall be shall be by manual push button from the MCC panel.

22. DISTRIBUTION PANELS/ BOARDS

Main D istribution P anels, S ub-Distribution P anels and Fi nal D istribution P anels/Boards sh all be suitable f or oper ation on 3 P hase/single phas e, 415/ 230 v olts, 50 c ycles, neut ral g rounded at transformer. A ll D istribution panel s shall be C PRI appr oved and m anufactured by a r eputed manufacturer.

Distribution panels shall comply with the latest Relevant Indian Standards and Electricity Rules and

Regulations and shall be as per IS-1394-1993.

22.1

CONSTRUCTION FEATURES

Distribution panel s shall be sh eet st eel ca binet for i ndoor i nstallation, dead f ront, and floor mounting/wall mounting type. The Distribution panels shall be t otally enclosed, completely dust and vermin pr oof and s hall be with hi nged doors, Neoprene gasket and padlocking ar rangement.

Distribution panel shall be suitable for the climatic conditions as specified in Special Conditions. Steel sheets used in the construction of Distribution panels shall be 2 mm thick and shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for all components. Joints of any kind in sheet metal shall be st eam welded, al l welding, sl ag sh all be r ounded off and welding pits wiped sm ooth with plumber m etal. The general co nstruction sh all co nfirm t o IS-8623-1977 ( Part-1) f or f actory built assembled switchgear & control gear for voltage upto and including 1100 V AC.

All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and square with t he frame, and holes in the panel correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes tapped into an adequate thickness of metal or provided with wing nuts. Self-threading screws shall not be used in the construction of Distribution panels. A base channel of 75 mm x 75 m m x 5 mm thick shall be pr ovided at the bottom for floormounted panels. Minimum clearance of 200 mm shall be pr ovided between the floor of Distribution panels and the lowest unit/ bus bar Distribution panels shall be of adequate size with a pr ovision of spare switchgear as indicated on t he Single Line Diagram. Switches shall be ar ranged in multi-tier.

Knockout holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the Distribution panels in conformity w ith t he l ocation of ca ble/conduit co nnections. R emovable sh eet st eel pl ates shall be provided at the top to make holes for additional cable entry at site if required.

Every ca binet sh all be provided with T rifoliate or en graved m etal nam eplates. A ll panel s shall be provided with circuit diagram engraved on PVC sheet. All live accessible connections shall be shrouded and m inimum cl earance bet ween pha se and ear th sh all be 2 0 m m and phase -to-phase shall be 25 mm.

22.2

BUS BAR CONNECTIONS

Bus bar and interconnections shall be of high conductivity electrolytic copper and of rectangular cross section suitable for carrying the rated full load current and short circuit current without overheating of phase and neutral bus bars and shall be extendable on either side. Bus bars and interconnections shall be insulated with heat shrinkable sleeve and shall be colour coded. Bus bars shall be supported on glass fibre reinforced thermosetting plastic insulated supports at regular intervals to withstand the force arising from in case of short circuit in the system. All bus bars shall be provided in a

separate

131

chamber and all connections shall be done by bolting. Additional cross sectional area to be added to the bus bar to compensate for the holes. All connections between bus bars and breakers shall be through solid copper strips of proper size to carry full rated current and insulated with insulating sleeves.

22.2.1 TEMPERATURE - RISE LIMIT

Unless otherwise specified, in the case of external surface of enclosures of bus bar trunking system which shall be accessible but do not need to be touched during normal operation, an increase in the temperature rise limits of 25° C above ambient temperature shall be permissible for m etal su rface and of 15° C abov e am bient t emperature for i nsulating su rfaces as per IS

8623(Part-2) 1993.

All main distribution panels and sub distribution panels shall be pr ovided with MCCB of appropriate capacity as per S ingle Line D iagram. A ll f inal D istribution boar ds shall be pr ovided with Miniature

Circuit Breakers. Final Single Phase Distribution boards shall be connected to the incoming supply through double pole MCB units & earth leakage circuit breakers. All wiring for final distribution boards shall be concealed behind 5 mm thick bakelite sheet or M S sheet cover. All Distribution boards shall be completely factory wired, ready for connection. All the terminals shall be of proper current rating and sized to suit individual feeder requirements. Each circuit shall be clearly numbered from left to right to correspond with wiring diagram. All the switches and circuits shall be distinctly marked with a small description of the service installed.

22.3

CABLE COMPARTMENTS

Cable compartment of adequate size shall be provided in the Distribution panels for easy clamping of all incoming and outgoing cables entering from the top/bottom. Adequate supports shall be provided in cable compartment to support cables.

22.4 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB)

MCCB sh all be C urrent Limiting and comprise o f Quick M ake - break switching mechanism, preferably D ouble B reak Contact sy stem, ar c extinguishing dev ice an d t he tripping uni t sh all be contained in a co mpact, high strength, heat resistant, flame retardant, insulating moulded case with high withstand capability against thermal and mechanical stresses. All MCCB’s shall be capable of defined Variable overload adjustment. All MCCB’s rated 200 Amps and above shall have adjustable

Magnetic short circuit pick up.

The trip command shall override all other commands. MCCB shall employ maintenance free double break contact system to minimise the let thru’ energies and capable of achieving discrimination upto full short circuit capacity of downstream MCCB. The manufacturer shall provide both discrimination tables and l et thru ene rgy cu rves. The br eaking ca pacity o f M CCB’s sh all be ask ed for i n the schedule of quantities. The breaking capacities specified will be ICU=ICS i.e type-2. Co-ordination as per IEC-947- 2, 1989/IS: 13947-2, 1943.

The MCCB’s shall be pr ovided with rotary handle operating mechanism. The handle position shall give positive indication of ‘ON’, ‘OFF’ or ‘Tripped’ thus qualifying to Disconnection as per the IS/IEC indicating the true position of all the contacts. In case of 4 pole MCCB the neutral shall be def ined and capable of offering protection.

22.5

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB)

Miniature Circuit Breaker shall comply with IS-8828-1996/IEC898-1995. Miniature circuit breakers shall be q uick m ake an d br eak t ype for 230/ 415 V AC 50 H z appl ications with m agnetic thermal release for over current and short circuit protection.

The breaking capacity shall not be l ess than 10 KA at 415 V AC. MCBs shall be D IN mounted. The

MCB shall be Current Limiting be type (Class-3). MCBs shall be classified (B,

C, D ref IS standard)

132

as per t heir Tripping C haracteristic curves defined by t he m anufacturer. T he M CB sh all ha ve t he minimum power loss (Watts) per pole defined as per the IS/IEC and t he manufacturer shall publish the values.

The housing shall be heat resistant and having high impact strength. The terminals shall be protected against finger contact to IP20 Degree of protection. All DP, TP and TPN miniature circuit breakers shall have a common trip bar independent to the external operating handle.

22.6

EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER CURRENT OPERATED TYPE (ELCB)

i.

System of Operation

Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) shall work on the principle of core balance transformer. The incoming shall pass through the torroidal core transformer. As long as the currents in the phase and neutral shall be the same, no electro motive force shall be generated in the secondary winding of the transformer. In the event of a leakage to earth, an unbalance shall be created which shall cause a current t o be generated i n t he se condary w inding, t his current sh all be fed t o a hi ghly se nsitive miniature r elay, w hich s hall t rip t he ci rcuit i f t he ear th l eakage cu rrent ex ceeds a pr edetermined critical value.

ELCB/ R CCB sh all be current oper ated i ndependent o f t he l ine v oltage, cu rrent se nsitivity of a minimum of 30 mA and a maximum of 300 mA at 240/415 volts AC and shall have a minimum of

20,000 electrical operations. ii.

Mechanical Operation

The moving contacts of the phases shall be m ounted on a co mmon bridge, actuated by a r ugged toggle mechanism. Hence, the closing /opening of all the three phases shall occur simultaneously.

This also shall ensure simultaneous opening of all the contacts under automatic tripping conditions. iii.

Neutral Advance Feature

The neutral moving contact shall be so mounted on t he common bridge that, at the time of closing, the neutral shall make contact first before the phases; and at the time of opening, the neutral shall breaks last after allowing the phases to open first. This is an important safety feature, which is also required by regulations. iv.

Testing Provision

A test device shall be i ncorporated to check the integrity of the earth leakage detection system and the tripping mechanism. When the unit is connected to service, pressing the test knob shall trip the

ELCB and the operating handle shall move to the "OFF" position.

22.7

EARTHING

Earthing shall be provided as per IS: 3043-1987.

22.8

PAINTING

All sheet steel work shall undergo a process of degreasing, pickling in acid, cold rinsing, phosphating, passivating (seven tank processing) and then painted with electrostatic paint (Powder coating). The shade of colour of panel inside/outside shall be 631 of IS Code No.5.

22.9

LABELS

Engraved PVC labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeder. Circuit diagram showing the ar rangements of t he ci rcuit i nside t he di stribution p anels shall be pas ted o n inside of the panel door and covered with transparent plastic sheet.

22.10

METERS

133

i.

All voltmeters and indicating lamps shall be through MCB’s. ii. Meters and indicating instruments shall be plug type. iii. All CT’s connection for meters shall be through Test Terminal Block (TTB). iv. CT ratio and burdens shall be as specified on the Single line diagram.

22.11

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Current transformers shall be provided for Distribution panels carrying current in excess of 60 amps.

All phase shall be provided with current transformers of suitable VA burden with 5 amps secondaries for operation of associated metering.

The CTs shall confirm to relevant Indian Standards. The design and construction shall be dr y type, epoxy resin cast robust to withstand thermal and dy namic stresses during short circuits. Secondary terminals of CTs shall be brought out suitable to a terminal block, which shall be easily accessible for testing and terminal co nnections. The p rotection C Ts shall be o f accuracy cl ass 5P10 and measurement CTs shall be of accuracy class I.

22.12

POTENTIAL FREE CONTACTS

Potential free contacts shall be provided for connection to Building Automation system in panels indicated in Schedule of Quantities.

22.13

INDICATING PANEL

All m eters and i ndicating i nstruments shall be i n acco rdance w ith r elevant I ndian S tandards. The meters shall be flush mounted type. Indicating lamps shall be of low burden, and shall be backed up with 2 amps MCB and toggle switch.

22.14

TESTING

Testing of panels shall be as per following codes: i. IS: 8623 (Part -I) 1977 for factory built assemblies of switchgear for voltages upto and i ncluding

1000 VAC. ii. IS: 13947: 1993 Degree of protection iii. IS: 5578 & 11353:1985 Arrangement of bus bars.

22.15

WIRING

In w iring a di stribution p anel i t sh all be i nsured t hat total l oad o f v arious distribution panel and/ or consuming devices is divided evenly between the phases and number of ways as per Consultants drawing.

22. Testing

All piping in the system shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 14 Kg/sqcm without drop in pressure for atleast for 10 hours.

23.2 Rectify all leakages, make adjustment and retest as required and directed.

23. Measurement

MS pi pes shall be m easured per linear meter of the finished l ength and shall include all fittings, flanges, and welding, jointing, clamps for fixing to walls or hangers, anchor fasteners, painting and testing complete in all respect.

Butterfly valves, check valves, air vessel, fire hydrants, hose reels, hose boxes, fire extinguishers, fire brigade co nnections, Fire pum ps ar e m easured by num bers and sh all i nclude al l i tems nece ssary and required for fixing and as given in the specifications and schedule of quantities.

134

COMMISSIONING AND GUARANTEES

1.

Scope of work

Work under t his section sh all co nsist of pr e-commissioning, co mmissioning, t esting and pr oviding guarantees for all eq uipment, appliances and acce ssories supplied and i nstalled b y t he co ntractor under this contract.

2. General requirements:

2.1 Work under this section shall be executed without any additional cost. The rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of the works given in this section.

2.2 C ontractor shall pr ovide a ll t ools, eq uipment, metering and testing dev ices required for t he purpose.

2.3 On award of work, contractor shall submit a detailed proposal giving methods of testing and gauging the performance of the equipment to be supplied and installed under this contract.

3.

Pre-commissioning

3.1 On completion of the installation of all pumps, piping, valves, pipe connections, and w ater level controlling devices the contractor shall proceed as follows: -

3.1.2

Fire protection system: i) Check all hydrant valves and close if any valve is open. Also check that all suction and delivery connections are properly made. ii) Test run and checks rotation of each motor and corrects the same if required.

3.1.3

Pipe work

i) Check all clamps, supports and hangers provided for the pipes. ii) F ill up pi pes with water and appl y h ydrostatic pr essure t o t he sy stem as given in t he r elevant section of the specifications. If any leakage is found, rectify the same and retest the pipes.

4.

Commissioning & testing

4.1

Fire hydrant system

i) Pressurize the fire hydrant system by running the main fire pump and after attaining the required pressure shutoff the pump. ii) Open by-pass valve and allow the pressure to drop in the system. Check that the jockey pumps cuts-in and cu ts out at the pre-set pressures. If necessary adjust the pressure switch for the jockey pump. & close byepass valve. iii) Open hydrant valve and allow the water to flow into the firewater tank in order to avoid wastage of water. The main fire pump should cut-in at the pre-set pressure and should not cut out automatically on reaching the normal line pressure. The main fire pump should stop only by manual push button.

However the jockey pump should cut out as soon as the main pump starts. iv) Switch off the main fire pump and test check the diesel engine driven pump in the same manner as the electrically driven pump. v) When the fire pumps have been checked for satisfactory working on automatic controls, open fire hydrant valves simultaneously and allow the hosepipes to discharge water into the fire tank to avoid wastage. The electrically driven pump should run continuously for eight hours so that its

Performance can be checked.

135

vi) Diesel engine driven pump should also be checked in the same manner as given in para above by running for eight hours. vii) C heck each l anding v alve, m ale and female co uplings and b ranch pi pes for co mpatibility with each other. Any fitting, which is found to be incompatible and does not fit into the other properly, shall be replaced by the contractor. Landing valves shall also be ch ecked by opening and cl osing under pressure.

4.2

Sprinkler system:

i) Start the sprinkler pumps and develops the required pressure in the sprinkler pipes. ii) O pen the test valve t o test the automatic starting of the pump. I f necessary, make necessary adjustments in the setting of pressure switch. The sprinkler fire alarm should also operate when the test valve is open. iii) After satisfactory operation of the pump the contractor shall set up mock fire and test the system.

5.

Handing over

i) All commissioning and testing shall be done by the contractor to the complete satisfaction of the

Plumbing-in-charge, an d t he job handed ov er t o the P roject M anager, o r hi s authorised representative. ii) Contractor shall also handover, to the Project Manager, all maintenance & operation manuals and all other items as per the terms of the contract.

6.

Guarantees

i) The contractor shall submit a warranty for all equipment, materials and accessories supplied by him against manufacturing defects, malfunctioning or under capacity functioning. ii) The form of warranty shall be as approved by the Project Manager. iii) The warranty shall be valid for a period of one year from the date of commissioning and handing over or as mentioned in special condition of contract. iv) T he warranty sh all expressly include r eplacement of all defective or under ca pacity equipment.

Project Manager may allow repair of certain equipment if the same is found to meet the requirement for efficient functioning of the system. v) The warranty shall include replacement of any equipment found to have capacity lesser that the rated capacity as specified in the contract. The replaced equipment shall be approved by the Project

- in -charge.

----000----

136

LIST OF APPROVED MAKE

OF

FIRE FIGHTING ITEMS

137

7

8

9

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

3

4

5

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES FOR FIRE FIGHTING WORKS

S.

NO.

MATERIAL DESCRIPTION NAME OF MANUFACTURER

1 Fire Pumps GRUNDFOS / MATHER PLATT / KIRLOSKAR

2 Motors GRUNDFOS / MATHER PLATT / KIRLOSKAR

6

10

Diesel Engine

G.I. and M.S. Pipes

KIRLOSKAR / ASHOK LEYLAND / CUMMINS

TATA / JINDAL HISAR / PRAKASH

Fire Hose Pipes / R R.L. Hose

Pipe

First Aid Fire Hose Reel with

Bracket, Drum and Nozzle.

G.I. and M.S. Fittings

NEWAGE / MINIMAX / GETECH

GETECH / MINIMAX / NEWAGE

UNIK / DRP/ KS

Ball valve ZOLOTO/ TBS / AIP / AUDCO

C.I.Double flanged sluice / Gate valve / Non - Return Valves

Slim Seal Butterfly valves (PN-

1.6)

C. I. Body Butterfly Valve

AIP/ KIRLOSKAR / SHIVA-DURGA / IVC

AIP / AUDCO / KSB / INTERVALVE / TBS

AUDCO / SANT / INTERVALVE / AIP / DANFOSS

Gun Metal Body Butterfly Valve AUDCO / SANT / INTERVALVE / AIP/ DANFOSS

Wrapping and coating PYPECOAT / RUSTECH / COALTEK

Fabricated Fire Hose Cabinet

Branch Pipe / Nozzles (gun metal / brass / copper & brass / aluminium)

Fire Extinguishers

Fire brigade connection

Suction Strainer

STEELAGE / NEWAGE / G. TECH

MINMAX / NEWAGE / G. TECH

GETECH / MINIMAX / CEASE FIRE

NEWAGE / MINIMAX / GETECH

JATPEE / AIP / DASHMESH

138

27

28

29

33

34

35

36

37

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

30

31

32

38

Vibration Eliminator Connectors RESISTOFLEX / KHANWAL / TAIDY

Submersible Sump Pump KSB / JS / HOMA

Foot Valve

Automatic Air Vent

SMC Panel Tank (Fiber reinforced )

Main control panel (Powder coated)

Pressure Switches

Pressure Gauge

Battery

Paint Enamel of pipes etc.

KIRLOSAKAR / SANT / KALPANA / AIP

TBS / IBP / DANFOSS / AIP

DEVI POLYMER / SINTEX / SUNNIK

ADVANCED AUTOMATION / ITAL / TECHNICA /

MINILAC

INDFOSS / SWITZER / Ashcroft India Pvt.Ltd

H.GURU / FIEBIG / H.GURU (India)/ FIEBIG/ MASTA

Hydraulic pressure Gauges/ WIKA/ BAKER MERCER

Dial Gauges.

EXIDE / PRESTOLITE / AMCO

SHALIMAR / ASIAN / BERGER

PCD / SAFEWAY / AGNI (INDIA) Annunciation Panel For

Sprinkler System

Alarm Valve & Hydraulic Alarm

Motor with covering

Contactor

Thimbles/Ferrules (Tinned copper)

Cable Glands

Power Capacitor

Measuring Meter(Digital)

M.S.Conduit

Dash Fastener

MATHER & PLATT / HD / GLOBE

L&T / SIEMENS / SCHNEIDE / GE / ABB

DOWEL, Bontley, KD

COMMEX / POWER / GRIPWELL

L&T / CROMPTON / ASIAN / DUCATTI

L&T / SIEMENS / AE / ENERCON

STEEL CRAFT / BEC / AKG

Paint Primers

HILTI / CANON / 1955-1956

ASIAN / JENSON NICHOLSON, Berger

139

39

40

41

Weld. Electrodes ADVANI / ESAB / VICTOR

Pipe Clamps/ Hangers / Support CHILLY / EURO CLAMP / CADDY

MCB, DBs MDS / LEGRAND / INDO ASIAN (GOLDLINE) HEGER

140

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

1.0 GENERAL

To provide electrical equipment and materials for the distribution of electrical power from the ESS including ESS as shown in the drawings and described in these specifications. The quantities mentioned in BOQ are tentative. It will be the bidder’s responsibility to work out the exact quantities from drawings, which trade provides said equipment, materials.

It i s not t he i ntent to s pecify co mpletely her ein al l asp ects of desi gn and co nstructional features of equipment and details of work to be carried out, nevertheless, the equipment and work shall conform in all respects to high standards of Engineering, design and workmanship and sh all be ca pable o f per forming i n co ntinuous commercial oper ation i n a m anner acceptable to the owner who will interpret the meaning of the specifications and drawings and shall hav e r ight t o r eject or ac cept any w ork or m aterial w hich i n h is asse ssment i s not complete to meet the requirement of this specifications and or applicable code and standards mentioned elsewhere in these specifications.

2.0 SCOPE

The sco pe o f w ork und er t hese specifications shall i nclude desi gn, m anufacture, supply, loading and unloading, storage, erection and testing & commissioning of following items for complete el ectrification work including labour, tools, t ackles and plants i ncluding su pply of hardware consumables and steel fabrication et c. as required in t he pr oposed

Greater

Kailash-I Police Station of Delhi Police at New Delhi. The scope also covers the detailed engineering and calculations of the various equipment/system mentioned hereunder and the same shall be approved by the Owner prior to execution of the job.

Internal Electrical Works including Light Fixtures, Switch Boards, Switches, Receptacles,

DBs, Wiring, C onduit & C onduit A ccessories, E xhaust/Bracket/Ceiling Fans , D ata

Networking System, Telephone System, and Fire Detection & Alarm System

• HT/LV Panels

• LT Cables

• Cable Trays

• Earthing & Lightning Protection

• External Lighting

Compliance with these specifications and/or approval of any of the Contractor’s documents shall in no case relieve the Contractor of his contractual obligations.

All su pplies to be e ffected t hat ar e a par t o f contract r equire specific appr oval/review of

RITES/Client or his authorized representative. Major activities requiring approval/review shall include but not be limited to the following:

The engineering activities shall comprise the submission for approval of the following:

· Basic engineering documents e.g. schematic & wiring diagrams, testing, type test report, guaranteed particulars of all equipment and maintenance manuals.

·

·

·

Quality assurance procedure.

Field testing and commissioning procedures.

Control and protection schemes.

141

·

·

Bidder shall be responsible for

· Inter-connection Drawing.

Protection co-ordination drawings/tables.

Shop inspection and testing procedures.

· Field testing and commissioning procedures.

Bidder shall also be responsible for

Any other work/activity that is not listed above however is necessary for completeness and correctness of electrical system.

All minor civil works associated with earthing, system, lighting and power panels/ distribution boards, in walls for light points switch boxes, receptacles and their drops etc. such as fixing of anchor bolts, clamps, cleats, cutting of chases in wall, ceiling including refilling and plastering etc. of the same

Bidder shall clearly understand and quote accordingly

The bidder shall bring to the notice of the Owner the differences, if any, and g et the same clarified failing which the Owner may impose the more stringent of the specification/clauses at the sole risk and costs of the bidder.

3.0 CODES & STANDARDS

The design engineering and manufacturing shall be in accordance with established standards/codes

(with amendments upto date), sound engineering practices, specifications and shall conform to the statutory regulations applicable in the country. Some of the relevant Standards/Codes are listed below:

Indian Electricity Act, 2003

Indian Electricity Rules, 1956

IS:8130 : Conductors for insulated electrical cables and flexible cords.

IS:5831 : PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.

IS:694 : PVC i nsulated el ectric cables for w orking V oltage upto and including 1100 volts.

IS:424, 1475 (F-3) : Power cable flexibility test.

IEC:754(1)

IS:13947 / IEC:

947

Part 1-5

: FRLS PVC insulated cable.

: Air Circuit Breaker / Moulded Case Circuit Breaker.

142

IS:8623

IS:10118

IS:1248

Part 1-9

IS:13779

IS:3156

IS:2705

IS :2147

IS:3427

BS:162

IS:3202

IS:375

IS:722

IS:3231

IS:5082

IS:2834

IS:7752

IS:4201

IS:4146

IS:4029

IS:2959

IS:5578

IS:11050

: Specification for factory built assemblies of switch gear and control gear for voltage upto and including 1000V

AC/1200V DC.

: Switchgear and Controlgear selection, installation and maintenance.

: Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and testing accessories.

: Digital measuring instruments and testing accessories.

: Voltage Transformer.

: Current Transformer for metering and protection with classification, burden and insulation.

: Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear and controlgear.

: Metal enclosed switchgear and control gear.

: Safety clearance.

: Code of practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment.

: Marking and arrangement for switchgear, bus bars, main connections and auxiliary wiring.

: AC electric meters.

: Electrical relays for power system protection.

: Electrolytic copper / aluminium Bus bars.

: Capacitors.

: Guide for improvement of power factor at consumer’s installation.

: Application guide for Current Transformer.

: Application guide for Voltage Transformer.

: Air Break switches.

: Contactors.

: Guide for marking of insulated conductors.

: Guide f or f orming sy stem of marking and identification of conductors & apparatus terminal.

143

IS:6005 Code of practice for phosphating of iron & steel.

Any ot her st andard may be f ollowed pr ovided it i s equivalent or m ore st ringent than the standards specified above.

In case of any deviation / conflict of this specification with the codes & standards, the following order of precedence shall govern

a) Specification, particular specification if any, and drawings.

b) Indian regulations /codes and standards.

4.0 DESIGN

The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering practices, to ensure satisfactory performance and service life. The requirement offered by the contractor shall be complete in all respects. Any materials or accessories which may not have been specifically mentioned, but which are usual and necessary for the satisfactory and trouble free operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be provided without any extra cost to the purchaser. This shall also include spares for commissioning of the equipment.

5.0 DRAWINGS

i) Any information / data shown in the drawings furnished with the specifications shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibility to carry out the entire work as per the specifications and to the sa tisfaction o f E ngineer-in-Charge. A dditional i nformation r equired by t he bi dder f or successfully completing the work shall be obtained by him. ii) Shop Drawings

The contractor shall prepare detailed shop drawings indicating General Arrangement,

Schematic, Inter-connection of the various equipment and su bmit to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval bef ore co mmencing t he work. The shop dr awings shall i ndicate al l se tting out details and phy sical di mensions of al l co mponents with w iring and ca ble det ails including system oper ating w rite up i n t he sy stem. A ll w ork sh all be ca rried ou t on t he appr oval o f these drawings. However, approval of these drawings do not relieve the contractor of his responsibility f or pr oviding maintenance free an d f ool pr oof sy stem i ncluding any m issing component/accessories to meet with the intent of the specifications. Contractor will submit 2 prints for preliminary approval and finally six prints for distribution.

5.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENTS

All the materials and equipment shall be of the approved make and design. Unless otherwise called for any approval by Engineer-in-Charge, only the best quality materials and equipment shall be used.

144

A. SPACE HEATERS

One or m ore ade quately r ated heat ers thermostatically co ntrolled w ith O n-Off switch and fuse shall be provided to prevent condensation in any panel compartment. The heaters shall be i nstalled in the lower portion of the compartment and el ectrical connections shall be made from below the heaters to minimize deterioration of supply wire insulation. The heaters shall be suitable to maintain the compartment temperature to prevent condensation.

FUNGISTATIC VARNISH B.

Besides the sp ace hea ters, special m oisture an d fungus resistant v arnish sh all be applied on par ts that may be su bjected or predisposed to the formation of fungi due t o the presence or deposit of nutrient substances. The varnish shall not be applied to any surface of part where t he t reatment will interfere with t he oper ation or performance of the equipment.

Such surfaces or parts shall be protected against the application of the varnish.

VENTILATION OPENING C.

In order to ensure adequate ventilation, compartments shall have ventilation openings provided w ith fine w ire m esh o f b rass to p revent t he en try o f i nsects and t o reduce t o a minimum the entry of dirt and dust. Outdoor compartment openings shall be provided with shutter type blinds.

D. DEGREE OF PROTECTION

The encl osures of t he Control C abinets, Ju nction B oxes and Marshalling B oxes,

Panels etc. to be installed shall provide degree of protection as detailed here under.

· Installed out door : IP56.

· Installed indoor in air conditioned area: IP31.

· Installed in covered area: IP52.

· Installed indoor in non air conditioned area where possibility of entry of water is limited: IP44.

The degree of pr otection sh all be i n ac cordance w ith I S: 2147. Type t est r eport for degree of protection test, on each type of the box shall be submitted for approval.

E. RATING PLATES, NAME PLATES AND LABELS

Main LT P anel t o hav e rating/name pl ate and l abel per manently at tached t o i t i n a conspicuous position. A rating plate of non-corrosive material with engraved manufacturer’s name, year of manufacture, equipment name, type or serial number together with details of the l oading co nditions of e quipment i n question has been desi gned t o oper ate and su ch diagram plates as may be required by the purchaser. The rating plate of equipment shall be according to IEC requirement.

All such nameplates, instruction plates, rating plates shall be bilingual with Hindi inscription first followed by English. Alternatively two separate plates one with Hindi and the other with English inscriptions may be provided.

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM F.

To en sure that t he e quipment and se rvices under t he sco pe o f this Contract manufactured within the Contractor’s works or at his sub-contractor’s premises are in accordance w ith t he sp ecifications, t he C ontractor sh all adopt su itable q uality assu rance program to control such activities at all points necessary. Such program shall be outlined by

145

the C ontractor and shall be finally acce pted by t he P urchaser a fter di scussions before t he award of Contract. A quality assurance program of the contractor shall generally cover the following:

·

· His organization st ructure for the m anagement and i mplementation o f the proposed quality assurance program.

Documentation control system.

Qualification data for bidder’s key personnel. ·

· The p rocedure for pur chases of materials, pa rts components and selection o f sub-contractor’s services including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw material inspection, verification of material purchases etc.

· System for shop manufacturing and si te erection controls including process controls and fabrication and assembly control.

Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions.

·

·

·

·

Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities.

Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field activities.

System for indication and appraisal of inspection status.

·

·

·

· System for quality audits.

System for authorizing release of manufactured product to the Purchaser.

System for maintenance of records.

System for handling storage and delivery and

· A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control measures and procedures adopted for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to each item of equipment furnished and/or services rendered.

The Purchaser or his duly authorized representative reserves the right to carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of the system and procedure of the Contractor/his Vendor’s quality management and control activities.

INSPECTION, TESTING AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE G.

· The Engineer-in-Charge and Client sh all have at al l r easonable times free acce ss t o the

Contractor’s premises or works and shall have the power at all reasonable times to inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the works during its manufacture or erection, if part of the works is being manufactured or assembled at other premises or works, the Contractor shall obtain permission to inspect as if the works were manufactured or assembled on the Contractor’s own premises or works. Inspection may be made at any stage of manufacture, dispatch or at site at the option of the RITES and the equipment if found unsatisfactory due to bad workmanship or quality, material is liable to be rejected.

· All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests and shall be subject to routine tests in accordance with requirements stipulated under respective sections. Bidder shall submit the type tests r eports for app roval. The C ontractor sh all i ntimate t he E ngineer-in-Charge t he detailed

146

program about the tests at least three (3) weeks in advance in case of domestic supplies. If for any item type test is pending payment would be made on successful completion of type/routine test(s) actually carried out as per Engineer-in-Charge’s instructions.

· The Contractor shall give the Engineer-in-Charge thirty (30) days written notice of any material being ready f or testing. Such t ests shall be t o the Contractor’s account. R ITES/Client unless witnessing of the tests is virtually waived will attend such tests within thirty (30) days of the date of which the equipment is notified as being ready for test/inspection, failing which the Contractor may proceed with the test which shall be deemed to have been made in the presence of

Engineer-in-Charge and he shall forthwith forward to the Consultant duly certified copies of tests in triplicate.

· The Engineer-in-Charge shall within fifteen (15) days from the date of inspection as defined shall inform in writing to the Contractor of any objection to any drawings and all or any equipment and workmanship which in his opinion is not in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall give due consideration to such objections and make the necessary modifications accordingly.

· When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractor’s or Sub-contractor’s works, the

Engineer-in-Charge shall issue a certificate to this effect within fifteen (15) days after completion of t ests but i f t he tests ar e not w itnessed by the E ngineer-in-Charge, the ce rtificate sh all be issued within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the Contractor’s Test certificate by the Engineer-in-

Charge. Fai lure of the issue such a ce rtificate shall not prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the works. T he completion of these tests or the issue of the certificate shall not bind the

Purchaser to accept the equipment should, it, on further tests after erection, be found not to comply with the Specification. T he equipment shall be dispatched to site only after approval of test reports and issuance of MICC by the Engineer-in-Charge.

· For tests whether at the premises or at the works of the Contractor or of any Sub-Contractor, the

Contractor except where otherwise specified shall provide free of charge such items as labour, materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be required by

Engineer-in-Charge or this authorized representative to carry out effectively such tests of the equipment in accordance with the Specification.

· The inspection by Engineer-in-Charge and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon shall in no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in respect of the agreed quality assurance programme forming a part of the Contract.

· The Engineer-in-Charge will have the right of having at his own expenses any other tests(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Contractor’s premises or at site or in any other place in addition of aforesaid type and routine tests to satisfy that the material comply with the specifications.

· The Engineer-in-Charge reserves the right for getting any field tests not specified in respective sections of the technical specification conducted on the completely assembled equipment at site.

The testing equipment for these tests shall be provided by the Contractor.

6.0 PACKAGING

All the equipment shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and crated to prevent dam age or deterioration dur ing t ransit, handling and st orage at S ite t ill t he t ime of erection. While packing all the materials, the limitation from the point of view of availability of

Railway wagon/truck/trailer sizes in India should be taken account of the Contractor shall be responsible for any l oss or da mage dur ing transportation, handl ing and st orage due t o improper pac king. A ny dem urrage, w harfage and ot her su ch ch arges claimed by t he

147

transporters, r ailways etc. sh all be t o t he acc ount o f t he C ontractor. O wner takes no responsibility of the availability of any special packaging/transporting arrangement.

7.0 PROTECTION

All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion, impact, discolouration and any other damages. All exposed threaded portions shall be suitably protected with either a metallic or a non -metallic protecting dev ice. A ll ends of al l v alves and piping and co nduit equipment co nnections shall be pr operly se aled with su itable devi ces to pr otect them from damage. The parts which are likely to get rusted, due to exposure to weather should also be properly treated and protected in a suitable manner.

8.0 GENERAL

8.1 All m etal su rfaces shall be su bjected t o t reatment for ant i-corrosion pr otection. A ll ferrous surfaces for ex ternal use unl ess ot herwise st ated el sewhere i n the sp ecification o r specifically agreed, shall be hot -dip galvanised after fabrication. High tensile steel nuts and bolts and sp ring w ashers shall be el ectro galvanised. A ll st eel co nductors used for earthing/grounding (above ground level) shall be galvanised according to IS: 2629.

·

8.2 HOT DIP GALVANISING

The m inimum w eight o f t he z inc coating sh all be 610 g m/sq.mm a nd m inimum thickness of coating shall be 85 microns for all items thicker than 6mm. For items lower than

6mm thickness requirement of coating thickness shall be as per relevant ASTM. For surface that shall be embedded in concrete, the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq.mm minimum.

· The galvanised surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniform thick coating of zinc, firmly adhering to the surface of steel. The finished surface shall be cl ean and smooth and shall be free from defects like discoloured patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, splatter w hich i s l oosely at tached t o t he st eel g lobules, sp iky deposi ts, bl istered su rface, flaking o r peel ing o ff e tc. The p resence o f any of t hese de fects noticed on v isual or microscopic inspection shall render the material liable to rejection.

· After galvanizing drilling or welding shall be performed on the galvanised parts of the earthing materials. Sodium dichromate treatment shall be provided to avoid formation of white rust after hot dip galvanization.

· The galvanized steel shall be subjected to six, one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per IS-2633.

· Sharp edges with radii less than 2.5mm shall be able to withstand four immersions of the Standard Preece test. All other coatings shall withstand six immersions. The following

-

-

-

- galvanizing tests should essentially be performed as per relevant Indian Standards.

Coating thickness,

Uniformity of zinc,

Adhesion test,

Mass of zinc coating.

· Galvanised m aterial must be transported pr operly t o ensu re t hat galvanised su rfaces are not damaged during transit. Application of zinc rich paint at site shall not be allowed.

8.3 PAINTING

148

· All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated in accordance with the IS-6005 “Code of practice for phosphating iron and sheet”. All surfaces which will not be easily accessible after shop assembly shall beforehand be treated and protected for the life of the e quipment. The s urfaces that a re t o be finished pai nted a fter i nstallation or r equire corrosion protection until installation, shall be shop painted with at least two coats of primer.

Oil, grease, dirt and swaf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and scale

· shall be r emoved by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing with running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.

After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying. The phosphate coating shall be se aled with application of two co ats of ready m ixed, st oving t ype zinc chromate pr imer.

The first coat may be “flash dried” while the second coat shall be stoved.

·

· Powder coating/electrostatic painting of approved shade shall be applied.

The exterior color of the paint shall be as per shade no.697 of IS: 5 and inside shall be white. A small quantity of finishing paint shall be su pplied for minor touching up required at site after installation of the equipment, if required.

· In case the Bidder proposes to follow his own standard surface finish and protection procedures or any other established painting procedures like electrostatic painting etc. the procedure shall be submitted along with the Bids for Owner’s review and approval.

9.0 TOOLS AND TACKLES

The Contractor shall supply with the equipment one co mplete set of all special tools and tackles for the erection, assembly, dis-assembly and maintenance of the equipment.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CONDUIT

All co nduits shall be o f heavy g auge solid dr awn E RW w elded m anufactured out of 16 ( 1.6mm) gauge MS Sheet upto 32mm dia and of 14 ( 2 mm) gauge for sizes higher than this. Both inner and outer su rfaces shall be sm ooth w ithout bur rs, dents and k inks. C onduits shall be black st ove enameled inside and outside. The cross section of conduit shall be uniform throughout. The welding shall be uniform such that welded joints do not yield when subjected to flattening test. Welded joint shall not break when threaded or bent at an angle. Conduit shall conform to specifications of IS:1653-

1972 and the capacity of conduits shall be in accordance with the s tandards and shall never be exceeded. The minimum size of the conduit shall be 25mm dia. Care shall be taken to ensure that all conduits are adequately protected while stored at site prior to erection and no damaged conduit shall be used.

FIXING/LAYING OF CONDUITS

Conduit accessories such as normal bends, unions, circular junction boxes and pull boxes, locknuts etc. sh all be heavy g auge t ype and of appr oved m ake. Wherever se veral co nduits are running together, adequately sized adaptable boxes common to all runs shall be used to avoid inserting inspection boxes in the individual run. Where it is necessary to segregate wiring metal filler shall be fixed with in the box.

149

Conduits shall be laid before casting in the upper portion of a slab or otherwise, as may be instructed or i n acco rdance w ith appr oved dr awings, so a s to co nceal the ent ire run o f co nduits and ce iling outlet boxes. Vertical drops shall be buried in columns or walls. Wherever necessary, chases will be cut by the contractor with the help of chase cutting m/c or by hand. Nothing extra shall be paid to the contractor on t his account. I n case of exposed brick/rubble masonry/tile work special care shall be taken to fix the conduit and accessories in position along with the building work.

Sufficient depth of the chases will be made to accommodate the required number of conduits. The chase will be f illed with cement, co arse sa nd mortar ( 1:3) and pr operly cu red by watering for one week. If a chase is cut in an already finished surface the contractor shall fill the chase and finish it to match the existing finish. Contractor must not cut any iron bars to fix conduits. Conduits shall be kept at a minimum distance of 100mm from the pipes of other non-electrical services. Where the conduit is to be em bedded in a concrete member it shall be adeq uately tied to the reinforcement to prevent displacement during casting, conduits in chases shall be hel d by steel hooks of approved design at maximum of 60cm centre. The embedding of conduits in walls shall be so arranged as to allow at least 12mm plaster covers the same. All threaded joints of conduit

- Pipes shall be treated with some approved ‘preservative compound’ to secure protection against rust.

-Suitable expansion joints fittings of approved make and desi gn shall be pr ovided at all the points where the conduit crosses the expansion joint in the building. Conduits shall cross at right angles of the joints only.

Separate conduit shall be used for:

1) Normal Lighting, Fans, Light Plug, Emergency Lighting, Exit Light

2) 6/16 Amps Power Outlets

3) CCTV / Access Control System

4) Telephone System

5) Fire Alarm System

6) Data Outlets

7) P.A System

8) Or any other services not mentioned here.

In case of surface conduit the colour codes enamel paints shall be used for each and every services for easy identification as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

Wiring for short extensions to outlets in hung ceiling or to vibrating equipments, motors etc. shall be installed in flexible conduits. Flexible conduits (Pilca pipe) shall be formed from a co ntinuous length of spirally wound interlocked wire steel with a fused zinc coating on both sides. The conduit shall be water tight type and approved make/sample. A separate and accessible earth connection shall bond across the flexible conduit.

Conduit runs on su rfaces shall be su pported with m etal 1.2 mm t hick saddles which i n t urn are properly secured on to GI spacer to the wall or ceiling. Fixing screws shall be with round or cheese head and of rust proof materials. Exposed conduits shall be nearly run parallel or at right angles to the walls of the building and shall be painted in colour matching the adjoining area.

Unseemly conduit bends and offsets shall be av oided by us ing better appearance. Cross cover of conduits shall be m inimum and ent ire conduit installation shall be clean and with good appearance.

For surface work, the boxes shall be raised back pattern type, designed for use with distance saddles to give clearance of 6mm between the back of conduit and the fixing surface.

150

Where conduits are run on steel work, they will be fixed by means of purpose made GI Caddy clips in manner meeting with the approval of the Engineer prior to the installation being carried out. Other methods of fixing may be agreed in special circumstances, but approval must first be obtained from the site Engineer.

The spacing of saddles shall be at 750mm centre for upto 25mm diameter conduits and at 1000mm for conduit sizes of 32mm diameter and above. In addition, saddles shall be fixed at each side of any bend, or set at a distance of 225mm from the bend. The holes in the brick work or concrete for fixing plugs shall be neatly drilled by means of a masonry drill of the appropriate size.

All the GI sheet steel/zinc passivated boxes used for housing switches, plugs, fan regulator etc. shall be five sided conforming to IS: 5133 Part I-1969. The boxes shall be provided with four to six fixing lugs located at t he co rners and v ertical si des. S uitable ear th t erminal i nside each bo x sh all be provided. A ll f ixing l ugs sh all be t hreaded to receive st andard machined ch romium pl ated b rass screws. Sufficient number of knockouts shall be provided for conduit entry. Conduits carrying wires of different circuit can terminate in common J.B. having metal compartments. Necessary GI pull wires shall be i nserted into the conduit for drawings wires. In case conduit pipe is required to cross any

RCC beam special adopter boxes shall be provided for crossing & nothing shall be paid extra.

Where co nduits are us ed f or non ai r-conditioned sp ace t o ai r-conditioned sp ace or i nto a fan chamber or duct, a junction box shall be installed to break the continuity of such conduit at the point of entry or just outside and conduit shall be sealed around the conductors.

Particular care shall be taken during the progress of the work to prevent the ingress of dirt and rubbish such as plaster droppings into erected conduits. Conduit which has become so clogged shall be entirely freed from these accumulations or will be replaced. Screwed plastic or metal caps or turned wooden plugs shall be employed to protect all open ends. Plugs of waste wood, paper, cotton or other f ibrous matter shall not be use d. A ll unuse d co nduit ent ries shall be bl anked o ff i n an approved manner and w here conduits terminate in adoptable boxes, all removable box covers shall be firmly secured to provide complete enclosure. If considered necessary by the Engineer-in-charge, the conduits shall be swabbed out by drawing swabs of rag through the conduit to remove moisture prior to any cables being drawn in.

All co nduit i nstallations must be co mpleted and er ected i n t heir totality be fore they ar e w ired a nd must be fully r e-wirable from out lets to di stribution boar ds or trunking s ystems etc. to w hich t hey connect. No wiring of any part of the installation shall be commenced until instructions are received to do so by the Engineer-in-charge at such time as he is satisfied that the wiring will not be damaged due to building operations.

Conduits shall be installed so that they are self draining in the event of ingress of moisture due to condensation o r any ot her r eason. A su itable drainage hol e sh all be drilled a t t he b ottom of the lowest conduit box in every 9 metre of horizontal run.

MS bush of good quality shall be used in each conduit termination in a switch box, draw box, lighting fixtures and circular junction boxes.

Exposed conduits running above f alse ceilings shall be su itably clamped independently along with the dropped ceiling. Perforated strap hangers or twisted attachment shall not be acce ptable. In no case shall raceways be supported or fastened to other pipe for repair and maintenance. They shall be ar ranged symmetrically and i n t he co st co mpact desi gn, i n no w ay unduly cr iss-crossing e ach other. Proper spacing shall be maintained when two or more conduits run side by side. The layout of the pipes shall be coordinated with other services if any. The junction boxes and conduits used in hazardous areas shall be flame proof type with cast iron construction complete with threaded covers.

151

The conduit of each circuit or section shall be completed before conductors are drawn in. The entire system of conduit after erection shall be t ested for mechanical and el ectrical continuity throughout and permanently connected to earth conforming to the requirements by means of special approved type of earthing cl amp efficiently f astened to c onduit pi pe i n a w orkman l ike m anner for a per fect continuity between the earth and conduit.

The conduit system shall be so laid out that it will obviate the use of tees, elbows and sharp bends.

No length of conduit shall have more than the equivalent of two quarter bends from inlet to outlet.

The conduit itself being given required smooth bend with radius of bends suiting to the site conditions but not less than 6 times overall diameter.

Outlet boxes shall be of heavy duty type installed as to maintain continuity throughout. These shall be so pr otected a t t he time o f l aying t hat no mortar finds its way i nside dur ing co ncrete filling or plastering. For fluorescent fittings, the outlet boxes shall be provided 300mm off centre for a 1200mm fitting and 150mm off centre for a 600mm fitting.

Draw boxes of ample dimensions shall be provided at convenient points to facilitate pulling of long runs of cables. They shall be completely concealed with MS covers flush with plaster work painted to match the w all. T hese boxes will be as few as possible and l ocated w here found su itable by t he consultant.

SWITCH BOXES

The switch boxes shall be 18 SWG. Passivated box will be so designed that accessories could be mounted on integral pedestals or on adjustable flat iron mounting straps with tapped holes by brass machine sc rew leaving ample space at the back and on the sides for accommodating wires and check nuts at conduit entries. These shall be attached to conduits by means of check nuts on either side of their walls. These shall be completely concealed leaving edges flush with wall surfaces.

Moulded plate switches as specified in item of work shall be fixed to these by means of chromium plated brass machine screws. No timber shall be used for any supports. Boxes which come within concrete shall be installed at the time of casting. Care shall be taken to fix the box rigidly so that its position is not shifted while concreting.

WIRING

All the wiring installation shall be as per IS:732 with latest amendments. FRLS PVC insulated copper conductor ca bles as specified i n bi ll of quantities shall be use d f or su b-circuit runs from t he distribution boards to t he points and shall be p ulled into conduits. T hey shall be t wisted copper conductors with t hermoplastic insulations of 1100 v olts grade. C olour C ode f or w iring sh all be followed.

Looping system of wiring shall be used, wires shall not be jointed. Where joints are unavoidable, they shall be made through approved mechanical connectors with prior permission of the consultant. No reduction of strands is permitted at terminations. No wire smaller than 2.5 sq.mm shall be used or as per B.O.Q. Wherever wiring is run through trunking or raceways, the wires emerging from individual distributions shall be bunched together with cable straps at required regular intervals. Identification ferrules indicating t he ci rcuit and D B num ber s hall be use d f or su b-main, su b-circuit w iring. The ferrules shall be provided at both ends of each sub-main and sub-circuit.

Where single ph ase ci rcuits are su pplied from a t hree phase and a neu tral di stribution boa rd, n o conduit sh all co ntain the wiring fed from more than one phase . I n any one r oom in t he pr emises where al l or par t of the el ectrical l oad co nsists of l ights, fans and/or ot her si ngle phase cu rrent consuming devices, all shall be connected to the same phase of the supply. Circuits fed from distinct

152

sources of supply or from different distribution boar ds or through switches or MCBs shall not be bunched in one conduit. In large areas and other situations where the load is divided between two or three phase, no two single phase switches connected to different phase shall be mounted within two meters of each other.

All splicing shall be done by means of terminal blocks or connectors and no twisting connection between conductors shall be allowed.

Metal clad sockets shall be of die-cast non-corroding zinc alloy or polycarbonate sheet enclosure and deeply recessed contact tubes. V isible scraping type earth terminal shall be pr ovided. Socket shall have push on protective cap. Socket shall have MCB/ELCB/RCCB as specified in the schedule of work.

Maximum number of PVC insulated 1100V grade copper conductor cable conforming to IS:694-1990.

_____________________________________________________________________

Nominal Clause 4.2.1 (ii)

25mm 32mm 38mm 51mm 64mm

Cross-

Sectional area of conductor in Sq.mm __________ __________ _________ _________

_____________________________________________________________________

S B S B S B S B S B

_____________________________________________________________________

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

_____________________________________________________________________

1.50 10 8 18 12 - - - - - -

2.50 8 6 12 10 - - - - - -

4 6 5 10 8 - - - - - -

6 5 4 8 7 - - - - - -

10 4 3 6 5 8 6 - - - -

16 2 2 3 3 6 5 10 7 12 8

25

35

50

70

- - 3 2 5 3 8 6 9 7

- - - - 3 2 6 5 8 6

- - - - - - 5 3 6 5

- - - - - - 4 3 5 4

________________________________________________________________________

Note:

153

1) The a bove t able sh ows the maximum ca pacity of co nduits for a si multaneous drawing o f cables.

2) The columns heads ‘S’ apply to runs of conduits which have distance not exceeding 4.25 m between draw in boxes and which do not deflect from the straight by an angle of more than 15 degrees. The columns heads ‘B’ apply to runs of conduit which deflect from the straight by an angle of more than 15 degrees.

3) Conduit sizes are the nominal external diameter.

General

All the materials used in the construction of luminaires shall be of such quality, design and construction t hat w ill p rovide adeq uate p rotection i n nor mal use , a gainst mechanical, electrical failures/faults and exposure to the risk of injury or electric shock and shall withstand the effect of exposure to atmosphere.

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Distribution boards including MCBs shall be of approved make. Distribution boards shall be constructed out of steel sheet all weld enclosure with double door IP42 protection and sh all be powder coated. Ample clearance between the conductors of opposite pole, between conductors and sheet steel body shall be maintained in order to obviate any chance of short circuit. R emovable co nduits entry pl ates shall be pr ovided at t op and bot tom t o facilitate drilling hol es at si te to suit i ndividual r equirements. The M CBs shall b e m ounted on hi gh grade rigid insulating support and connected by electrolytic copper bus bars. Each incoming

MCB/Isolator/MCCB sh all be pr ovided with so lder l ess cable so ckets for cr imping. P hase separation barriers made out of arc resistant materials shall be provided between the phases.

Bus bars shall be colour coded for phase identification.

Distribution boards shall be recessed in wall niche or if required mounted on the surface of the w all with nece ssary cl amp bol ts etc. T he mounting hei ght sh all n ot ex ceed 1500m m bottom from finished floor l evel. D istribution b oard sh all be pr ovided w ith pr oper circuit identification name plate and danger sticker/plate as per requirements.

All the distribution boards shall be m arked with ‘lighting’, ‘power’ or ‘essential’ with DB Nos., as the case may be. Each DB shall be provided with a circuit list giving details of each circuit.

All t he o utgoing ci rcuit wiring sh all be pr ovided w ith i dentification ferrules giving t he ci rcuit number & phase.

Each distribution board shall have a se parate neutral connection bar equal to the phase bus and a separate earth connection bar mounted within the DB each having the same number of terminals as the total number o f out going i ndividual ci rcuits from t he di stribution boar d.

Conduit & ca ble armoring sh all be bonded together & connected to the di stribution boar d earth bar.

Where oversized cables are specified due t o voltage drop problems, it shall be co ntractors responsibility to ensure that satisfactory terminal arrangements are provided without any extra cost. Separate adopter box of suitable size shall be provided to facilitate the wiring of the DB and no payment shall be made on this account.

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER

1. The MCB shall be suitable for manual closing and opening and automatic tripping under overload and short circuit conditions.

154

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Single / double / three / four pole versions shall be furnished as required.

The MCB shall be rated for 10 KA fault level.

The MCB shall be su itable for its housing in the lighting boards and shall be su itable for connection at the outgoing side by tinned cable lugs and for bus-bars connection on the incoming side.

The terminal of the MCBs and the open and close conditions shall be clearly and indelibly marked.

The MCB shall generally conform to IS:8828.

LOW VOLTAGE (L.V.) CABLES

A.

Wires

The design manufacture, testing and supply of single core FRLS PVC insulated 1.1 KV grade stranded twisted wires under this specifications shall comply with latest edition of applicable standards.

The wires shall be colour coded R Y B, for phases, Black for neutral and Green for earth.

B. Cables

The desi gn, m anufacture, t esting and su pply o f the ca ble under t his specifications shall comply with latest edition of following standards:

IS : 8130

IS : 5831

Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.

PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.

IS : 3975

IS : 3961

IS 694

IS : 424 -

1475

(F-3)

IS : 7098

(Part - I)

- 1988

Mild steel wires, strips and tapes for armouring cables.

Current rating of cables.

PVC i nsulated ( heavy duty) el ectric cables for w orking v oltage upto and including 1100 volts.

Power cable-flammability test.

IS : 1554

IS : 10810

IS : 6121

ASTM-D

2863

:

Specification for c ross linked pol yethylene i nsulated P VC sheathed ar moured/unarmoured ca ble for w orking v oltage upto

1.1 KV.

Specification for P VC i nsulated ( heavy dut y) e lectric cables for working voltages upto and including 1100 volts.

Testing method of cable.

Cable glands.

Standard m ethod for m easuring t he minimum ox ygen concentration t o su pport ca ndle-like co mbustion of pl astics

(Oxygen Index).

155

ASTM-D :

2843

IEEE : 383

ASTME :

662IEC : 754

(A)

IS : 10418

Standard test method for measuring the density of smoke from the burning or decomposition.

Standard for t ype of test C lass-IE, Electric cables, f ield splicers and connections for power generation station.

Standard t est method f or sp ecific optical densi ty of s moke generated by solid materials.

Cable drums.

C. Technical Requirements

a) The cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches conduits and underground buried installation with uncontrolled back fill and chances of flooding by water. b) They sh all be desi gned t o w ithstand al l mechanical, el ectrical and thermal st resses under steady state and transient operating condition. c) The al uminium/copper wires used for m anufacturing the ca bles shall be t rue circular/sector in shape before stranding and shall be of uniformly good quality, free from defects. The conductor used in manufacture of the cable shall be of as per BOQ.

D. Inspection

E.

All cables shall be inspected at manufacture place and on receipt of the same at site checked for any damage during transit.

Joint in Cables

F.

The co ntractor sh all t ake ca re t hat t he ca bles received at si te ar e di stributed t o v arious locations in such a manner as to ensure maximum utilisation and avoidance of cable jointing.

Cable shall be rechecked before cutting in lengths, where the joints are unavoidable, the location of such joints shall be got approved from the Consultant. The joints shall be done by qualified jointer strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction/drawings.

Joint Boxes For Cables

G.

The ca ble j oint box es shall be of appr opriate s ize su itable f or t ype o f cable of par ticular voltage rating.

Jointing of Cables

All ca ble j oints shall be m ade i n su itable, app roved ca ble j oints boxes, on t he jointing o f cables in t he j oint box and t he filling i n o f co mpound sh all be done in acco rdance w ith manufacturer’s instructions and i n an app roved m anner. A ll st raight through joints sh all b e

156

H.

I.

done in epoxy mould boxes with epoxy resins. Straight through joints shall not be per mitted unless the length of run is in excess of cable drum.

End terminations of cables more than 1.1 KV grade shall be done with epoxy mould boxed and epoxy resin. Cable glands shall be 1.1KV grade double compression type and made to tin pl ated heav y dut y br ass casting and machine f inished. G lands shall be o f r obust construction capable of clamping cable and cable armour, firmly without injury of cable.

All washers and hardwares shall be made of brass tinned. Rubber components used in the glands shall be made of neoprene of tested quality.

Cable lugs shall be tinned copper/aluminium solderless crimping type conforming to IS:8309 suitable for aluminium or copper conductor.

Crimping of terminals shall be done by using Corrosion inhabitory compound, with crimping tool.

Fire resistant paint has to be applied 1 Metre on either side of cable joint.

The contractor shall liaise fully with all other contractors to achieve an e fficient and properly coordinated installation where equipment has to be re-positioned due to lack of site liaison, no extra cost shall be incurred by the client.

Testing of Cables

Cables shall be t ested at factory as per requirement of I.E.C/IS. The tests shall incorporate routine tests, type tests and acceptance tests. Prior to despatch of cables. All the testes will be w itnessed by E mployer / C onsultant i n acco rdance w ith t esting p rocedure appr oved by

Consultant at no extra cost to Employer. Besides that the following tests shall be carried out: a) Insulation test between phases and phase to earth for each length of cable before and after jointing.

On completion of cable laying work, the following test shall be co nducted in the presence of

Architect/Owner. a) Insulation r esistance test ( Sectional and ov erall) 1000/ 5000V dependi ng upon t he voltage grade of cable. b) Continuity test.

Laying of Cable- AS PER CPWD SPECIFICATION

RCC Hume pipe shall be provided for all road crossing. The size of the pipe shall be according to the cable and a m inimum 100mm dia. pipe shall be provided. The pipe shall be laid i n g round w ith sp ecial ar rangement and s hall be ce ment j ointed and co ncreting w ith

1:5:10 sh all be m ade a s per relevant I S w ith l atest a mendment. Loca tion o f ca bles laid directly under ground sh all be i ndicated by ca ble m arker at an i nterval of 30 m eters & with change of direction. Aluminium strip cable tag of 20mm wide with engraved tag no. shall be provided at both ends of cable.

Where the cables are to be laid in ducts/trenches inside the building, they will have to be laid on MS rack/ on MS cable trays grouted in walls trenches. Cables passing through floors shall be protected from mechanical damage by a steel channel to a height of one meter above the floor where cable pass through wall they shall be sleeved with PVC/steel conduit.

Where t he cables are laid in open (in building) along w alls, ceiling or above f alse-ceiling, cable rack (ladder type) or cable tray shall be provided. The size of the cable tray or rack shall depend on the nu mber of ca bles to pa ss over that r ack. C able t ray/rack shall be pr operly

157

supported through wall/ceiling according to the site conditions. Cable laid on tray & riser shall be neat ly dr essed & clamped at an i nterval o f 1000 m m & 750m m for hor izontal & v ertical cable run respectively either side at each bend of cable. All power cables shall be cl amped individually & control cables shall be clamped in groups of three or four cables. Clamps for multi-core cables shall be fabricated of 25x3 GI flats. Single core power cable shall be laid in trefoil f ormation & cl amped with t refoil cl amps made o f P VC/fibre glass.Cable openi ngs in wall/floor shall be se aled by the contractor suitably by hessian tape & bitumen compound or by any other proven to prevent ingress of water.

After the ca bles are l aid, sh all be t ested as per I S and t he r esults submitted t o

Consultant/Engineer and in case the results found unsatisfactory, all the repairing/ replacing of cables will be done by the contractor free of charge.

J. Fire Seal System

a) All t he floor/wall openi ng p rovided for ca ble cr ossing shall be s ealed by f ire se al system. b) The fire pr oof se aling system sh all fully co mply with t he r equirements o f r elevant codes. The fire proof seal system shall have minimum one hour fire resistance rating. c) The fire proof seal system shall be physically, chemically, thermally stable and shall be m echanically se cured t o t he m asonry co ncrete m embers. The sy stem sh all be completely gas and smoke tight, anti-rodent and anti-termite. d) The material use d i n fire pr oof se al sy stem sh all be non -toxic and har mless to the working personnel. e) Type of fire proof seal system shall be foaming type or flam mastic type compound or approved equivalent.

After laying and jointing work is completed, high voltage test should be applied to all cables to ensure that they have not been damaged during or after the laying operation and that there is not fault in the jointing.

Cable f or u se on l ow and m edium v oltage sy stem (1.1 K V grade ca bles) sh ould w ithstand for 15 minutes a pressure of 1000 V DC applied between conductors and also between each conductor and sheaths. I n the abse nce o f pr essure testing facilities it i s sufficient to test for one m inute w ith a

3000V insulation tester In case the test results are unsatisfactory the cost of repairs and replacements and extra work of removal & laying will be made good by the contractor.

CABLE TRAYS

Cable trays shall be ladder type fabricated out of mild steel/slotted angles and flats of required width as per design. Bends shall be prefabricated. The cable tray shall be primed and painted with powder coating as approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Suitable provision shall be m ade where a tray crosses expansion joints. The width of the tray shall allow for a suitable separation between cables the design shall allow for adequate bending radiuses for the sizes of cables. No sharp bend to be allowed in cable tray. Joints between sections shall be bolted.

The perforated cable trays are fabricated out of 2mm thick CRCA sheet steel having minimum 75mm depth with epoxy coated of approved shade. Perforations are maximum 10mm spaced at maximum

20mm distance. The cables shall be tied with the cable tray with Nylon Strip/Aluminium Clamps/MS

Clamps as per requirement.

The tray sh all be su spended from the su rface of t he co ncrete slab by m eans of app roved st eel hangers spaced at a distance of not more than 100cms. Suitable bushes shall be provided where cables pass through apertures in the tray. Cables must be securely fixed to the tray with clamps. In

158

routing nece ssary bar rier and sp acing sh all be maintained for ca bles of di fferent v oltages in ca se they lie side by side. Telephone cables shall cross the power cables only at about right angle and these t wo sh all not r un i n cl ose pr oximity. Ful l det ails of the tray sh all be appr oved by t he

Consultant/Site E ngineer be fore fabrication. E arth co ntinuity sh all be maintained bet ween each section o f ca ble t ray and each t otal r un o f tray sh all be e ffectively bo nded t o the nea rest earth continuity conductor. All nuts and bolts used shall be of galvanised steel.

Shop drawing of cable trays shall be submitted to the Consultant/ Site Engineer before fabrication for approval a sample of the same be got approved. All nuts and bolts used shall be of galvanised steel.

Cable shall be neatly arranged on trays in such manner that criss crossing is avoided and f inal take off to switchgear is easily facilitated.

Note: The cable tray shall be worked out/selected with 25-30% spare space for future cable.

EARTHING

All non current carrying metal parts of electrical installation shall be earthed as per IEC with latest amendments. All metal conduits, cable armour, DBs, light fixture, switchgear, feeder pillars etc. and all other parts made of metal shall be bonded together and connected by means of specified earthing conductor to earth electrodes. Earthing shall be in conformity with provision of Indian Electricity

Rules, 1956 / I S 3041. S teelwork su pporting electrical eq uipment sh all be ef fectively bonded.

Conduit or trunking shall not be used as the role circuit protective conductor. Where flexible conduit is installed t he m etal sc reen sh all be co nnected to ear th. I n addi tion, a separate ci rcuit pr otective conductor shall be installed from the junction box to the item of plant. The armouring of multi-core cables shall be bonded to the metal parts of the equipment to which it is connected.

All earthing conductors shall be high conductivity GI & copper shall be protected against mechanical damage. The cr oss sectional ar ea o f ear th co nductors sh all not be sm aller t han half that of t he largest current carrying conductor. However, the Contractor shall use the size specified in the bill of quantities. a) All fixtures, sockets outlets, fans, switch boxes and junction boxes etc. shall be earthed with PVC insulated copper wire as specified in item of work. The earth wires ends shall be co nnected with solder less bottle type copper lugs. b) All single phase DBs upto shall be earthed with one no. GI / copper wire / strip as per item of work. c) All switch boards of rating shall be earthed with 2 Nos. separate and GI/Copper tape or as per item of work/drawing. d) All t he earthed wires in switch boxes, DBs and light fixture sh all be pr ovided with g reen co lour

PVC sleeve.

The earthing electrode shall consist of (60cm x 60cm x 3.15mm) thick tinned copper plate or GI plate electrode (60cm x 60cm x 6.3mm) or GI pipe 40mm dia 2.5 metre length ‘B’ class as described under schedule of quantities. Galvanising of the pipe/plate shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. The plate electrode shall be buried in ground with its faces vertical and top not less than 30 cm below GL.

The plate shall be filled with charcoal and common salt filling extending 15cm around it on all sides.

There shall be a 20mm dia ‘B’ cl ass GI pipe running from t op of plate upto t he gr ound level f or watering pipe. The top of the pipe shall be provided with a funnel and a GI mesh screen for watering the earth. This will be housed in a masonry sump with cement plastering or a cement concrete sump not less than 30cm square and 30cm deep. Heavy duty M.S. frame heavy duty with hinged cover and locking arrangement shall be suitably provided over the sump. The earthing lead from electrode

159

onwards shall be su itably protected from mechanical injury by a 15m m dia, GI pipe in case of wire and by suitable dia ‘B’ class GI pipe in case of strip. This protection pipe within ground shall be buried at least 30cm deep (to be increased to 60cm in case of road crossing and pavements). The portion within the building shall be recessed in walls and floors to adequate depth. In the case of plate earth electrode the earthing lead shall be securely bolted to the plate with two bolts, nuts, check nuts and washers. I n case of pipe earth electrode, it shall be co nnected by means of strap welded around pipe including bolt, nuts and washers and cable socket. A ll materials used for connecting the earth lead with electrode shall be GI in case of GI pipe and GI plate electrodes and of tinned brass in case of copper plate electrode.

No earth pit shall be fixed within 2 metre of a wall of foundation. Effort shall be made to locate them in grass lawns or near flower beds or water taps. The distance between two earthing stations shall be not less than 2.5 meters.

Where instrumentation and computer systems are installed a se parate clean insulated earth system shall be p rovided within control equipment a separate insulated earth bar shall be provided to allow for cable screens to be bonded. A separate earth electrode for each system with a minimum resistance to ear th o f 1 ohm sh all be use d. T he co ntractor shall ensu re t hat t hroughout the installation the cable screen do not come into contact with protective earth.

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

Protection of bui ldings against l ightning sh all g enerally be done in acco rdance w ith I S: 2309 with amendments upto da te. T he i nstallation sh all b e done as per routes a nd l ocation o f e quipment indicated on t he d rawing and bi ll of quantities. The co nductors and the ear th el ectrode co nductor shall be fixed so that they are free to expand and contract. Special care shall be taken in the fixing of support to allow free movement.

The materials of lightning conductors, down conductors, earth termination etc. shall be reliably resistant t o co rrosion or be adeq uately pr otected ag ainst co rrosion. A ll ai r t erminations shall be copper/GI as per the BOQ and the conductors shall be GI.

The en tire l ightning p rotection sy stem sh ould b e m echanically st rong t o w ithstand t he mechanical forces produced in aces of a lightning strike. The system shall be installed such that it does not spoil the architectural or aesthetic beauty of the buildings but on other hand at should meet IS code/ safety code.

Horizontal air terminations should be so interconnected that no part of the roof is more than 9 metre away from the nearest horizontal conductor. For a flat roof horizontal, air termination along the outer perimeter of the roof is used. For a roof of larger area a network of parallel horizontal conductors shall be i nstalled. Horizontal ai r t erminations shall be co ursed al ong co ntours such as ridges, parapets and edges of flat roofs and where necessary area flat surfaces in such a way as to connect each air termination to the rest and shall themselves form a closed network.

All metallic finials, chimneys, ducts, vent pipes, railings, gutters, metallic flag staff, on or above the main surface of the roof of the structure shall be bonded to and form part of the air termination network. All air terminations shall be effectively recessed against overturning either by attachment to the object to be protected or by means to substantial braces and fixing which shall be per manently and rigidly attached to the buildings.

Down conductors shall be distributed around the outside walls of the structure. They shall preferably be run along the corners and other projection, due considerations being given to the locations of air terminations and earth terminations. Lift shafts shall not be used for fixing down conductors. Metal pipes leading rain water from the roof to the ground may be co nnected to the down conductors but

160

cannot replace them. Such conductors shall have disconnecting joints. All vertical conductors shall be plumbed before fixing.

The lighting protective system shall have as few joints in it as possible. Wherever joints in the down conductor abov e g round l evel ar e nece ssary t hey sh all be m echanically and el ectrically ef fective.

The joint overlap shall not be l ess than the width of the tape. In the down conductor below ground level there shall be no joint. The joints may be clamped, screwed, bolted, riveted, sweated, braced or welded. The bonding of the external metal forming part of a structural or drain water pipe shall have a cross sectional area not less than that employed for the main conductors. Gas pipe, however, in no case shall be bonded to the earth termination system.

Conductors shall be se curely at tached t o t he building t o be pr otected by f asteners which sh all be substantial in construction, not subject to breakage and shall be of steel. The conductors shall be secured at not more than 1200mm apart for horizontal run and 1000mm for vertical run.

Where tape are required to pass through roof asphalting or waterproofing membranes, a special seal shall be use d comprising a 38mm diameter plastic, copper or aluminium tube with 100mm diameter flange 50mm from the top of the tube. The tube length shall suit the thickness of the roof through which the conductor passes, allowing for the tube to protrude 50mm above the membrane. The seal is to be asphalted in position and the conductor shall be se aled in the tube by a setting waterproof compartment.

Each down conductor shall have an i ndependent earth termination. The interconnection of all the earth termination shall be preferable. It should be capable of isolation for testing purpose by “testing joints” at position approachable easily for the megger testing. The whole of the system could have a combined resistance to earth not exceeding 2 ohm before any bonding has been affected to metal in or on structure or to surface below ground.

LV PANELS

The LV Panels shall co nform t o t he eq uipment of t he latest r evision including am endments of the relevant codes and standards.

The drawings and specifications & BOQ complement each other and which is shown or called for one shall be interpreted as being called for on both. Material, if any, which may not have been specified but fairly required to make a complete assembly of switch gear as shown on the drawing, specifications shall be c onstrued as being r equired and no ex tra ch arges shall be pay able on t his account.

CODES & STANDARDS

The design, manufacture and performance of equipment shall comply with all the currently applicable statutes, sa fety co des, r elevant B ureau o f Indian S tandards ( BIS), B ritish S tandards ( BS),

International Electro Technical Commission (IEC) Publication standard as amended upto date.

The bo ard shall be m etal encl osed si ngle front, i ndoor, floor m ounted free s tanding t ype or w all mounting type as mentioned in BOQ. Keeping in view the operating ease, maximum height of the top switch shall be 1750mm from finish floor. 200mm clear space shall be left throughout the panel at bottom. The cold rolled sheet steel will be of 2mm thick. The structure shall be mounted on a rigid base frame of folded sheet steel of minimum 3mm thickness and 50mm height.

All cutouts and covers shall be provided with synthetic rubber gaskets (neoprene)

The panel shall be divided into distinct vertical sections each comprising of:

161

i) Complete enclosed bus bar compartment for running horizontal and vertical bus bars. ii) Complete enclosed switchgear compartment one for each circuit for housing air circuit breaker,

MCCB etc. iii) Compartment for power and control cables of at least 300mm width covering entire height provided.

iv) The panel shall have sufficient extra space for at least 20% of outgoing feeders with wiring provision for future use.

The front of each compartment shall be provided with hinged single leaf door with locking facilities.

Panel shall be pr ovided with suitable lifting facilities. MCCBs/ACBs, Isolators and accessories shall be of fixed/draw out type as per BOQ.

Each feeder shall have compartmentalized or non-compartmentalized for MPCB feeders only. Ri-tall type with separate construction cable entry shall be from top/bottom (3mm thick gland plate shall be provided) as required.

The panel shall be pr ovided with t hree phase buse s and neutral bus bar s of hi gh co nductivity electrolytic aluminium as per I S: 5082 se ctions t hroughout t he l ength of t he panel and sh all be adequately supported and braced to withstand the stressed due to the short circuit current of 20 to

80 KA rms. for 1 sec or as called for in BOQ. Maximum temperature rise of bus bars and bus bar connection while carrying rated current shall not exceed 35 deg.C over an ambient temperature of 50 deg.C

The minimum clearance in air between phases and between phases and earth for the entire run of the bus bar connections shall be as per IS. Bus bars support insulators shall be made of nonhygroscopic, non-combustible track resistant and high strength SMC or polyester fibre glass moulded material.

All bus bars shall be colour coded as per IS: 375.

GI ear th bus of su itable si ze sh all be pr ovided at t he bot tom o f t he pa nel t hroughout t he l ength.

Similarly suitable size o f GI strip in each vertical se ction for earthing the individual equipment/accessories shall be provided and connected to main horizontal bus.

Sheet steel hinged lockable doors shall be interlocked with MCCB to prevent opening of the panel where MCCB i s on posi tion. S afety i nterlock with oper ating handl e sh all be pr ovided. A ll MCCB shall be with vertical operation.

Contactors shall be el ectro magnetic type with interrupting duty as per IS:2959. T he main contacts shall be of silver or silver alloy, provided with minimum 2 NO and 2 NC auxiliary contacts. The push button should be of shrouded type and each should be provided with 1 NO and 1 NC contact. Colour coding shall be as per IS: 6875 (Part-II).

ACB (AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER)

General

The circuit breaker shall be of air break type in order to eliminate fire and explosion risk and shall comply with the IEC 60947/IS: 13947-1993 Part-2 with a rupturing capacity of not less than 35 MVA at 415 volts or as specified elsewhere. The rated insulation voltage shall be equal to or greater than

1000 V.

162

Type & Construction

The breaker shall be provided with variable microprocessor based releases for over load, short circuit and earth fault protection (and shall be compatible with PC) and shall be in conformance with this specification. ACBs shall be EMI/EMC compatible.

The br eaker sh all co nsist o f a hor izontal dr aw out encl osed pat tern t riple pol e, f ully i nterlocked, independent manual/motorized spring operated mechanism. The mechanism should be such that the circuit breaker is at all times free to open immediately when the trip coil is energized. The ACBs shall be strong and r obust in construction with suitable arrangement for anchoring when in fully engaged or fully dr awn out posi tions. The ca rriage or cradle on w hich t he br eaker i s mounted sh all be of robust design made of fabricated steel, supported on rollers. The withdrawal arrangement shall be such as to al low sm ooth and easy m ovement. Current ca rrying pa rts s hould be si lver pl ated a nd suitable ar cing co ntacts sh all be pr ovided t o pr otect the main co ntact with e fficient A rc-chutes f or each pole that shall be able to be lifted out for the inspection of main and arcing contact. The arc chutes shall be su itable for ready replacement. The contacts shall be o f spring-loaded design. T he sequence of operation of the contacts shall be such that arcing contacts `make' before and ` break' after the main contacts.

There should be total segregation between the power circuit and co ntrol circuit, thus making double insulation and ensuring fitting of accessories while the circuit breaker is in the ON position. It shall be possible to inspect the arcing chamber and m ain contacts. The ACB shall have metal load bearing structures. The main contacts shall be separate from the arc-breaking contacts. It shall be possible to check t he wear of t he main co ntacts with t he ACB i n its racked-out posi tion, r emoving t he ar cing chambers. No mechanical junctions in the main contact shall be there so that losses are minimal.

The design of the breaker shall be such that all the components are easily accessible to inspection, maintenance and r eplacement. T he A CB at i ts rated cu rrent sh all be su itable f or ope ration in extremely t ropical humid climate at 50° C ambient temp. The manufacturer sh all declare ideal derating charts.

Self aligning cluster type isolating contacts with automatic shutters shall be provided on breaker to screen the live parts. Suitable number of NO & NC auxiliary contacts as stated in BOQ rated for 10

Amps at 415 V AC and 6 Amp at 48V DC, in addition to ones already in use for the operation of the breaker shall be provided for interlocking, protection, metering and for any other purposes. The breaker should have 3 distinct positions - SERVICE/TEST/ISOLATED within the cubicle.

Breaker shall be pr ovided with automatic safety shutters to screen the main live contact when the breaker is withdrawn. The frame of the circuit breaker could be positively earthed when the breaker is racked into the cubicle.

The following safety arrangements shall be pr ovided for the safety of the personnel to prevent maloperation. i) Interlock to prevent the truck from being withdrawn or replaced except in the fully isolated position. ii) iv) iii)

Interlock to prevent earth connection from being made by the earthing device except breaker is open.

Interlock to prevent the breaker being closed unless it is fully raised.

Interlock to prevent the breaker from being made alive without its rack in position.

163

v) If under voltage release is provided then circuit breaker will close only if it is energized.

Testing of each circuit breaker shall be carried out at the works as per IEC: 60947 and the original test certificate shall be furnished in triplicate. The tests shall incorporate at least the following: a) Impulse withstand test b) Insulation test c) Di-electric rigidity /Insulation test d) Mechanical operation checking e) Thermal protection with a current of 3ith starting from cold conditions.

MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB)

The MCCB should be current limiting type with trip time of less than 10 millisecond under short circuit conditions. The MCCB should be ei ther 3 or 4 p oles as specified in BOQ. MCCB shall comply with the r equirements of t he r elevant st andards IS13947 – Part 2/ IEC 60947 -2 and sh ould hav e t est certificates for Breaking capacities from independent test authorities CPRI / ERDA or any accredited international lab.

MCCB shall comprise of Quick Make-Break switching mechanism, arc extinguishing device and t he tripping unit shall be contained in a compact, high strength, heat resistant, flame retardant, insulating moulded case with high withstand capability against thermal and mechanical stresses

The breaking capacity of MCCB shall be as specified in the schedule of quantities. The rated service breaking capacity (Ics) should be equal to rated ultimate breaking capacities (Icu).

MCCBs for motor application should be selected in line with Type-2 Co-ordination as per IEC-60947-4, 1989/IS 13947-

4. The breaker as supplied with ROM should meet IP44 degree of protection.

Current Limiting & Coordination

The MCCB shall employ maintenance free minimum let-through energies and capable of achieving di scrimination up t o t he full sh ort ci rcuit ca pacity of t he dow nstream M CCB. T he manufacturer shall provide both the discrimination tables and let-through energy curves for all.

Protection Functions

Incomer MCCBs shall be equipped with microprocessor based trip units for Closer protection and better accuracy.

Microprocessor trip units shall be adjustable and it shall be possible to fit lead seals to prevent un-authorized access to the settings

In all MCCBs, the protection shall be adjustable Overload and Short circuit protection

Microprocessor trip unit should have thermal memory. In the event of repeated overloads, the trip unit shall optimize protection of cables and downstream devices by memorizing temperature variations.

Microprocessor trip units shall comply with appendix F of IEC 60947-2 standard (measurement of rms current values, electromagnetic compatibility, etc.)

Protection settings shall apply to all poles of circuit breaker.

All Microprocessor components shall withstand temperatures up to 125 °C

164

Four-pole devices shall be equipped for neutral protection as standard with a 3-position setting : - neutral not protected - neutral tripping threshold equal to half the phase value - neutral threshold equal to the phase value

Testing

a) b)

Original t est ce rtificate of t he M CCB as per I EC 60947 -1 & 2 or I S13947 sh all be furnished.

Pre-commissioning tests on t he switch board panel incorporating the MCCB shall be done as per standard specifications.

Interlocking

Moulded, ca se ci rcuit br eakers shall be pr ovided with t he f ollowing i nterlocking dev ices for interlocking the door of a switch board. a) Handle interlock to prevent unnecessary manipulations of the breaker wherever required. b) Door interlock to prevent the door being opened when the breaker is in ON position. c) Defeat-interlocking device to open the door even if the breaker is in ON position.

CAPACITORS & CAPACITOR CONTROL PANEL

CAPACITORS

Power factor correction capacitors shall conform in all respects to IS 2834-1964, IS-13340 and latest

IEC specification. The capacitors shall be su itable for 3 phase 440 V at 50Hz. Frequency and sh all be available in units of 25/50 KVAR size (heavy duty) with self healing property as per BOQ to form a bank of capacitors of desired capacity. All these units shall be connected in parallel by means of high conductivity electrolytic copper bus bars of adequate current carrying capacity having SC rating of 50

KA for 1 sec. Each capacitor bank shall be for PVC insulated aluminium conductor armoured cables.

Two separate earthing terminals shall be provided for each bank for earth connection.

The capacitor bank shall be subject to routine tests as specified in relevant Indian Standard and the test certificate shall be furnished. The capacitor shall be suitable for indoor use up to 45 Deg.C over and above ambient temperature of 50 Deg.C. The permissible overloads shall be as given below: a) Voltage overload shall be 10% for continuous operation and 15% for 6 hours in a 24 hours cycle. b) Current overload of 15% for continuous operation and 50% for 6 hours in a 24 hours cycle.

The capacitor banks shall be f loor mounting type indoor housing using minimum floor sp ace with protective guard or fencing.

Capacitors shall be of metallized polypropylene film (capacitor grade), hermetically sealed in sturdy corrosion-proof sh eet st eel 2m m t hick co ntainers and i mpregnated with non -inflammable sy nthetic liquid and of low power loss version. Every element of each capacitor unit shall be provided with its own built in silvered fuse. The capacitor shall have suitable discharge device to reduce the residual voltage from crest v alue o f t he r ated v oltage to 50 V or l ess within one m inute a fter ca pacitor i s disconnected f rom t he so urce of supply. T he loss factor of capacitor shall not ex ceed 0. 005 for

165

capacitors with synthetic impregnates. The capacitors shall withstand voltage of 2500V AC supply for

1 minute.

The insulation resistance between capacitor terminals and containers when test voltage of 500V AC is applied shall not be less than 50 mega ohms.

Capacitor bank and switching equipment shall be housed in a cubicle having degree of protection IP-

54 and constructed with sheet steel of minimum 2mm thickness.

Capacitors shall be unit type having non-PCB, non-flammable non-toxic dielectric.

Necessary discharge resisters shall be provided externally to reduce the terminal voltage to less than

50V in 60 seconds after disconnection from supply. i)

Testing shall be done as per applicable standards for shunt capacitors.

CAPACITOR CONTROL PANEL

The capacitor control panel shall generally comprise of the following: a) Automatic power factor correction relay.(APFCR) b) Step controller with reversing motor. c) Time delay and no-volt relays. d) Protection ACB with static O/C and S/C releases. e) Contactor for individual capacitors of suitable rating. f) Change over switch for either automatic or manual operation with push button control. g) CTs with ammeter and selector switch. h) Voltmeter with selector switch. j) Indicating lights RYB.

All the capacitors and contactors shall be interconnected with PVC insulated copper conductor wires of ade quate si ze i n a n eat and a cceptable manner. Three pha ses and neut ral bu s bar sh all be provided in panel as required.

NAME PLATES & LABELS

Panel and all modules shall be provided with prominent engraved identification plates. The module identification designation. For single front switchboards, similar panel and board identification labels shall be provided at the rear also. ii) All name plates shall be of non-rusting metal or 3 pl y lamicold, with white engraved lettering on black background. Inscription and lettering sizes shall be subject to Owner’s approval. iii) Suitable st encilled pai nt m arks shall be p rovided i nside t he panel /module i dentification o f al l equipment in addition to the plastic sticker labels. These labels shall be par titioned so as to be clearly visible and shall have the device number, as mentioned in the module wiring design.

166

PAINTING

All steel work shall be pretreated in tanks and finally powder coated of approved shade.

WIRING

Control and protective wiring shall be done with copper conductor PVC insulated 1100 volts grade multi-stranded flexible w ire of 2.5sq.mm c ross se ction. The co lour coding sh all be as per l atest edition of IS: 375.

Each w ire sh all be i dentified by pl astic ferrule. All w ire t ermination shall be made w ith type connection. Wire shall not be taped or spliced between terminal points.

Terminal bl ocks shall pr eferably by grouped ac cording to ci rcuit function and each t erminal bl ock group shall have at least 20% spare capacity.

Not more than one wire shall be co nnected to any terminal. All door frame of L.T. switchboard shall be earthed with bare braided copper wire.

TESTING & INSPECTION

After co mpletion o f al l w ork at t he manufacturer’s works the sw itchboards shall be i nspected and tested in presence of Purchaser’s representative. However, stage inspection may be carried out from time to time to check progress of work and workmanship. The following tests shall be carried out: i) All r outine t ests specified i n r elevant I ndian/IEC S tandards shall be ca rried out on al l ci rcuit breakers. ii) iii) iv)

Test for protective relay operation by primary and secondary injection method.

Operation of all meters.

Secondary wiring continuity test v) Insulation test with 1000 Volts Megger, before and after voltage test. vi) HV test on se condary wiring and co mponents on which such test is permissible (2.5 KV for one minute) vii) Simulating ex ternal ci rcuits for r emote ope ration of br eaker, r emote i ndicating l ights and ot her remote operations, if any.

viii) Measurement of power required for closing/trip coil of the breaker.

ix) Pick up and drop out voltages for shunt trip and closing coils.

Vendor shall provide all facilities such as power supply, testing instruments and apparatus required for carrying out the tests. Required copies of test certificates for all the tests carried out along with copies of type test certificates and certificates from Sub-Vendor for the components procured from them are to be submitted before dispatch of switch boards.

DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION

167

The V endor sh all f urnish following dr awings/documents in acco rdance w ith encl osed requirements: i) General Arrangement drawing of the Switchboard, showing front view, plan, foundation plan, floor cut outs / trenches for external cables and elevations, transport sections and weights. ii) Sectional dr awings of the ci rcuit b reaker pan els, sh owing g eneral c onstructional features, mounting details of various devices, bus bars, current transformers, cable boxes, terminal boxes for control cables etc. iii) Schematic and control w iring di agram for ci rcuit br eaker and pr otection i ncluding i ndicating devices, metering instruments, alarms, space heaters etc. iv) Terminal plans showing terminal numbers, ferrules markings, device terminal numbers, function etc. ii)

v) Relay wiring diagrams.

vi) Equipment List.

Vendor shall furnish required number of copies of above drawings for Purchaser’s review, fabrication of switch boards shall start only after Purchaser’s clearance for the same. After final review, required number of copies and reproducible shall be furnished as final certified drawings.

The information furnished shall include the following: i) Technical literature giving complete information of the equipment.

Erection, Operation and Maintenance Manual complete with all relevant information, d rawings and literature for auxiliary equipment and accessories, characteristics curves for relays etc.

iii) A comprehensive spare parts catalogue.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Quality Assurance shall follow the requirements of Owner/ Consultant as applicable.

Quality A ssurance i nvolvement w ill co mmence at enq uiry and f ollow t hrough t o co mpletion and acceptance thus ensuring total conformity to Purchaser’s requirements.

H.T. SWITCHGEAR PANEL (VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER)

1. HT Panel:

1.1. HT panel shall be i ndoor metal clad cubicle pattern, floor mounting, free standing type, totally enclosed dust and v ermin proof design with suitable screens being provided f or all ventilating openings to prevent insects, rodents etc. from entering the panel.

1.2. The panel shall be suitable for use on an 11 K V, 3 phase, 50 Hz system. The panel shall house

Vacuum circuit breaker with short circuit capacity not less than 350 MVA and should be suitable to withstand impulse voltage of 75 KV peak.

1.3. The panel shall be factory built assembly of modular construction fabricated out of 14 SWG thick

CRCA sheet steel, of single tier design and shall be provided with extension facility. Panel shall

168

generally co nform t o t he r equirements of r elevant IS st andards and l atest IEC. The HT panel board shall be designed such that the switchgear, instrument relays, bus bars, small wiring etc. are arranged and mounted with due consideration for the following: a) Facility for inspection, maintenance and repairs, testing terminals and terminal boards for case of external connection. b) Minimum noise and vibrations. c) Risk of accidental short circuits and open circuits. d) Secured and vibration proof connections for power and control circuits. e) Risk of accidental contact and danger personnel due to live connections.

169

2. Construction:

2.1. The HT panel conforming to IS 13118:1991 shall be of robust design with adequate bracings for structural rigidity. Separate compartments shall preferably be provided for circuit breakers, bus bars and cable boxes which will be fully and effectively segregated from one another so that fault in any one compartment should not cause damage to equipment in any other compartment.

2.2. The equipment shall be installed indoor in a hot, humid climate. All equipment, accessories and wiring sh all be pr ovided w ith t ropical finish t o p revent fungus growth. S pace heaters shall be provided so that humidity does not affect the components.

2.3. The maximum temperature rise in any part of the equipment at specified rating shall not exceed the permissible limits as stipulated in relevant standards.

2.4. The housing shall consist of two sections. Bottom section shall be to house safety shutters, earth bars, circuit breaker etc and the top section shall contain instrument chamber, bus bar chamber and cu rrent t ransformer ch amber. Top portion of housi ng sh all co ntain fixed i nstruments/relay panel and v oltage t ransformers. The panel sh all be v ertical i solation hor izontal dr aw out t ype with single bus bar extensible on either side. Bus bars shall be air insulated.

2.5. The housing shall be of welded construction to ensure compact and rigid structure presenting a neat and pleasing appearance and to ensure a very rigid structure without unnecessary weight.

The stationary housing shall be so designed as to ensure accurate location of withdrawal truck on which CB is mounted.

2.6. The panel shall be machined pressed with punched opening for meters and instruments etc. The sheet s teel and t he st eel se ctions shall be fore fabrications, be given a r igorous rust pr oofing treatment using seven/ nine tank process comprising of alkaline decreasing, de-scaling in dilute sulphuric acid solution and a recognized phosphate process. The steel work shall then be given two coats of red oxide prier before final finishing with epoxy based powder coating is given.

2.7. All the live parts of the panel shall be insulated and enclosed in an ear thed metal enclosure or shrouded to prevent accidental contact when the withdraw able truck is removed. Suitable screens shall be provide for all ventilating openings to prevent insects, rodents etc. from entering the panel.

2.8. All meters, instruments, relays, control push buttons/ switches/ handles etc. shall be mounted on the front side on top of circuit breaker compartment of the panel and shall be visible with doors in closed position easily accessible from the ground, the doors shall be hinged with bent edges and square r ubber gaskets. T he i nstrument / r elay t erminals on t he front panel sh all be sh rouded using clear acrylic sheets. All cable entries shall be from the bottom of the panel on the rear side.

Adequate space and clamping arrangement shall be provided for cable terminations.

2.9. The panel shall be of horizontal draw out design with built in positive s afety interlocks as per latest IEC. Circuit breaker compartment shall be withdrawable cassette type trolley. The CBS of some rating can be interchangeable. The bus bar compartment shall be at the rear top.

2.10. The standard phase arrangement when facing the switchgear shall be R -Y-B from left to right, from t op t o bot tom, and f ront t o bac k. A ll r elays, i nstruments, ot her devi ces, buse s and equipment involving three phase circuit shall be arranged and connected in accordance with the standard phase arrangement.

2.11. The switchgear buse s shall be r ated for co ntinuous current o f magnitude as specified.

Maximum temperature rise of bus and connection shall be limited to as per IS specification.

2.12. The b us bars of the sw itchgear se ction sh all be o f ha rd d rawn el ectrolytic copper l iberally sized with high safety factor for required current rating and sh all be of the same cross-section.

The busb ar co nnection and t heir i nsulated su pports shall be m echanically strong, and sh all withstand all the stresses which shall be imposed upon t hem in ordinary working due t o fixing, vibration, fluctuation in temperature, short-circuit or other causes.

2.13. The bus bars shall have the marking, colour coding and arrangement according to the relevant IS and sh all run in a se parate bus bar chamber. The bus bars and joints shall be fully insulated and so enclosed as not to leave any exposed live parts. Provision shall be made for expansion and contraction of the bus bars and connections with variation of temperature.

2.14. Rating plate, name plate and danger board shall be provided. All unused entitles between the circuit breaker compartment shall be sealed before dispatch of panel.

170

2.15. The si milar desi gn o f panel sh ould ha ve t ested for i nternal i s fault i n t he v arious compartments.

3. Circuit Breaker:

3.1. The circuit b reakers shall be v ertically and hor izontally dr aw-out t ype VCB m ounted o n t he moving carriage. The circuit breaker shall be of modular design. The rating of the circuit breaker shall be as specified.

i) Normal Service Conditions: Ambient temperature : 45° C- 2° C

ii) Humidity: Not exceeding 60% at maximum temperature

iii) System:

a) System Voltage: 11KV, effectively earthed system b) Highest system voltage: 5 KV c) Frequency: 50 HZ + 3% d) Continuous current rating: 630 Amps e) Impulse withstand voltage (KVP): 75 f) Fault interrupting capacity (KA): 26.3 g) Fault withstand time: 1 Sec h) Operating duty cycle: 0.03 sec – CO-3 min –CO

iv) Main circuit terminal

Circuit breaker should be provided with 3 main terminals and 3 load side terminals.

3.2. Closing mechanism & Anti-pumping device:

a) Motor operated closing mechanism and mechanical and electrical anti-pumping device shall be provided. Motor operating mechanism shall be complete with universal motor, opening b) Spring, closing spring, and all necessary accessories. The motor shall be suitable for 240V AC supply c) Spring ch arged/discharged i ndicator sh all be p rovided. C losing w ill and shunt t rip ( coils) suitable f or 24V D C, 2 w ire D C su pply. T hese shall oper ate sa tisfactorily bet ween 85% t o

110% of rated voltage. d) The symmetrical breaking capacity in MVA shall remain constant for 11 KV breakers. e) Breakers shall be capable of making, carrying and breaking starting and full load currents. f) Breakers shall be suitable for local electrical operation. Mechanical interlocks shall be provided to prevent a closed circuit breaker from being moved from service position to test position/isolated position. g) Closing and opening of the circuit breaker in an intermediate position between "Service Test". h) Circuit breaker can be racked in to service position only with the front door closed. i) Breakers shall be complete with the following accessories. j) Mechanical operating device for manual closing and tripping of the breaker.At least three (3)

NO and three (3) NC mechanically operated auxiliary contacts of sufficient rating (in addition to those r equired for br eaker oper ation) sh all be wired out t o t erminal block f or ex ternal connection. k) In the case of 11 K V breakers in addition to the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts provided on breaker trolley for circuit breaker operation, a mechanically operated switch shall be provided on a st ationary par t o f switchgear. This switch sh all be posi tively ope rated by t he b reaker mechanism when the breaker is in "service" position but not when the breaker is isolated. The switch shall be provided with at least six (6) normally open and at least six (6) normally closed adequately rated auxiliary contacts for each circuit breaker for inter locking.

171

l) In case a switch with six (6) NC contacts cannot be offered as required then a switch with six

(6) normally closed and t wo ( 2) nor mally open contacts offered along with an aux iliary r elay having four (4) normally open and two (2) normally closed contacts (out of which any four contacts shall be wired out), shall be provided on each feeder cubicle. m) Each circuit breaker, disconnector and bus VT cubicle shall have necessary limit switches for service and test positions, which shall provide the required contacts for breaker operation and interlocking, position indication and disconnection of remote control circuits. n) Each breaker shall have the following protections :-

i. Short circuit and overload protection:-

Short circuit and overload protection shall be pr ovided through inverse definite m inimum time

(IDMT) type of relay. Relay rated time shall be less than 1.3 seconds. The relay shall be of three (3) element type. Two elements for overload protection and one el ement for earth fault protection. Current setting range of the relay shall be 50- 200%.

ii. Earth Fault Protection:

Earth fault protection shall be pr ovided through a static earth fault relay. This relay shall

be provided only on transformer feeders. The relay shall have a setting range of 20 80%.

iii. Master Trip Relay:-

The relay shall be fast acting multi contact, attracted armature with high mechanical stability. It shall be suitable for tripping duties requiring simultaneous switching operation. The relay shall be suitable on 24 V DC. The operating time shall not exceed more than ten (10) millisecond.

The number of hand reset contact NO/NC shall be as per final approved scheme plus 25% spare. The contact used for tripping circuit breakers shall be blow out type. o) Each breaker shall be power operated by stored energy, charged spring mechanism for both closing and opening operations. Accidental failure of any spring shall not trip or close a breaker. Spring shall be charged full at all times. Breaker shall close, upon closing a contact in its closing ci rcuit m omentarily. A se cond cl osing impulse sh all hav e no e ffect on t he cl osing mechanism. p) Red l ights, i ndicating ' Breaker-closed' shall be w ired t o su pervise sh unt t rip ci rcuit. Green lamps mounted on remote panels indicating 'Breaker-open' shall be wired to light up only when remote/local switch is on 'Remote' position. q) All pr otective r elays shall be pr ovided with f lag indication and al l r elays di rectly tripping the breakers shall be provided with hand reset contacts in addition to the flag indication.

3.3. Interlocking and safety arrangements:

a) HT panel shall be provided with the following interlocking and safety arrangement. i. The breaker cannot be plugged in unless it is ‘off’. ii. The breaker cannot be drawn out when it is ‘on’. iii. The access to bus bar is prevented by automatic shutters when breaker is removed. iv. The circuit breaker cannot be put into service without completing the protective el ectrical and earth circuits. v. A sa fety catch to ensure t hat the movement of the breaker as it is withdrawn, is checked before it is completely out of the panel shall be provided. vi. Safety shutter of the self aligning type. vii. Emergency trip button on the panel front door. viii. Positive sliding contact arrangement for earthing on the drawout carriage. ix. Safety interlocks to prevent inadvertent contact with live parts and faculty operation.

172

3.4. Shutter Gear:

Suitable shutter gear shall be pr ovided for shrouding of bus bar and feeder orifices. These shutters shall be aut omatic in operation. Suitable hinged shutters with padlocking arrangement shall also be provided in addition to the automatic shutters.

a) Instrumentation, Metering & Indication: i. Current Transformer:

o

General Requirements

The CTs shall be of the bar primary, epoxy resin cast types. Accommodation shall be provided in the circuit br eaker panel t o m ount 2 se ts of C T's one r eserved f or p rotection and t he ot her f or metering/instrumentation pur poses. A ccess to t he C T's for cl eaning, t esting or ch anging sh all be from the front back or top of the panel. o

Rating

Dual r atio C Ts suitable burden ( but not l ess than 15 V A bur den) sh all be pr eferred with 5 am ps secondaries. The ratio shall normally be one of the following specified: 300/150/5 or as specified. o

The CTs shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.

The design and construction shall be robust to withstand thermal and dynamic stresses during short circuits. Secondary terminals of CTs shall be brought out suitably to a terminal block which shall be easily accessible for testing and terminal connections. The protection CTs shall be of accuracy class

1 & 5P10 of IS: 2705 - Part II I-1992. The m etering CTs shall conform to the metering ratio and accuracy class 1 of IS 2705. o

The CTs shall be housed in the cable terminal compartment. o

The CTs shall have class E insulation. o

The CTs shall be tested on per IS. Test certificate shall have to be furnished. o

Disconnecting link type terminal which shall only be used for CT wiring. Both terminals of each of the CTs shall be brought to the LT chamber and no shrouding required shall be ca rried out in this chamber only.

a) Voltage Transformer:

i) ii)

The PTs shall be of the epoxy resin cast type.

The P.Ts shall have class E insulation and voltage factor. iii) The PTs shall provide on the incoming side and the P.T. shall be mounted independently on draw out type trolley with HT fuses and shall not be mounted on the circuit breaker carriage. iv) The PTs shall be tested as per IS. Test certificate shall have to be submitted. v) The P Ts shall be pr ovided w ith H RC f use pr otection on H .T si de and MCBs on se condary side. vi) All the PT secondary terminals shall be individually wired up to the LT chamber. vii) A voltage transformer of burden not less than 100 VA and of proper ratio as specified shall be plug type and sh all be suitable for easy withdrawal. HRC fuses shall be provided on bot h HV and LV si des. I nter-lock shall be p rovided t o pr event acc ess to l ive H V par ts when t he

173

transformer is withdrawn. The transformer shall be pl ug in type and shall be su itable for easy manual movement on guide rails.

b) Metering & Instruments Panel Accessories:

The combined over current and earth fault relays shall be micro processor based, Communicable type. T he hi gh s peed hand r eset trip r elay, V oltage ope rated aux iliary r elays f or t ransformer protection; DC supervision relay and other auxiliary relays shall be electromechanical type.

3.4.6 Instrument Panel:

a) The Instrument panel shall from part of the housing. Relays, meters and instruments shall be mounted as per general arrangement drawings to be submitted by the tenderer. They shall be preferably of flush mounting type as specified in BOQ.

b) Auxiliary and Control Power Supply:

AC power supply for space heater and cubicle illumination lamps: a) Each carriage control panel including the breaker operating mechanism shall be provided with thermostatically co ntrolled sp ace heat er. The t hermostat sh all hav e adj ustable r ange. The space heaters shall be rated for 230 volts, 1 phase, 50 Hz. For cubicle illumination, receptacle arrangement at su itable location of each co ntrol panel sh all be pr ovided so t hat hand lamp connection may be taken from this receptacle during inspection and maintenance. b) Wiring for sp ace heat ers shall be su itably g rouped so as to form a m ore or l ess balanced conditions on 230 V , 1 phase, 50 H z su pply. Suitable num ber of sp ace heat ers along with thermostat may be provided. c) Each space heater and hand lamp circuit shall be provided with ON/OFF switch and su itable protection.

c) DC Power Supply :( If Required)

The power for br eaker control and i ndication shall be t aken from 24 V DC power su pply f rom DC distribution board. In addition, each cubicle shall be provided with one double pole, single throw switch for its control circuit power supply.

d) Circuit Protection:

All control and power circuits shall be protected with suitable MCBs.

e) Control Wiring:

All control, auxiliary and sm all wiring shall be ca rried out with 1.5/2.5/4 sq.mm PVC insulated multi stranded 1100V grade copper conductor.

For PT and controls : 1.5 Sq.mm

For CTs : 2.5 Sq.mm

Inter panel : 4.0 Sq.mm

Inter compartment wiring shall be carried out using PVC troughs.

Wiring shall be colour coded and neatly laid out in bunches and firmly fastened to the steel members of the panel. All potential circuits shall be protected by MCBs fuses near the tap-off points from the main connections. The terminations shall be crimped with proper sockets. All the conductors shall be provided with black printed yellow PVC ferrules at both ends for easy identification.

174

a) Each wire shall be terminated at separate terminal. Wires shall not be joined between terminal points. Shorting links shall be provided for all CT terminals. Wiring shall be neatly bunched. b) PVC g lands shall be pr ovided wherever t he wires are cr ossing t he panels. Gromets if used shall be g lued to the panel so that they are not displaced during transportation and handl ing at site. c) Minimum si ze o f terminals for control wiring sh all be 2. 5 Sq.mm or higher t o su it the wiring sizes stipulated. 10% Spare terminals shall be provided on each terminal block. The terminal blocks for CT connections shall have CT disconnection and shorting facility. All the CT wires to be brought to terminals and shorted at the terminals as required.

f) Alarm Annunciation System:

The annunciator shall be provided on each panel to indicate the various circuit conditions and shall be placed at suitable height. The various functions shall be as follows: a) Circuit breaker closed b) Circuit breaker open c) Trip circuit healthy d) Alarm & Auto trip e) Transformer non trip (Buchholtz, etc.) f) C/B in test g) Hooter/Buzzer shall be provided with a manually operated switch so that it can be silenced.

g) Cable Termination:

Power Cable:

a) Cable pot heads for termination of 11 KV XLPE type insulated cables shall be furnished. All power ca ble ent ry sh all be from the top / bot tom and the ca ble pot heads shall be se lfsupported, detachable type as per the site conditions. b) Where more than one cable pot heads are used per phase, the Contractor shall be required to arrange pot heads in such a way that detachment of any pot head is possible without disturbing the other units

h) Control Cable:

a) All control cables shall enter the switchgear from top/bottom as per the site conditions.

Removable plates at the top/bottom of the panel shall be furnished with compression type

Cable glands to make entry dust-tight and no weight are transferred on the terminal. The glands shall be suitable for terminating cable armour. b) All connections and accessories required to complete the whole installation shall be supplied by the Sub Contractor.

i) Terminal Blocks:

Terminal blocks shall be provided as specified and shall be clip on type. They shall be shrouded

Preferably by a transparent acrylic sheet. The terminal block of different voltage classes shall be

Segregated.

j) Accessories:

Following accessories shall be provided for each switchgear: a) Channel base and foundation bolts.

175

b) Lifting lugs c) Maintenance closing handle for circuit breaker d) Draw handle for circuit breaker e) Hook stick, indoor use, 1.5 m long f) Test plug for draw out type relay

k) Earthing:

a) The earthing of the breaker tank and moving portion shall be so arranged that the earthing of the non-current carrying structure to the frame earth bar is completed well bef ore the main circuit breaker plugs enter the fixed housing sockets. b) HT panels shall be provided with 50x6 mm copper earth bus running through out the length of the panel. Suitable stationary earthing contacts shall be provided for the earthing the body of the ci rcuit b reaker w hen t he same i s plugged i n. S ufficient nu mber o f s tar w ashers at the joints to achieve earth continuity bet ween the s heet metal parts of the panel and t he earth bus shall be pr ovided. The ci rcuit Breaker carriage shall have a scr aping earth connection, which shall earth the trolley before the circuit breaker safety shutters are opened.

l) Tests:

a) The switchgear unit shall be co mpletely assembled, wired, adjusted and tested for operation under si milar co nditions t o e nsure accu racy o f wiring, co rrectness of c ontrol sch emes an d proper functioning of all equipment.

m) Routine test:

a) Each of the following equipment shall be subjected to standard routine tests as per applicable clauses of relevant IS specifications: i) Circuit breakers ii) Bus bar assembly iii) Instrument transformers iv) Auxiliary relays i) Control switches and indication lamps

n) Design test:

a) Typical type test report of the tests mentioned below conducted on similar equipments in the past shall be furnished. b) Operation and continuity tests. c) Impulse test d) One minute power frequency high voltage withstand test e) Temperature rise test f) Short circuit test g) Megger test with 5KV megger. h) Multivot drop test of CB contacts.

In addition to the above, secondary injection tests should be conducted on all overcurrent/ earth fault relays in the presence of the purchaser’s inspector.

o) Test Certificates:

Test certificate shall be furnished in required number of copies. The routine and type test

176

Certificates shall be furnished to the Engineer-in-charge for approval before despatch of the equipment from the works. The approval in writing shall be required to effect the despatch of the equipment.

The routine and type test certificates of the miscellaneous components shall also be furnished to the Engineer-in-charge for approval.

The report shall furnish complete identification of data including serial number of each

• equipment.

p) Drawings, Data and Manuals:

After award of contract, the successful Bidder shall submit the required number of copies of the following drawings for approval of the Engineer-in-charge: a) Confirmed outline dimensional drawing of the various switchgears showing the general arrangement and indicating the following: i) Space required in the front for breaker withdrawal. ii) Control cable entry points and termination arrangement. iii) Power cable entry points and termination arrangement. iv) Bus bar clearance phase to phase and phase to ground. v) Configuration of bus bar. vi) Technical detail of supporting insulator and their spacing. vii) Location of instrument transformers. viii) Control panel details with equipment layout. ix) Terminal blocks details. b) Single and three line diagram of all switchgears showing instrument transformers control switches, instruments and indication, etc. c) Control schematic diagram of each breaker showing all safety and operation interlocks, annunciation, etc d) Transport/shipping dimensions with weights. e) Foundation and anchor bolt details including dead load and impact load. f) Cross-section with parts list. g) Cubicle wiring diagram with terminal board disposition. q) Any other relevant data, drawing and information necessary for review of items whether specifically mentioned or not shall be furnished by the Contractor along with those information. r) The responsibility of correctness of wiring diagram shall be with Contractor. The Engineerincharge will check the final schematic after submission. If any modification, addition or alteration is considered necessary to comply with the approved schematic drawing as stated herein above, the said modification, addition or alteration shall be carried out by the Contractor either in their works if it is before delivery, or at Site after delivery at no cost to the Owner. s) Before st arting m anufacture of the eq uipment, t he C ontractor sh all have t o t ake appr oval of these design drawings from the Engineer-in-charge in writing. Any manufacturing done pr ior to approval of dr awings shall be r ectified i n ac cordance w ith t he app roved dr awing by t he

Contractor at his own cost and the equipment shall be supplied within the stipulated period.

DIESEL GENERATOR SET

1.0

GENERAL

This specification is intended to cover supply, installation, testing and commissioning of

380

KVA DG Set for Police Station of Delhi Police at GK-I in New Delhi.

2.0 SCOPE OF WORK

177

The scope of work shall include under this specification design, manufacture, test at works, supply, loading, unloading, storage, installation, testing and commissioning of the Diesel engine Generator set of Silent type including labour, tools, tackles and plants, hardware and consumables, steel fabrication and items as prescribed below:

2.1 Diesel engine Generator set complete with base frame, accessories and enclosure.

2.2 Engine mounted, Engine & Alternator monitoring, control & protection integrated panel duly wired up to terminal box for engine safeties, EFC Governor with solid state potentiometers and AVR.

2.3 Fuel oil system including service day fuel tank, piping, valves, filters etc. from engine to service day fuel tank. Return fuel line with fuel cooler and piping with accessories up to day service tank or collecting point as called for.

2.4 Lube oil system with piping including engine mounted priming pump, lube oil cooler, filter, solenoid valves etc.

2.5 Cooling system including engine mounted radiator.

2.6 Exhaust emission shall meet CPCB & SPCB norms with or without catalytic converter or online scrubber and residential silencer, exhaust piping with mineral wool insulation and aluminium cladding as called for.

2.7 Steel fabricated structure/support/hanger including fixing, grouting and bolting etc.

2.8 Painting of steel work.

2.9 LT, Control cabling.

2.10 Auxiliary Control panel.

2.11 The bidder shall also indicate in his offer the time schedule for routine maintenance / overhauling operations necessary for continuous satisfactory operation of DG Set.

2.12 The item rate shall remain valid for variation to any extent of the estimated quantities given in the

Schedule of Quantities.

2.13 All equipment shall be of the class most suitable for working under the conditions specified and shall withstand the atmospheric conditions without deterioration.

2.14 Minor civil work is included in the contractor’s scope of work. However, the responsibility of coordination with the civil and other contracting agencies ensuring completion of turnkey contract rests with the contractor.

2.15 Contractor shall co-ordinate with all other agencies working at site for interconnection and safety aspects.

2.16 Also the DG supplier shall furnish back up combined guarantee for 1 year from the date of successful commissioning from Engine and alternator supplier for smooth running. In case there

178

is any defect the free replacement of any part or in whole shall be made immediately at no loss to

Owner.

2.17 Provide engineering data, drawings, O & M manuals, etc.

2.18

Packing and transportation from the manufacturer’s works to the site.

2.19 Receipt, storage, preservation and conservation of equipment at the site including handling.

2.20 Fabrication, pre-assembly, if any, erection, testing and putting into satisfactory operation of all the equipment including successful completion of trial operation.

2.21 Reliability test and performance guarantee tests including performance demonstration after successful completion of trial operation.

2.22 Furnishing of mandatory spares

2.23 Recommended spares, capital spares and O&M spares.

2.24 Satisfactory conclusion of the contract

3.0 FEES & PERMITS

The contractor shall obtain all sanctions and permits required for the running of DG sets from all t he r elevant aut horities. A ll act ual fee pay able i n t his regard w ill be reimbursed a gainst receipt/documentary pr oof ( evidence). On co mpletion o f t he w ork, the s upplier sh all obt ain

NOC/Statutory Approval from concerned authorities in original and shall be delivered to the

Owner.

4.0 CODES & STANDARDS

The design, construction, manufacture, inspection, testing and performance shall comply with all the currently applicable statutes, safety codes, relevant Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS),

British Standards (BS), International Electro Technical Commission (IEC) publication, NEMA

& VDE Standards amended upto date.

Some of the applicable standards are listed below:

IS – 1601

BS – 649

BS – 4613

: Performance and t esting o f I C en gines for g eneral purpose.

: Performance and t esting o f I C en gines for g eneral purpose.

: Electrical performance of rotating electrical machine.

179

BS – 4999/5000 : Applicable parts of BS 4999/5000.

IEC – 34-1/

IS – 4722/VDE –

0530

IS – 4889

: Specification for rotating electrical machines.

IS – 6491

IS – 4729

: Method of de termination o f e fficiency of rotating electrical machinery.

: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for rotating

Electricity machinery.

: Measurement and ev aluation o f v ibration o f rotating

Electrical machines.

AIEE – 606

IS – 2705

IS – 1248

: Recommended specification for speed governing (1959) of internal combustion engine generator units.

: Current transformers.

: Electrical indicating instruments.

: Reciprocating Internal Combustion (IC) engine driven AC

Generators.

BS – 5514 /

IS – 03046 or

IS – 08528 Part 2

IEEE – 115 : Test procedure for synchronous machine.

IS-7098 Part I & II : XLPE insulated PVC sheathed for working voltage 1.1 to

33 KV.

IS-13947/ IEC

947

IS 1018

IS-13779

IS -2147 (Part I, II

& III)

IS-3427

BS-162

IS-3202

IS-4201

IS-4146

: Air Circuit Breaker / Moulded Case Circuit Breaker.

: Switchgear and co ntrol g ear se lection/installation and maintenance.

: Digital measuring instruments and testing accessories.

: Degree o f p rotection provided b y encl osures for lo w voltage. Switchgear & control gears.

: Metal enclosed switchgear and control gear.

: Safety clearance.

: Code of pr actice for cl imate pr oofing o f electrical equipment.

: Application guide for Current Transformer.

: Application guide for Voltage Transformer.

180

IS-3034

IP-30

IS-2959

IS-1030-1982

: Code of pr actice for fire sa fety of i ndustrial bui ldingelectrical generating and distribution station.

: National electrical code (NEC) BIS publication.

: Contactors.

: Specification f or carbon steel castings for g eneral engineering purpose.

5.0 DESIGN

The desi gn and workmanship sha ll be in accordance with t he best engi neering practices, to ensure satisfactory performance and service life. The equipment offered by t he cont ractor sha ll be com plete i n a ll respects. Any m aterials or accessor ies, which may not have been specifically mentioned, but which are usual and necessary for the satisfactory and trouble free operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be provided without any extra cost to the purchaser.

6.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT

6.1 The equipment shall be capable of delivering power continuously at the generator terminals, a net output not less than the specified value at 0.8 pf excluding auxiliary power (shall be included over and above), when operating under the site ambient conditions described in this specification.

Genset should have minimum 50% single step loading capacity and it should be able to take full load in less than 25 sec from start. (The set shall be suitable for prime duty).

6.2 The design parameters of the generator and excitation system shall be so chosen that the set is stable while running at any load between no-load and full load and also during starting of motors as specified in Annexure-I. It should also have iso-synchronous speed control with load sensing governing system suitable for parallel running of DG sets.

6.3 Engine sh ould be hea vy dut y f our st roke, t urbo ch arged a fter co oler, ‘ V’ co nstruction, el ectric start. Engine should have lube oil change period of minimum 300 hrs.

6.4 The set shall have vibration limit less then 130 microns (as per BS: 4999 Part-142) and noise level shall be 75 dB(A) at 1 metre in open free field environment as per ISO 8528 part 10 under al l co nditions of load. T he se t sh all be dy namically balanced. T he se t sh all be mounted di rectly on t he i nertia foundation or w ith f oundation bol ts et c. The e fficient residential silencer sh all be pr ovided with or without ca talytic converter on-line scrubber & the set shall meet CPCB & SPCB norms for DG set’s exhaust emission. Air inlet shall also be provided.

6.5 The successful bidder shall submit shop drawing of the equipment / accessories selected for this work for the approval of Consultant / Owner.

7.0 DIESEL ENGINE - CONSTRUCTION

7.1 Material of construction of major parts shall be as under or as per manufacturer design.

181

h) f) g) a) b) Crankcase - Aluminium alloys. c)

MS Base frame with anti-vibration mountings. d) e)

Crank shaft, connecting rods - Forged Alloy Steel.

Piston - Al. alloy casting

Piston rings - Alloy steel.

Engine block - Cast iron.

Cylinder liner - Cast Iron.

All other materials of construction shall be as per relevant standard/code and the copies of same shall be supplied free of cost to Consultant.

7.2 The Diesel Engine shall be m ulti-cylinder, totally enclosed, continuous duty, direct fuel injection, turbo charged, compression ignition, inter cooled oil engine or with individual cylinder head with provision t o m easure e xhaust t emperature and sm oke quality with al arm and t ripping facility.

Fuel cooler to be provided in the fuel return line.

7.3 One co mmon base frame sh all be pr ovided f or m ounting the en gine & r adiator and al ternator complete with electric suspension between DG Set and foundation bolts, levelling lines etc. as required.

7.4 All externally mounted hardware shall be high tensile steel only.

7.5 The normal speed of the engine shall be 1500 RPM and the direction of rotation shall be clearly marked on the set.

7.6 The engine shall be fitted with an ex haust gas driven turbo charger of air/water cooled type complete with its own self-contained lubricating system. The turbo-charger shall be positioned at the free end of the engine preferably. The turbo-charger shall be provided with a provision to check its lube oil level.

7.7 The engine shall be fitted with a charge air inter cooler of the air/water type. Air from the turbocharger compressor passes through the inter-cooler and then to the engine manifold. The inter cooler shall be of tubular construction or as per manufacturer design with aluminium bronze tubes, mild sheet steel and cast iron water headers.

8.0 GOVERNING SYSTEM

8.1 The Governor shall be electronic fuel control type for coupled Genset along with speed control switch (solid state potentiometer) at the end of start on overspeed.

9.0 ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM

Starting of the Diesel Engine shall be done by electric starting system.

182

The electric starting system shall comprise starter motor, starter batteries and battery charger including with all required instruments and accessories. The engine mounted alternator shall charge t he bat teries while eng ine i s running and f loor panel m ounted so lid st ate bat tery charger while engine is stationery. The battery charger shall be of 2 rate (boost cum trickle) with al l m etering and control i nstruments and p rotections for A C and D C ci rcuit. The t otal system shall be suitable for auto and manual operation including their wiring etc. Calculation for the battery and bat tery charger capacity as well as complete descriptive circuit diagram shall be submitted for review of Consultant based on 6 consecutive start commands.

10.0 FUEL OIL SYSTEM

10.1 The fuel system shall be provided with full flow duplex oil cartridge filter preferably changeable during running of the set.

10.2 The fuel oil system shall be equipped with a crankshaft driven PT fuel oil transfer pump which will draw the fuel oil from the day tank via filters and shall be as per the engine manufacturer design.

10.3 Multi-point ( electronically co ntrolled) f uel i njection sy stem or di rect i njection w ith P TC i njectors through iso synchronous fuel Governing system shall be designed taking into account the type of fuel use d, engine sp eed et c. s o as to ach ieve sa fe knock free performance with l ow em ission smoke exhaust meeting CPCB norms for DGs with or without catalytic converter/on line scrubber.

10.4 Engine shall be supplied with fuel leakage module to detect the fuel leakage from the engine and transfer it back to day tank for reuse.

11.0 LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM

11.1 All lubricating parts of the engine shall be connected to a pressurised lubricating oil distribution piping system being continuously charged by gear type lube oil pump mounted at the free end of the eng ine and dr iven f rom t he engine cr ankshaft. T he pumps shall t ake su ction f rom a su mp tank integral with the engine through a foot valve, suction filter through oil cooler and deliver oil to a m ain supply header. High-pressure oil shall be supplied to the main and big end bearings, crankshaft bea rings, governor, aux iliary dr ive gear et c. S uitable l ubricating a rrangement for engine cylinder valve gear, cams and pistons at the required level shall be arranged. A pressure relief v alve shall be mounted on the main supply header for safety against t oo high-pressure while starting with cold oil. A timer based, auto running (auto priming pump) shall be provided to keep engine primed all the time complete with control system (if required).

11.2 The lube oil system shall be provided with full flow duplex lube oil cartridge filters. The minimum lube oil change shall be 300 hrs.

11.3 Arrangement shall be provided to bypass the lube oil pressure switches and safety at the starting till the pressure is built up.

11.4 The lube oil sump shall have provision to sense the low level of lube oil in the sump and fill it up manually or automatically from the main lube oil tank/sump and stop the transfer pump, once the lube oil is filled in the sump without stopping the engine. Pressure switches to give alarm under extreme l ow pr essure o f l ube oi l and subsequently t o t rip the unit w hen t he m inimum s afe pressure has been reached, shall be provided.

183

11.5 All necessary accessories such as pressure gauges, temperature indicators, pressure relief valves, bypass valves, pressure switches shall be provided and the safeties shall be wired up to junction box with interfaced converter for compatibility with PLC.

12. COOLING SYSTEM

12.1 The engine shall be cooled by means of a water jacket, heavy-duty air blast radiator with integral radiator header tank, circulating pump and engine driven pusher type fan. The fan shall draw air in from the vicinity of the engine block and discharge it through the radiator core. The radiator shall be mounted on the same bedplate as the engine and alternator on suitable spring type vibration isolators and be arranged so that it is located directly behind the hot air discharge duct which is used to discharge the hot air out side.

12.2 A thermostatically operated by-pass valve shall be fitted in the cooling system to maintain an optimum operating temperature during starting and running conditions. Drain cocks shall be provided so that all the water can be drained from the system.

12.3 Separate oil cooler shall be used for cooling the engine oil. A thermostatic by-pass valve shall be incorporated.

12.4 Anti-vibration mountings shall be common type with the engine AVM, since both the engine and radiators are mounted on the same base plate.

12.5 The engine sh all ha ve a se parate after co oling ci rcuit t o m aintain t he i nlet ai r t emperature within the desired limits.

13.0 EXHAUST SYSTEM

Engine em ission ex haust system sh all be fitted w ith/without ca talytic converter on l ine scrubber to control pollution to meet the CPCB/SPCB norms of exhaust emissions for DG set, silencer. Ducting, bends, hood/canopy, thermally insulated aluminium clad exhaust piping etc. shall be provided along with structural support with stays for engine. Heat resistant paint shall be pr ovided on ex haust pi pe for the po rtion t hat i s outside the encl osure. E xhaust sy stem pollution level sh all be i ndicated and sh all be got appr oved by aut horities. ( Exhaust smoke quality & quantity should be within the norms of central & state pollution control board).

14.0 ENGINE & ALTERNATOR CONTROL PANEL

Engine & alternator control

DG set shall be supplied with engine & alternator control panel that shall be a microprocessor based g enerator se t m onitoring, pr otection and e lectronic governing sy stem. It sh all b e equipped with (digital) electronic Governor along with solid-state AVR to facilitate discreet control o f sp eed and v oltage. The sy stem sh all be eq uipped w ith st arting co ntrol i ncluding integrated f uel ramping t o limit the black smoke, frequency overshoot with optimized cold weather starting. The control panel shall be equipped with digital status and alarm to monitor and display t he f ollowing par ameters. The necessary CTs/PTs shall be included and wired accordingly to meet the requirements.

14.1. ENGINE PROTECTION & INDICATORS a) Lube oil pressure b) Coolant Temperature c) Engine Speed d) Hours Run

184

e) Battery Voltage f) Common warning g) Common shutdown h) High Coolant temp warning and shutdown i) Low Lube Oil Pressure warning and shutdown j) Low Coolant Level shutdown k) Over Speed shutdown l) Charging failure indication

14.2 ALTERNATOR PROTECTION & INDICATORS a)

3-phase AC Amps b)

3-phase AC Volts c)

kW d)

kVA e)

Power Factor f)

Frequency g)

Over Voltage h)

Under Voltage i)

Over Frequency j)

Under Frequency k)

Over current

15.0 EXCITATION SYSTEM

15.1 The Alternator shall be provided with a complete rotating diode type brushless excitation system, capable of supplying the excitation current to the generator under all conditions of output from no load to full load and ca pable of maintaining voltage of the generator constantly at one particular value.

15.2 The exciter shall have Class ‘H’ insulation and should be vacuum impregnated.

15.3 The excitation system shall comprise a shaft driven AC exciter with rotating rectifiers. The rectifiers shall have in-built protection for over-voltage.

15.4 The Alternator shall be co mplete with PMG/auxiliary winding excitation. The exciter shall be f ast response type and sh all be desi gned to have a l ow time constant to minimise voltage transients under severe load changes. The excitation voltage response ratio shall be at least 0.8.

15.5 No external supply shall be required during starting and normal running of the alternator.

16.0 ALTERNATOR (415V – 3 Phase, 4 Wire System)

16.1 The Alternator shall be industrial type, screen protected, drip proof, IP-23, Class ‘H’ insulation, self v entilated, ai r co oled, r otating field, sa lient pole, br ushless machine w ith se lf ex cited, se lf regulated exciter and shall be rated for continuous duty.

16.2 The Alternator shall have a co ntinuous rating of not less than the value specified under specific requirement at 0.8 (lag) pf. The alternator shall be suitable to run for 0.95 (lag) pf with capacitor controlled by APFC relay.

185

16.3 The short circuit ratio (SCR) of the generator at rated KVA and rated voltage shall not be less than 0.48.

16.4 The Alternator shall withstand without mechanical damage, an over speed of 20% for a period of 2 minutes.

The g enerator/alternator shall with stand ov er l oad of 10% for one hour i n any 12 hour s of operation without ex ceeding t emperature rise l imits specified i n B S:2613 or B S:5000 when corrected to a mbient temperature a t si te. The t erminal v oltage s hall be adj ustable and t he range of adjustment shall be + 5% of nominal voltage.

16.5 The Alternator shall be capable of withstanding without damage/injury for 3 sec., 3-phase short circuit at i ts terminals, when oper ated at r ated KVA and po wer f actor at 5% ov er v oltage with fixed excitation (3 times the line current for 3 Sec.).

16.6.1 The A lternator sh all be ca pable of withstanding f or 30 se conds, a cu rrent of 50 per cent in excess of its rated current, the voltage being maintained, as near the rated value as possible, consistent with maximum capacity of the prime mover.

16.6.2 6 nos. em bedded R esistance T emperature D etectors (RTDs) o f P latinum ( 100 ohm s resistance at 0 degree) to measure the winding temperature and 2 nos. Bearing temperature

Detectors (BTDs) for bearing temperature shall be provided.

16.6.3 The leads of em bedded R TDs shall be wired up to the t erminal bl ock in a separate auxiliary t erminal box. Manufacturer sh all indicate t he setting values for each RTD/BTD for alarm and trip with scanner and RS 232/485 port totally compatible with PLC.

16.9 On line greasing facility with grease nipples and grease relief device shall be provided.

16.10 All external nuts and bolts shall be of high tensile steel only.

16.11 Alternator shall be provided with anti-condensation space heater of adequate rating suitable for 240V, 50 Hz, 1ph AC supply and shall be wired up to a separate terminal box.

Thermostatically controlled shall work when the machine is in idle condition only (wiring and equipment shall be provided by D.G. supplier).

16.12 Two independent earth terminals on the frame complete with nuts, spring washer and plain washer shall be provided.

16.13 Alternator shall be provided with suitable terminal box for terminating TP&N bus-duct/cables.

16.14 The alternator shall be capable to sustain the unbalanced current between the phases of minimum 40% of rated current provided that the KVA rating and maximum current does not exceed 11% of rated current in any phase as per BS-4999 Part-101.

16.15 The alternator shall be dynamically balanced complete with rotor and shaft.

16.16 Alternator should have bearings at both shaft ends.

186

16.17 Damper winding sh all be pr ovided in t he pole to dam p the oscillations and ensu re satisfactory performance during parallel operation.

16.18 Winding of 3 phase alternator shall be of star connected and neutral point shall be brought out to the terminal box through protection and earthed with independent earth or through contactor as per scheme.

16.19 Protection CTs, PTs, Neutral CT shall be mounted above the terminal box with enclosure. Bus duct / cable shall be terminated on terminals through this.

16.20 Diesel generating set shall be able to start motor of 30% capacity of DG set with a 20% base load.

17.0 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR

17.1 An aut omatic high sp eed, dead band t ype dua l ch annel voltage r egulator sh all be pr ovided complete with all accessories. The regulation system shall be with equipment accessories for automatic as well as for manual switchover control.

17.2 The voltage r egulator s hall be dual co ntrol type i .e. the v oltage regulation sh all be t hrough compound transformer or magnetic amplifier and the electronic regulation through solid state devices automatically both shall be secured from all three phases.

The combined voltage regulation shall be + 1% from full load to no-load from hot to cold at unity power factor and 0.8 to 0.95 power factor with 4% speed regulation of the engine.

17.3 Voltage regulation and st eady state modulation shall be within +1% of the line voltage and with auto-manual voltage adjustment capability within +5%. The maximum permissible wave form distortion should not exceed 5% at any load.

17.4 Necessary equipment for field suppression and surge protection shall be provided.

17.5 The response time of the exciter and the generator shall be properly matched to avoid hunting.

17.6 In the event of AVR failure, the generator excitation control is transferred automatically without any change in the excitation current.

17.7 Necessary equipment shall be furnished for the following: a. To prevent automatic rise of field voltage in case of failure of potential supply. b. To initiate transfer from automatic to manual control of excitation on fuse failure in

the generator potential signal. c. To facilitate reactive load sharing of parallel operating generator if any in

proportion to their ratings. The quadrate droop current transfer compensation

feature should be provided on exciter regulation and the droop voltage shall be

within 1% variation.

187

18.0 TESTS

18.1 The Diesel Generator set shall be tested as per the relevant CPWD Standards at manufacturer place and per formance test at site. However al l t he co nsumables i.e. fuel, lub oil f ilters etc. shall be pr ovided by t he co ntractor with free of cost. A ll t he t ests w ill be witnessed by t he representative of e mployer with no e xtra cl aim to em ployer. T he su pplier sh all su bmit t est reports with complete description / testing procedure:

18.2 Test Certificate a. Test Certificate shall be submitted in four (4) copies. b. The t est certificates shall be f urnished t o t he pur chaser f or prior approval before dispatch of any equipment from works and the approval in writing from purchaser shall be essential to effect dispatch of the equipment. c. The t est r eports shall f urnish co mplete i dentification o f t he dat a i ncluding se rial number of each equipment.

19.0 SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES

a. The contractor shall furnish to the purchaser a complete and unused set of all special tools & t ackles, w hich ar e nece ssary f or er ection, t esting and co mmissioning, maintenance and ov erhauling o f any of t he eq uipment pr ovided under t his specification. b. The tools shall be sh ipped i n se parate co ntainers clearly m arked w ith the na me of equipment for which they are intended. c. The contractor shall submit a list of tools proposed to be furnished under the scope of supply with his proposal. d. Other tools needed (but not a part of this supply). e. Hydraulic cam for dismantling the DG Set heads should form part of the supply.

20.0 DRAWINGS, DATA & MANUALS

Drawings and details of foundation, Wiring diagram of all auxiliary devices shall be furnished.

Installation, operation and maintenance manuals shall be furnished.

23.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME

Quality Assurance shall follow the requirements of Owner/ Consultant as applicable. Quality

Assurance i nvolvement w ill co mmence at i nquiry and f ollow t hrough t o co mpletion and acceptance thus ensuring total conformity to Purchaser’s requirements.

24.0 GUARANTEED PERFORMANCE

The contractor shall furnish, t he t echnical par ticulars. The performance figures given in t he technical particulars shall be guaranteed within the tolerance permitted by relevant standards.

In case of failure of equipment to meet the guarantee, the purchaser reserves the right to use

188

these r ejected equipment unt il t he new eq uipment m eeting the guaranteed r equirements is supplied by the contractor.

25.0 PACKING FOR SHIPMENT

25.1 The equipment shall be suitably protected by respective packing for the shipment distance and weather conditions involved.

25.2 For transportation, if totally enclosed boxes are not used, the equipment shall be mounted on skids and enclosed in the open frame wooden crates. However, items like instruments and other components not assembled with equipment shall be separately marked with equipment number and part number for case of identification.

26.0 APPROVALS

Contractor shall obtain all the necessary statutory approvals/clearances required from the Director of

Safety, Pollution Control Board as required.

AMF PANEL FOR DG SET

The Generator control s hall be i ndoor t ype, floor m ounted, du st and v ermin pr oof i n sh eet st eel construction. The panel shall have doors at the front and bac k for proper maintenance. The panel shall have steel channel fabricated kick-plate and bolted type cable gland plate fitted at the bottom.

The panel shall be constructed from 2 mm thick steel sheet. All the joints shall have proper gaskets.

Monitoring and control devices shall be housed on the front door. Generally the construction of the panel w ill be su ch t hat v arious equipments for appl ications will be house d i n co mpartments. All incoming and outgoing power and control cables shall be from the bottom.

Panel will be equipped as follows: a) 2 nos. 4 pole, 630Amp EDO Type ACB b) 1 set of CTs for Metering

METERING a)

Ammeter with selector switch b)

Voltmeter with selector switch

AMF LOGIC a)

One Main supply voltage monitor b)

One Alternator supply voltage monitor c)

One set of DC control relays and timers d)

One Set of control relays for the automatic control system

BATTERY CHARGER a)

One Battery charging transformer/ rectifier unit b)

One DC Ammeter c)

One DC Voltmeter

INDICATIONS

189

8.

9.

6.

7.

2.

3.

1.

4.

5. a)

Set running b)

Set on Load c)

Phase Indication

SOUND PROOF ENCLOSURE

a)

The enclosure shall be sound proof and weather proof. b)

It shall conform to statutory Govt. noise level norms. c)

It shall be of modular construction with the provision to assemble and dismantle easily. d)

It shall be fabricated in 16 SWG-CRCA-sheet. e)

The sheet metal components shall be eight tank pretreated and polyester based powder coated (inside as well as outside) for long life. f)

All Nuts-bolts, hardware shall be of Stainless Steel g)

Battery shall be provided in a tray inside the Enclosure. h)

Doors shall be gasketed with high quality EPDN gaskets to avoid leakage of sound. i)

Sound proofing of enclosure shall be done w ith high quality rock wool confirming to IS

8183 t o su itable t hickness and densi ty. R ock w ool i s further co vered w ith fibre glass sheet and perforated powder coated sheet. j)

Suitable openings with acoustic hoods shall be provided for increasing the inflow of air required for combustion & forced ventilation. Radiator shall not allow the temperature to rise more than 7

0

C above ambient temperature within the enclosure. k)

Sound attenuators shall be provided to control sound at air entry & exit points inside the

Enclosure. l)

The enclosure shall be designed and layout of the equipment shall be such that there is easy access to serviceable parts. m)

Adequate v entilation sh all be pr ovided t o m eet ai r r equirement for co mbustion & hea t removal. n)

There shall be an arrangement for illumination inside the Enclosure.

The DG supplier shall furnish the technical calculation and literature etc. for the following for the verification of consultant.

Pressure drop in exhaust pipe and pipe diameter.

Short circuit calculations (rotor, stator and rotor + stator combined impedance).

FDV (ventilation required for DG).

Starting battery and battery charger capacity.

Descriptive testing procedure of individual equipment and co mbined set with accepted value etc.

DG set dimensions (L x B x H).

Terminal box flange details in case of bus duct.

Deviation statement if any.

Maximum in rush current capacity for 10 minutes.

190

TRANSFORMER

1. SCOPE

The sco pe o f w ork i ncludes design, manufacturing, testing a t m anufacturer’s works, inspection, and supply of 11 KV/433 V; 630 KVA; ONAN; Delta-Star with thirty degree phase displacement oil filled copper wound distribution transformer with on load tap changer for

Police S tation of D elhi P olice at Greater Kailash-I, N ew D elhi. The pe rcent v oltage impedance of the transformer shall be 5.0 percent subject to IS tolerance. The Losses of the transformer shall be as per IS 1180 part –I with Energy Efficiency Level 3.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS 2.

2.1 CODES & STANDARDS

i) The design, material, fabrication, manufacture, inspection, testing before dispatch, erection, testing, commissioning and performance of transformers at site shall comply with all currently applicable statutory regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment shall be installed. T he equipment shall also conform to the latest applicable standards and codes of practice. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the Supplier of this responsibility. ii) Transformer sh all co nform t o t he cu rrent appl icable st andards and co des of pr actice a s specified in Clause No. 2.1.1.

2.1.1 The equipment, materials and service covered by this specification shall conform to the latest applicable provision of the following standards:-

1.

2.

3.

4.

IS : 5

IS : 325

IS : 335

IS : 1271

Colour for ready mixed paints.

Three phase Induction Motors.

New insulating oil for transformers, Switch gears.

Classification of insulating materials for electrical m achinery and appar atus in relation to their stability in services.

Power Transformer 5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

IS : 2026(Part I to IV) & IS :

1180

IS : 2071

IS : 2099

IS : 2147

IS : 2705

10. IS : 3202

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

IS : 3347

IS : 3637

IS : 3639

IS : 5561

IS : 6600 / BS :CP” 1010

IS : 10028

Method of high voltage testing

High voltage porcelain bushings.

Degree of protection.

Current Transformer

Code of pr actice for cl imate pr oofing o f electrical equipment.

Dimensions for porcelain transformer

Bushes.

Gas operated relays.

Fittings and acce ssories for pow er transformers.

Electric power connectors.

Guide for l oading o f oi l i mmersed transformers.

Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of transformers. Part I, II

191

17. C.B.I.P. Publication

& III.

Manual on Transformer.

If the standard is not quoted for any item, it shall be presumed that the latest version of Indian

Standard shall be applicable to that item.

The e quipment co mplying w ith ot her i nternationally acce pted st andards, may al so b e considered if they ensure performance superior to the Indian Standards.

3. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

3.1 Tanks and Radiators

3.1.1 Tanks sh all be o f M S pl ates and s tructural, el ectrically w elded. The c onstruction sh all b e robust and su bstantial, suitable f or road/ rail transport and t o withstand vibration. R adiator tubes shall be electrical resistance welded type, round or elliptical or rectangular. They shall

o

C.

3.1.2 Tanks shall be thoroughly cleaned, degreased and sand blasted inside and outside. A coat of rust resisting primer shall immediately be given on outside surface. Inside surface shall be painted with oil resistance enamel paint. Tank and radiators shall be hy draulically pressure tested. T anks shall al so be t ested for full v acuum. T he procedure for t esting sh all be as follows: be welded to separate detachable radiator banks connected through intermediate leak proof valves. D etachable r adiator banks shall ha ve t op and bot tom hea ders with f langed connections, with drain and vent fittings. Tanks shall be provided with lifting lugs and jacking lugs. Inspection hole with cover shall also be provided. Oil conservators shall be mounted on brackets attached to the top cover on tank. Dimensions of the conservator shall be such as to allow change in volume of oil due to change in temperature from 10 o

C to 95 i.

Vacuum Test

The tanks designed for all vacuum shall be tested at an internal pressure of 3.33

KN/sq.mtr. (25 mm of Hg) for one hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after the v acuum has been released sh all not exceed t he v alue specified i n T able ‘ A’ without affecting the performance of the transformer. ii

Pressure Test

When sp ecified, one t ransformer t ank o f ea ch s ize t ogether w ith i ts radiators, conservator vessel and other fittings shall be subjected to a pressure corresponding to twice t he nor mal head o f oi l or to t he nor mal pr essure pl us 35 K N/sq.m ( 0.35 kg/sq.cm) whichever is lower measured at the base of the tank and will be maintained for one hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after the excess pressure has been released shall not exceed the figure specified in Table ‘A’.

TABLE ‘A’

Horizontal length of flat plate (in mm)

Upto and including 750

750 to 1250

1251 to 1750

Permanent deflection

(in mm)

5.0

6.5

8.0

192

1751 to 2000

2001 to 2250

2251 to 2500

2501 to 3000

Above 3000

3.1.3

Core

3.1.3.1 The Core shall be built

9.5

11.0

12.5

16.0

19.0 with thin laminations of high grade, non ageing low loss high permeability cold rolled super grain oriented silicon steel

. The core laminations shall be i nsulated from each other by su itable high temperature r esistant, oi l pr oof, adhering coating materials. C ore cl amps and cl amping bolts shall be hea vily insulated f rom the core laminations

3.1.3.2 The insulation of core bolt shall be of minimum class ‘A’. The bottom and top frames shall be connected with the tie rods to make a complete structure rigid for carrying the weight of core-coil assembly without unduly stressing the laminations or windings. Lifting eyes shall be provided on the frame for removal of core assembly from the tank. Completed core shall be flash tested for insulation with 2500 Volts between the core and each of the clamps or core bolts (core being connected to earth).

3.1.3.3 All the core frames shall be bonded together with two metallic strips and connected to the tank for earthing to ensure earth return and operation of protective gear in the event of a fault. Li fting ey es (or any ot her pr ovision) f or l ifting t he co re from the t ank sh all be provided.

3.1.4 Winding and Insulation

Winding sh all be three phase w ith m inimum cl ass ‘A’ i nsulation. H igh co nductivity electrolytic quality copper shall be used for winding. Windings shall be suitably braced to withstand the dynamic forces due to short circuit. Winding insulation shall be uniform and windings shall have full insulation.

Windings shall be subjected to shrinking and seasoning process, so that no further shrinkage occurs during service. Adjustable devices shall be provided for taking up possible shrinkage in service.

Coils shall be su pported at frequent intervals by means of wedge t ype insulation sp acers permanently se cured i n pl ace and a rranged t o ensu re pr oper oi l ci rculation. To ensu re permanent t ightening of w inding assembly, the i nsulation sp acers shall be dr ied and compressed at high pressure before use.

Windings shall not contain sharp bends that might damage the insulation or produce high dielectric stresses. No strip conductor wound on edge shall have width exceeding six times the thickness.

Materials used in t he i nsulation and asse mbly of the w indings shall be i nsoluble, non catalytic and chemically inactive in the hot transformer oil, and shall not soften or be otherwise affected under the operating conditions.

Varnish application on coil windings may be given only for mechanical protection and not for improvement in dielectric properties. In no case varnish or other adhesive be used which will seal the coil and prevent evacuation of air and moisture and impregnation by oil.

193

All threaded connections shall be locked. Leads from the winding to the terminal board and bushings sh all be r igidly supported to prevent injury from vibration. Guide t ubes sh all be used where practicable.

Coil clamping rings shall be of steel or of a suitable insulating material.

Permanent cu rrent ca rrying j oints in t he windings and l eads shall be welded or br azed.

Clamping bolts for current carrying parts inside oil shall be made of oil resistance material which shall not be affected by acidity in the oil. Steel bolts, if used, shall be suitably treated.

Termination of all windings, also of stabilizing windings, shall be brought out of the tank for external connections.

Windings conductor shall be transposed at sufficient intervals in order to minimize eddy currents and equalize the distribution of currents and temperatures along with the windings.

The completed core and coil assembly shall be dried in vacuum at not more than 0.5mm of mercury abso lute pr essure and sh all be i mmediately impregnated with oil af ter the dr ying process to ensure the elimination of air and moisture within the insulation. Vacuum may be applied in either vacuum over tank or in the transformer tank. Vapour phase dry out shall be preferred.

3.1.5 Insulating Oil

3.1.5.1 The insulating oil for transformer shall be EHV grade, generally confirming to IS: 335. No inhibitors shall be used in the oil.

3.1.5.2 The quantity of oil required for the first filling of the transformer and its full specification shall be stated in the bid. The bidder shall quote the price of transformer complete with first filling of oil plus 10% extra. However the rate of transformer oil in Rs. per litre shall also be quoted separately. The transformer oil shall be supplied in non-returnable drums.

3.1.5.3 The design materials used in the construction of the transformer shall be su ch as to reduce the risk of the development of acidity in the oil.

3.1.5.4 The supplier shall warrant that oil furnished is in accordance with the following specifications:-

S.No. Characteristic

1. Appearance

2.

3.

Requirement

The oil shall be clear & t ransparent

& free f rom suspended m atter of Sediment.

0.89g / cm3 Max.

27 CST

Method of Test.

A r epresentative sample o f oi l sh all be ex amined i n a

100 m m t hick layer at ambient temp.

IS : 1448

IS : 1448

4.

5.

6.

7.

Density at 20’c

Kinematic Viscosity at 27 deg. C. Max.

Interfacial tension at 2 7 deg. C.Min.

Flash Point

Pour Point Max

Neutralization v

(Total Acidity) Max. alue

.03 N / M

136 deg. C

- 6 deg. C

IS : 6104

IS : 1448

IS : 1448

0.03 mg KOH / gm IS : 335

194

8. Electric strength

Breakdown Voltage Min.

Not l ess than 72. 5

KV

IS : 6792

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

Dielectric dissipation factor for delta at 90Deg.

C.

Min. specific resistance

(resistivity) at 90deg. C.

Oxidation stability

Neutralization value after oxidation

Total sludge after oxidation

Presence o f ox idation inhibitor

0.03 Max.

35 x 10

(min)

12 ohm cm

0.40 mg KOH / g

.10% by weight max

IS : 6262

IS : 6103

5.

14.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The oil shall not contain ant ioxidant

IS : 335 additives.

Less than 25 ppm. IS : 2362 15. Water content Max

3.1.6 The transformer sh all be eq uipped w ith su rge arrestors at H V and LV si de. The su rge arrestors shall also be mounted on t he bracket fitted on the transformer. S upplier shall be responsible of properly choosing the rating of the surge arrestors on HT & LT side both.

7.

The t ransformer sh all be out door t ype as specified. U nless otherwise sp ecified t he transformer i n addi tion sh all ha ve t hermal and dy namic ability t o withstand ex ternal sh ort circuit as per Clause 9 of IS: 2026 (Part I) 1977.

6.

TEMPERATURE RISE

6.1 The r eference am bient temperatures assumed f or t he pu rpose o f this specification ar e a s follows:- a. b. c. d.

Maximum ambient air temperature 50 Deg. C.

Maximum daily average ambient temperature 40 Deg. C.

Maximum yearly weighted average ambient temperature 32 Deg. C.

Minimum ambient air temperature + 3 Deg. C.

6.2 The temperature rise at the above conditions and at an altitude not exceeding 1000 meters shall be as follows:

By resistance method - 55 Deg. C.

By thermometer - 50 Deg. C.

If the site conditions indicated for a particular job are more severe than the reference ambient temperature m entioned abov e, the temperature r ise shall be suitably scaled such t hat hot spot temperature shall not exceed the values for the reference conditions.

TAP CHANGING DEVICE

On load Tap changing device with local manual & electrical operation shall be provided on HV side. It shall be designed for bi-directional operation and shall have the following steps from –

15 % to +5 % in steps of 1.25 % each to give constant secondary voltage of 433 volts.

195

8.

VOLTAGE RATIO

Unless otherwise specified, the transformer shall be suitable for a voltage ratio of 11 KV / 433

V.

9.

VECTOR GROUP

The winding connection shall conform to vector group Dyn11 unless otherwise specified.

10.

COOLING

Unless otherwise sp ecified, t he t ransformer shall be oi l i mmersed na tural ai r-cooled t ype

(ONAN).

11.

ACCESSORIES a. Oil Conservator Tank:-

1) The co nservator tank s hall hav e adeq uate ca pacity bet ween hi ghest a nd l owest visible levels to meet the requirement of expansion of the total cold oil volume in the transformer and cooling equipment.

2) The co nservator tank s hall be bol ted i nto posi tion so t hat i t ca n be removed f or cleaning purposes.

3) The co nservator shall be fitted w ith m agnetic oil l evel g auge w ith l ow level electrically insulated alarm contact.

4) The conservator tank shall be fitted with flexible diaphragm type.

5) Transformer sh all be p rovided with t hermo si phon filters to p rolong t he l ife of transformer oil.

b. Oil temperature Indicator (OTI)

The t ransformers shall be pr ovided with a 150 m m di al t hermometer for t op oi l temperature indication. The thermometer shall have adjustable, electrically independent potential free alarm and trip contacts. Maximum reading pointer and resetting device shall be mounted in the local control panel. A temperature sensing element suitably located in a pocket on top oil shall be furnished. This shall be connected to the OTI by means of capillary tubing. Accuracy class of OTI shall be + 1% or better.

c. Winding Temperature Indicator:-

A devi ce f or m easuring t he hot sp ot t emperature of t he winding sh all b e pr ovided. I t shall comprise the following:-

1) Temperature sensing element.

2) Image Coil.

3) Auxiliary CTs, if required to match the image coil shall be furnished and mounted in the local control panel.

196

4) 150 m m dial local indicating i nstrument with maximum r eading pointer m ounted in local panel and with adjustable electrically independent ungrounded contacts, besides that required for control of cooling equipment, on for high winding temperature alarm and one for trip.

5) Calibration device.

d. Valves

i) Valves shall be of forged ca rbon st eel up to 50 mm si ze and gun metal o f cast i ron bodies with gun metal fittings for sizes above 50mm. They shall be of full way type with screwed ends and shall be opened by turning counter clockwise when facing the hand wheel. There shall be no oil leakage when the valves are in closed position. ii) Each valve shall be provided with an indicator to show the open and closed positions and shall be provided with facility for padlocking in either open or closed position. All screwed valves shall be furnished with pipe plugs for protection.

Padlocks with duplicate keys shall be supplied along with the valves. iii) All valves except scr ewed v alves shall be pr ovided with f langes having machined faced drilled to suit the applicable requirements. Oil tight blanking plates shall be provided for each connection for use when any radiator is detached and for all valves opening to atmosphere. If any special radiator valve tools are required, the Supplier shall supply the same. iv) Each transformer shall be provided with following valves on the tank:-

1) Drain valve so located as to completely drain the tank.

2) Two filter valves on diagonally opposite corners, of 50 mm size.

3) Oil sampling valves not less than 8mm at top and bottom of main tank.

4) One 15 mm air release plug.

5) Valves between radiators and tank.

e.

Drain and filter v alves sh all be su itable f or appl ying v acuum as specified i n t he specifications.

Pressure relief Device:-

The pr essure r elief dev ice pr ovided sh all be o f su fficient si ze f or r apid r elease of any pressure t hat may be generated i n t he t ank and w hich m ay r esult i n dam age o f t he

f.

Oil Sealing:-

equipment. The dev ice sh all oper ate at a s tatic pressure o f l ess than the hy draulic test pressure of transformer tank. I t shall be m ounted direct on t he tank. A pair of electrically insulated contacts shall be provided for alarm and tripping.

The oil preservation shall be diaphragm type oil sealing in conservator to prevent oxidation and contamination of oil due to contact with atmospheric moisture.

The conservator shall be fitted with a dehydrating filter breather. It shall be so designed that.

197

1) Passage of air is through a dust filter & Silica gel.

2) Silica gel is isolated from atmosphere by an oil seal.

3) Moisture absorption indicated by a change in colour of the crystals of the silica gel can be easily observed from a distance.

4) Breather is mounted not more than 1400 mm above rail top level. g.

Thermo-syphon Filter:-

To ex tract t he har mful constituents like w ater, acids etc. fr om oil, th ermo-siphon f ilter o f cylindrical sh ape with per forated s teel t rays filled w ith abso rbents such as active al umina should be provided.

The filter asse mbly sh all be m ounted on t he transformer as well as ground su pported and connected with pipes and sh ut off valves. S uitable instructions required t o be f ollowed f or commissioning, dismantling and maintenance of filter arrangement, re-generation and storage of t he abso rbent etc. m ust be i ncluded i n t he i nstrumentation m anual. A det ailed dr awing showing internal arrangement shall be submitted.

The oil & absorbent capacity required in the thermo-siphon filter is as under:- i) Quantity of oil - 1.0% of total oil by weight. ii) Quantity of absorbent 0.2% to 0.25% of total oil by weigh.

Conservator w ith i solating v alves, oi l f illing hol e w ith ca p and dr ain valve. T he conservator v essel sh all be f itted w ith co nstant oi l pr essure di aphragm oi l se aling system.

-

12.

FITTINGS

12.1 The following fittings shall be provided on the transformers:-

1)

2) Magnetic type oil level gauge (150 mm dia) with low oil level alarm contacts.

3) Prismatic / toughened glass oil level gauge.

4)

5)

6)

Silica gel breather with oil seal and connecting pipe complete with first fill of activated silica gel or alumina mounted at a level of 1300 mm above ground level.

Bleeding pipe & testing cock. The test cock shall be suitable for a flexible pipe connection for ch ecking i ts operation. A 5 m m dia C opper pi pe sh all b e co nnected from the relay test cock to a v alve located at a su itable height above ground level to facilitate sampling of gas with the transformer in service. Interconnection between gas collection box and relay shall also be provided. The device shall be provided with two electrically independent ungrounded contacts, are for alarm on gas accumulation and the ot her for t ripping o n su dden oi l su rge. These co ntacts shall be w ired upt o transformer marshalling box. T he relay shall be pr ovided with shut off valve on t he conservator side as well as on the tank side.

Pressure r elief dev ices (including p ressure r elief v alve) and nece ssary air e qualizer connection between this and the conservator with necessary alarm and trip contacts.

7) Air release plugs in the top cover.

198

8)

9)

Inspection cove, access holes with bolted covers of access to inner ends of bushing etc.

Winding temperature (hot spot) indicating device for local mounting complete in all respects. Winding temperature indicator shall have three sets of contacts to operate at different settings. a) b)

To provide winding temperature ‘high alarm’.

To provide temperature too high ‘trip’.

10) Dial thermometer with pocket for oil temperature indicator with one set of alarm and one set of trip contacts and maximum reading pointer.

11) Lifting eyes or lungs for the top core, core and coil and for the complete transformer.

12) Jacking pads.

13) Haulage lugs

14) Protected type mercury / alcohol in glass thermometer and a pocket to house the same.

15) Top and bo ttom filter v alves on di agonally opposite ends with pad l ocking arrangement on both valves.

16) Top & bottom sampling valves.

17) Drain valve with pad locking arrangement.

18) Rating and connection diagram plate.

19) Two numbers tank earthing terminals with associated nuts and bolts for connections to purchaser’s grounding strip.

20) Bi – directional flagged rollers with locking and bolting device.

21) Marshalling box (MB)

22) Emergency push button for tripping the HT Incomer

23) Shut o ff v alve on bot h sides of flexible pi pe co nnections between r adiator ban k & transformer tank.

24) Cooling accessories:

Requisite number of radiator provided with: a)

-

-

-

-

-

One shut off valve on top

One shut valve at bottom

Air release device on top

Drain & sampling device at bottom

Lifting lungs. b) Air release device and oil drain plug on oil pipe connectors.

199

25) Terminal marking plates for current transformer and main transformer.

26) Oil preservation equipment.

27) LA along with the fittings.

28) Oil temperature indicator

Note:- i)

ii)

The fittings listed abov e ar e i ndicative and a ny ot her fittings w hich ar e generally required for satisfactory operation of the transformer are deemed to be included in the quoted price of the transformer.

The contacts of various devices required for alarm & trip shall be potential free and sh all be adeq uately r ated f or co ntinuous making and b reaking c urrent duties as specified.

13.

EXPLOSION VENT

Explosion vent or pressure relief device shall be provided of sufficient size for rapid release of any pressure that may be generated within the tank and which might result in damage to the equipment. The device shall operate at a static pressure less than the hydraulic test pressure for transformer t ank. M eans shall be pr ovided t o pr event t he i ngress of m oisture and gas accumulation.

14. RATING AND DIAGRAM PLATES

The following plates shall be fixed to transformer tank in a visible position. a. A rating plate of weatherproof material bearing the data specified in the appropriate clauses IS: 2026. b. A di agram pl ate sh owing the i nternal co nnections and al so t he v oltage v ector relationship of the several windings in accordance with IS: 2026 and a plan view of the transformer giving the correct physical relationship of the terminals.

15.

JOINTS AND GASKETS

All gaskets used for making airtight joints shall be of proven material such as granulated cork bonded with synthetic rubber gaskets or synthetic rubber.

16.

GAS AND OIL ACTUATED (BUCHHOLTZ) RELAYS

16.1 Buchholz relay shall be provided for the transformers.

16.2 Oil actuated relay equipment shall conform to IS: 3637 and sh all be double float type having contacts which close following oil surge or under incipient fault conditions.

16.3 Each g as and oi l act uated r elay shall be pr ovided with a t est co ck t o t ake a flexible pi pe connection or checking the operation of the relay.

16.4 To allow the gas to be collected at ground level, a pi pe approximately 5mm inside diameter shall be connected to the release cock of the gas and oil actuated relay and brought down to a point approximately 1.25 m above ground level, where it shall be terminated by a co ck. A

200

machined su rface sh all be pr ovided on t he t op of each r elay t o facilitate t he se tting of the relays and to check the mounting angle in the pipe and the cross level of the relay.

16.5 The design of the relay mounting arrangements, the associated pipe work shall be such that mal-operation of the relays shall not take place under normal service. The pipe work shall be so ar ranged that al l gas arising from t he transformer sh all pass through the gas and oi lactuated relay. The oil circuit through the relay shall not form a delivery path in parallel with any circulating oil pipe, nor shall it be tied into, or connected through, the pressure relief vent.

Sharp bends in the pipe work shall be avoided.

16.6 All wiring connections, readily wired upto Marshalling box terminal boards, fuses and links etc. connected with gas actuated relays shall be suitable for tropical atmosphere. Any wiring liable to be in contact with shall have oil resisting insulation and t he bared ends of stranded wire shall be se aled together to prevent creepage of oil along the wire. T here shall be no possibility of oil entering connection boxes used for cables or wiring.

17.

CABLE BOX

Cable box shall not be m ounted on the tank covers. I t shall be feasible to remove the tank covers for i nspection dur ing m aintenance et c. without r ecourse t o br eaking t he j oints or disturbing the cables already terminated.

18.

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (STANDARD CONDITIONS)

1. Rated KVA (ONAN rating)

2.

3.

4.

No. of Phase

Type of Installation

Frequency

: 630 KVA

: 3

: Outdoor

: 50 Hz

5. Cooling medium

:

: Insulation oil

:

11 KV

433 V

6. a) b)

7. a) b)

Rated voltage:-

High Voltage winding

Low voltage winding

Highest continuous system voltage:

HV Side

LV Side

8. Type of tap changer

:

:

12 KV

433 V

9. Range of tapping

10. Neutral terminal to be brought out

11. Impedance on rated M VA base at 75

Dec. C.

: On Load

: +5 % to –15 % in steps of

1.25 %

: On LV side only

: As per CBIP manual or as specified by the utility.

12. Type of insulation and insulation level : ‘A’ Class; Uniform

13. Impulse withstand test voltage (KV : 75 & 28

201

14. a) b) peak) & Power frequency withstand test voltage (KV rms)

Winding connection

HV Side

LV Side

15. Winding material

16. Vector Group

17. Type of cooling

18. Neutral earthing

19. Neutral current transformer

:

:

Delta

Star

: Electrolytic Copper

: Dyn11

: ONAN

: LV neut ral sh all be so lidly earthed.

: One No.

1 C ore C T sh all be provided in the neutral circuit o f LV side o f t he transformer. T he CT secondary sh all be w ired out to the Transformer panel. This shall be for

REF protection.

: One No.

: One No.

20. Winding temperature indicator

21. Oil temperature indicator

19.

Marshalling Box

A metal enclosed, weather, vermin and dust proof marshalling box fitted with required glands, locks, glass door, terminal board, heater with switch, illumination lamp with switch etc. shall be provided with each transformer to accommodate temperature indicators, terminal blocks etc. It shall have a degree of protection of IP 55 as per IS: 2147. Schematic drawing of the wiring including external cables shall be put under the propane sheet on inside door of the transformer marshalling box.

20. Capitalization of Losses

The capitalization of guaranteed losses of the transformer shall be calculated and considered with evaluation of the bids. The guaranteed values of no load losses and load losses shall be stated in the bid.

21.

PERFORMANCE

i) Transformer shall be capable of withstanding for two seconds without damage to any external short circuit, with the short circuit MVA available at the terminals. ii) The m aximum flux density in an y par t of t he core and y oke, voltage and f requency shall be su ch t hat t he f lux densi ty under 12. 5% ov er v oltage co nditions shall not exceed 1.9 Tesla. iii) Transformer sh all under ex ceptional ci rcumstances due t o su dden di sconnection o f the load, be capable of operating at the voltage approximately 25% above normal

202

rated voltage for a period of not exceeding one m inute and 40% above normal for a period of 5 seconds. iv) The t ransformer m ay b e oper ated co ntinuously without dang er on any par ticular tapping at the rated KVA plus minus 12.5% of the voltage corresponding to the tapping. v) The thermal ability withstand short circuit shall be demonstrated by calculation. vi) With co mbined v oltage variation of + 12.5% and frequency v ariation of –5% the f lux density shall not exceed 1.9 Tesla. vii) Transformer shall be capable of withstanding thermal and mechanical stress caused by any symmetrical and asymmetrical faults on any winding.

22.

MISCELLANEOUS:-

i) Padlocks along with duplicate keys as asked for various valves, marshalling box etc., shall be supplied by the Supplier wherever locking arrangement is provided. ii)

23.

TESTS

Foundation bolts for wheel locking devices of transformer shall be supplied by the

Supplier.

The transformer shall be su bjected to the following routine tests at the manufacturer’s works before dispatch. a) b)

Measurement of winding resistance.

Voltage ratio, polarity and phase relationship. c) Measurement of impedance voltage at extreme & principal taps. d) Load losses at extreme & principal taps. (Copper loss) e) No load losses and no load current at 90, 100 & 110 % . (Iron loss) f) Induced over voltage withstand. g) Separate source voltage withstand. h) Dielectric test i) Insulation resistance j) Oil leakage test

The q uoted rate for the transformer shall include all routine tests to be carried out at the manufacturer’s works and all routine tests to be carried out at site as per specifications. The supplier shall quote separately for type/special tests as detailed below which shall be carried out only on t he written instructions of Engineer in charge otherwise test certificates for them shall be furnished.

203

c) d) e) a) b)

Temperature Rise test

Tan delta & Capacitance test

Magnetic balance test

Measurement of Harmonic

Dynamic short circuit test (Prototype Test certificate only)

24.

PRECOMMISSIONING TESTS

1. General inspection a) b)

2.

3.

4.

Secondary injection

Primary injection (also to be repeated a t t he end o f al l other commissioning tests)

Ratio tests c) a) b) c) d) e) f) a) b)

Control and relay panels, etc.

Junction boxes and marshalling kiosks.

Transformer oil HV test to withstand 12 KV

On all transformer protection relays

Tests on operation and stability of earth fault relays on high voltage side.

Test on ov er cu rrent r elays on low voltage side.

Tests on operation and stability of earth fault relays on low voltage side.

Tests on operation of standby earth fault relays on low voltage side.

Tests on over current relay on hi gh voltage si de ( when cu rrent transformers are not in transformer bushings)

Voltage compensation.

With 415 V applied on high voltage side, measure the voltage between all phases on the low-voltage side.

To check phasing, measures volts:

A to a, b and c

B to a, b and c

C to a, b and c

Where A, B and C are the terminals of t hree pha ses on hi gh v oltage side and a, b and c are t he corresponding terminals on low voltage side.

204

5. Tripping tests

6. Calibrate earthing resistance

7. Tap changing tests to check mechanism, indication, buzzer, lamp etc.

8. Insulation tests c) a) b) c) d)

Magnetic balance test.

High voltage.

Low voltage

Inter-tripping tests.

Winding temperature trips.

9. See that neutral earthing switches are closed before making alive.

10. Check transformers on equal

11. Set down relays before closing I advise control.

12. Load tests a) b) a)

On hi gh v oltage and l ow voltage windings.

On cu rrent and v oltage transformers, circuits etc.

For transformers in a taps before switching in bank. a) b) c) d)

Voltmeter, ammeters etc. on both high and low voltage side.

Over current.

No spill in high voltage star point.

No creeping of contacts on both high and l ow v oltage earth fault relays.

Voltage on relays. e)

The pow er f requency t est v oltage for the se condary winding sh all b e 2. 5 K V r ms. T he transformer shall be charged only after the tests are conducted and approval of all concerned local authorities obtained.

25.

CONTROL CONNECTIONS & INSTRUMENT AND WIRING TERMINAL BOARD AND

FUSES.

1. Normally no fuses shall be used anywhere. Instead of fuses, MCBs (both in AC & DC circuits) shall be used. Only in case where a MCB cannot replace a fuse due to system requirements, a HRC fuse can be accepted.

13. Advise control of any new equipment.

14. Low voltage excitation current.

15. Single phase, magnetic balance test.

205

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

All wiring co nnection, terminal boar ds, fuses/MCBs and l inks sh all be su itable for tropical atmosphere. Any wiring liable to be in contact with oil shall have oil resisting insulation and t he bar e ends of st randed wire sh all be s weated t ogether t o prevent seepage of oil along the wire.

Panel connections shall be neatly and squarely fixed to the panel. All instruments and panel wiring shall be run in PVC or non – rusting metal cleats of the compression type.

All wiring to a panel shall be taken from suitable terminal boards.

Where the conduits are used, the runs shall be l aid with suitable falls and the lowest parts of the run shall be external to the boxes. All conduit runs shall be adequately drained and ventilated. Conduits shall not be run at or below ground level.

When 400 v olt co nnections are taken t hrough junction box es or marshalling box es, they shall be adequately screened and 400 volts Danger Notice must be affixed to the outside of the junction boxes or marshalling box. Proper colour code for Red, Yellow,

Blue wires shall be followed.

All box wiring shall be in accordance with relevant IS. A ll wiring shall be of standard copper (48 strands) of 1100 Volt grade and size not less than 2.5 sq.mm.

7.

8.

9.

All wires on panel s and al l m ulti – core ca bles shall ha ve f errules, for easy identifications, which bear the same number at both ends, as indicated in the relevant drawing.

At t hose poi nts of i nterconnection be tween t he w iring ca rried out by se parate

Suppliers, where a change o f nu mber can no t be av oided double ferrules shall be provided on each wire. T he change of numbering shall be sh own on t he appropriate diagram of the equipment.

The same ferrule number shall not be used on wire in different circuits on the same panels.

10. Ferrules shall be of white insulation material and shall be provided with glossy finish to prevent the adhesion of dirt. They shall be clearly and dur ably marked in Black and shall not be affected by dampness or oil.

11. Stranded wire shall be terminated with tinned Ross Courtney terminals, claw washers or crimped tubular lugs. Separate washers shall be suited to the size of the wire terminated. Wiring shall, in general be accommodated on the sides of the box and the wires for each ci rcuit s hall be se parately gr ouped. B ack of panel w iring shall be arranged so that access to the connecting items of relay and other apparatus is not impeded.

12. All circuits in which the voltage exceeds 125 volts, shall be kept physically separated from the remaining wiring. The function of each circuit shall be marked on the associated terminal boards.

13. Where apparatus is mounted on panels all metal cases shall be separately earthed by means of stranded ( 48 nos.) co pper wire of strip having a cr oss section of not less than 2 sq.mm where strip is used, the joints shall be sweated. The copper wire shall have green coloured insulation for earth connections.

206

14. All wiring diagram for control & relay panel shall preferably be dr awn as viewed from the back and shall show the terminal boards arranged as in services.

15. Terminal bl ock r ows should be sp aced ade quately not l ess than 100 mm apar t t o permit convenient access to external cables and terminations.

16. Terminal blocks shall be place with respect to the cable gland (at a minimum distance of 200 mm) as to permit satisfactory arrangement of multi-core cable tails.

17. Terminal bl ock sh all hav e pai rs of t erminals for i ncoming and out going w ires.

Insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent connections. The height of the barriers and t he sp acing bet ween t erminals shall be su ch as to g ive adeq uate protection while allowing easy access to terminals. The terminals shall be adequately protected with insulating dust proof covers. No live metal shall be exposed at the back of the terminal boards. CT terminal shall have shorting facilities. T he terminals for

CTs should have provision to insert banana plugs and with isolating links.

18. All interconnecting wiring as per the final approved scheme between accessories of transformer and marshalling box is included in the scope of this specification and shall be done by the transformer supplier.

19. The schematic diagram shall be drawn and fixed under a transparent prospane sheet on the inner side of the marshalling box cover.

20. To avoid condensation in the marshalling box, a space heater shall be provided with an MCB and thermostat.

21. Suitable 11W, CFL light shall be provided in the marshalling box for lighting purpose.

26

RADIO INTERFERENCE AND NOISE LEVEL

Transformer shall be designed with particular care to suppress at least the third & fifth harmonic voltage so as to m inimize i nterference w ith co mmunication ci rcuits. Transformer noise level, when energized at normal voltage and frequency shall be as per NEMA stipulations.

27

PERFORMANCE

The performance of the transformer shall be measured on the following aspects:- i) The transformer shall be capable of being operated without danger on any tapping at the rated KVA with voltage variation of + 10% corresponding to the voltage of tapping. ii) The maximum flux density in any part of the cores and yokes at normal voltage and frequency shall be such that the flux density on any tap position with + 12.5% voltage variations and –5% frequency variations shall not exceed 1.9 weber /sq.m. iii) iv)

Radio interference and Noise level.

The transformer shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of third and fifth harmonics so as to minimize interference with communication circuits.

28

FAULT CONDITIONS

207

i) ii)

The transformer shall be capable of withstanding for two (2) seconds without damages any external short circuit to earth.

Transformer shall be capable of withstand thermal and mechanical stresses conveyed by symmetrical or asymmetrical fault on any winding. v) vi) iii) The method of test loading shall be de scribed in the test report for determination of both av erage and hot test sp ot temperature. Where t he w inding t emperature equipment is specified, data shall also be included for calibration of hottest spot temperature indicator. iv). Resistance of each winding of each phase shall be measured at principal and at all the taps and corrected to 75 Dec. C.

Impedance voltage shall be measured at principal and at all taps.

No load loss measurement at 415 volt. vii) Certified test report and oscillogram shall be furnished to the purchase / Consultant for evaluation as per the schedule of distribution of documents. The Supplier shall also evaluate the test result and rectify the defects in the equipment based on his and the purchaser’s evaluations o f t he t est w ithout an y ex tra ch arges to the pur chaser.

Manufacturer’s test ce rtificates in r espects of al l asso ciates auxiliary a nd anci llary equipment shall be furnished. viii) The bi dder sh all st ate i n hi s proposal t he t esting facilities available at hi s works.

Incase full t esting facilities are not av ailable, the bi dder sh all st ate t he m ethod proposed t o be adop ted so as to asce rtain t he t ransformer ch aracteristics corresponding to full capacity testing.

30

WITNESSING OF TESTS AND EXCESSIVE LOSSES

i) ii)

The purchaser and / or his representative reserve the right to witness any or all tests or to accord waiver at its sole discretion.

The pu rchaser reserves the r ight to r eject t he t ransformer i f l osses ex ceed t he declared losses beyond tolerance limits as per IS or if temperature rise of oil and winding exceed the values specified elsewhere.

31

COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT

All fittings and accessories, which may not be specifically mentioned in the specification but which are necessary.

33

ON LOAD VOLTAGE CONTROL

33.1 The transformer shall be pr ovided with O LTC e quipment for v arying i ts effective transformation ratio without phase displacement. The tap range shall be +5% to -15 % with steps of 1.25% on H V winding for adjustment of output voltage of LV side with variation HV input.

33.2 Each OLTC shall have local manual and local electrical control.

208

33.3 The cranking device for manual operation of OLTC gear shall be r emovable and su itable for operation by a man standing on ground level. The mechanism shall be complete with mechanical t ap posi tion i ndicator w hich sh all b e cl early v isible f rom n ear the transformer; mechanical oper ation c ounter and mechanical st oppers to p revent o ver cr anking o f the mechanism beyond the extreme position

33.4 The manual co ntrol co nsidered as backup to the m otor ope rated tap co ntrol shall be interlocked w ith t he m otor t o bl ock motor start up dur ing m anual ope ration. The manual operating m echanism s hall be l abeled t o sh ow the direction of operations for r aising t he secondary voltage and vice-versa.

33.5 The equipment sh all be su itable f or su pervisory co ntrol and i ndication. A m ulti-way s witch

(make before break after) having one fixed contact for each taps position shall be provided.

Supervisory indication for "TAP CHANGE INCOMPLETE” shall also be provided.

33.6 Only one t ap ch ange sh all be co mpleted at a time and co ntrol sw itch m ust r eturn t o off position for the next operation.

33.7 The equipment shall be su ch as to ensure that once a t ap change has been initiated it shall be completed independently of the operation of control relays & switches.

33.8 Adequate safeguard shall be provided for the transformer and auxiliary equipment in case of auxiliary supply failure leaving the tap change incomplete.

33.9 The mechanical and electrical indication of the number of tap in use shall be provided at the transformer.

33.10 All control and indicating gear shall be designed for 415 V, 3 phase, 4 wires and 50Hz supply subject to a variation of + 10% to – 20%.

33.11 Limit switches shall be provided in the circuit of motor to prevent over running of mechanism beyond minimum and maximum tap position in addition to a mechanical stop.

33.12 The motor and control circuit shall be p rovided with thermal protection. A ll relays fuses and switches shall be mounted in marshalling box or driver gear housing and clearly labeled.

33.13 A five digit counter shall be f itted to indicate the number of operations completed by the tap changer.

33.14 The main tap changing equipment shall be transition resistance type oil immersed. These oil compartments which contain current making or breaking contacts shall be kept under the conservator head by means of a pi pe connection from the highest point of compartment to conservator tank and controlled by suitable value. Any gas generated in it shall pass through single float gas and oil surge actuated relay to trip the transformer controlling current breaker in t he ev ent o f a fault i n t he OLTC tank mechanism. The co ntacts sh all be acce ssible for inspection without lowering oil level in the main tank and the contact tips shall be replaceable.

33.15 The oil in the current interrupting or making chamber shall not come in contact with oil in the main transformer tank or other than non-current interruption chamber.

33.16 Each compartment that is not maintained under the conservator head sh all be pr ovided with prismatic oil gauge.

33.17 A permanently legible lubricating chart shall be put in the driving mechanism chamber.

209

33.18 The following type and routine test shall be carried out on the On load tap changer and motor driven mechanism in accordance with IS: 8468 – 1977 or its latest version.

34 TESTS: ON LOAD TAP CHANGER

35

TYPE TESTS

Type test shall be performed on the samples of the relevant tap changer or components after their final development. The following shall constitute the type test. i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi)

Mechanical test

Auxiliary Circuit insulation test.

Tests for temperature rise of contacts.

Switching tests.

Short circuit test.

Transition impedance test. vii) Mechanical life test. viii) Di-electric test.

ROUTINE TESTS

The following shall constitute the routine test. i) ii)

Mechanical test

Auxiliary Circuit insulation test.

III) Di-electric test. b) c) d) e)

MOTOR DRIVEN MECHANISM

TYPE TESTS

The following shall constitute the type test. a) Mechanical tests

Auxiliary circuit insulation test.

Mechanical load test.

Over run tests.

Protection of Motor Driver Cubicle.

ROUTINE TESTS

The following shall constitute the routine tests. a) b)

Mechanical tests

Auxiliary circuit insulation tests.

35 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION

The v endor sh all f urnish f ollowing dr awings/documents in acco rdance w ith encl osed requirement. a) General arrangement of Transformer. b) General arrangement of HV cable box with connection diagram.

210

c) General arrangement of LV cable box and connection arrangement. d) General arrangement of marshalling box and wiring diagram. e) Rating and diagram plate indicating % impedance etc. f) Type tests certificates and guaranteed technical parameters.

36 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM

Quality Assurance Program shall follow the requirements of Owner/ Consultant as applicable.

Quality A ssurance P rogram i nvolvement w ill co mmence a t enq uiry and f ollow t hrough t o completion and acceptance thus ensuring total conformity to Purchaser’s requirements.

Technical specifications of Fire Detection Alarm System

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION:

A. The work shall consist of furnishing, installation , testing & commissioning of a complete high quality advanced technology early detection Intelligent Analogue Soft Addressable fire alarm system as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCES FOR INSTALLATION:

German Standards VDE (Verband Deutcher Electrotechniker)

DIN VDE14675 and VDE 0833 Fire Alarm Systems

NFPA- National Fire Protection Association

NFPA 72

British Standard Institute / European Standards All Applicable codes and standards including BS EN 54

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) – USA

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product dat a for fire alarm sy stem co mponents including di mensioned pl ans, se ctions, an d elevations showing m inimum cl earances, i nstalled features and dev ices, and l ist of materials and data.

B. Shop drawings.

C. System oper ation descr iption i ncluding m ethod of ope ration and su pervision of each t ype o f circuit and se quence of operations for all m anually and aut omatically initiated system inputs.

Description shall cover this specific project

D. Product certification signed by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system components certifying that their products comply w ith any one o f t he r eferenced st andards, co mpletely w ith specifications and Vds approval or equal

211

1.04 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:

A. All t he co mponents of fire alarm system sh all be pr ovided in m anufacturer’s original new and unopened packing bearing manufacturer’s name and label.

B. Store materials, not in actual use, in covered and well ventilated area and protect them from dirt, dust, moisture, direct sunlight and extreme temperatures.

C. For further r equirements follow m anufacturer’s wrtten instructions regarding storage and handling.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Submit w ritten guarantee si gned by t he co ntractor, manufacturer and installer o f fire al arm system for the per iod o f 1 y ear f rom t he dat e o f su bstantial co mpletion. T he guarantee sh all cover the repair and r eplacement of material with manufacturing defects and w orkmanship as directed by the engineer.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Fi rms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire alarm systems and components, whose products have been i n satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 3 years period, and be subject to approval of engineer.

B. Installer Q ualifications: An ex perienced sp ecialist su b-contractor w ho is authorized b y t he system manufacturer, and subject to approval of the engineer.

C. All the components and installations shall comply with the requirements of DIN VDE 14675 &

VDE 0833 for design & installation.

D. Provide system and components specified in this section that are listed and approved by Vds

& confrom to equivalent DIN/EN standards.

E. Single so urce r esponsibility: All co mponents and acce ssories shall be pr oduct o f signle manufacturer.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:

A. The fire detection and alarm system sh all co mprise o f Automatic Soft Addressable Modular design main fire alarm control panels, Dual optical smoke & heat MULTI Sensors , Blue LED

Optical Smoke & Heat MULTI Sensors, Optical Smoke / Heat/ CO Gas MULTI sensors, Loop powered D ual O ptical Smoke/Heat se nsor w ith i ntegral S ounder / Fl asher / S peech uni ts, manual ca ll points, electronic wall m ounted Alarm so under/flasher/speech co mbined devices,

Transponder interface units, each with its own short circuit built-in isolators. All loop cabling and any other components and accessories deemed necessary for a safe, reliable and satisfactory system shall conform to the relevant and applicable requirements and recommendations of DIN

EN 54. The system shall be f ully programmed to accommodate fire alarm zones. The system shall be co nfigured to allow on si te modifications with the minimum of disruption using the PC based software to facilitate future changes or alterations to existing buildings/network on site.

212

B. The fire alarm and detection system shall provide the following facilities as a minimum:

The system shall be intelligent in operation with advanced decentralised intelligence technology. Each detector shall have its own procesor with algorithms built in the device to take a f ire or f ault decision. S ystem with ce ntarlised i ntelligence by pr oviding si gnal l evels to t he control panel are not acceptable.The system will be capable of providing fire, fault disablement and supervisory monitoring facilities as required by DIN EN 54 Pt 2. All devices on a loop shall have bui lt i n S HORT C IRCUIT LI NE I SOLATORS f or w iring fault i solation t o pr otect t he system. “Group Circuit Monitors” which isolate/protect sections of a loop circuit, i.e. a group of field devices are not acceptable.All system components and devices shall be connected to twowire l oop ci rcuits (as shown i n t he t ypical sch ematics) w ith each co mponent hav ing i ts own individual built-in isolator, should have sensors with integrated sounder in a sa me unit and no extra ca bling sh ould r equire t o pow er up t he sounder. R emoval or di sconnection o f any component from the loop shall not affect the functioning and performance of other components and the system. Please note that the group isolators, which are used to isolate a section of a loop in case of fault, are not acceptable.System shall be of automatically addressable type i.e. all the devices on the loops of the FACP shall be allocated addresses automatically from the

PC / panel at the time of system power. The loop devices shall also be able to commission by using PC inteface without the need of FACP.And also given an address during commissioning, the value of which shall be stored in non-volatile memory, within the electronics module of the outstation. This value shall be read during loop allocation and provided it is valid shall be used to setup the outstations primary address.Automatic Addressing shall cover the benefits of Soft

Addressing and al so ov ercome the l imitations of H ard A ddressing. This means that I f t he devices are i nserted or r emoved al l t he ex isting dev ices shall k eep t he sa me addr ess and programmed activations and use labels remain unch anged. The panel with PC sh all allocate the address to ensure that it is impossible for two devices to have the same addr ess. Fire

Detection and A larm S ystems, w hich r ely onl y on C oding , P rogrammer or har d addr essing techniques are not acceptable.

Facilities shall be pr ovided t o co nstantly m onitor and ch eck the following ci rcuits and fault conditions:

- The power supply to the loop /s;

- For open-circuit, short-circuit, earth fault and any other fault condition in the loop wiring;

-

-

For communication failure and errors in all cards and loops

For faults in keyboard and printer circuits,All devices, etc. shall be installed on the same loop.In case of fire, fault or warning, the label of device sensing threshold shall appear on visual display unit of the panel.Any event i.e. Fire, fault or warning shall be recorded with time, date and place of occurrence in the memory of FACP. Provision shall be done at the fire alarm control panels to silence the loop powered alarm sounders but the visual indication shall remain until the system is reset. The detectors shall have auto learn sensitivity adjustements. The main fire alarm control panels shall be located as shown on the schematics and the floor drawings.

2.01 GENERAL

A. All major component of fire alarm system shall be product of a single manufacturer and shall conform to the requirement of EN54, Vds approved and be designed acc. to DIN VDE14675 and V DE 0833 Fi re Alarm Sy stems CODE O F PR ACTICE F OR SYST EM D ESIGN,

INSTALLATION AND SERVICING.

B. The power supply breakers for FDA system shall be marked “ DO NOT DISCONNECT. FIRE

ALARM SUPPLY”

213

2.03 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)

A. In the event of a fire being reported from the smoke/heat Detectors, activation of manual call points or sp rinkler ope ration t he se quence o f a larm oper ation sh all be as follows: I f a fire condition i s reported from a sm oke det ector t hen t he ev acuation will be done i nitially by the local integral sounder. Then after a ce rtain delay (to be agr eed at the time of commissioning) the evacuation message shall be announced on that fire zone only. If after 3 minutes the alarm has not been ack nowledged, t he evacuation m essage sh all also be an nounced on t he ot her adjacent z ones. A ll ot her z ones shall be g iven t he A lert m essage. The ev acuation o f t he building shall be staged in phases to allow orderly movement of people.

B. If a M anual B reak G lass Unit i s activated or a sp rinkler flow sw itch is oper ated, then t he evacuation shall be transmitted immediately to the affected fire zone plus the adjacent zones.

C. Activation of the fire alarm system shall directly initiate some or all of the following to be agreed as a part of the overall engineering policy.

• Signal to all elevator machine rooms indicating fire status (to control lifts)

• Release doors normally locked by magnetic devices.

• Release doors normally held open by magnetic devices

Shutdown mechanical equipment ventilation plant

Shutdown general exhaust fans

Start up smoke extract fans

Start up exhaust make up fans

Start up stair vestibule pressurization fans

Automatically operate fire dampers

Initiate alert signals to panels in the adjacent office tower.

• Sprinkler valves, flow switches and other monitored valves shall be directly supervised by the fire alarm systems.

These shall include but not limited to the following:

• Building automation system via WINMAG OPC

• Emergency lighting system

• Security system.

2.04 SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND DEVICES

FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL:

A. The panel shall be modular Multifunctional computer controlled using

32 bit processor. Decentralised control and monitoring functions to be realised on the loop and spur.. The panel shall be complete with, but not limited to, the following elements:

1) Visual display unit capable of displaying 8 lines 40 characters backlit display / ¼ VGA display as optional.

2) Built-in optional 40 character internalprotocol thermal printer or external.

3) Built-in full numeric keyboard with function keys.

4) 64 Single Zone Indicator expandable upto 192 SZI

5) Keyswitch to prevent unauthorised operation of keypad.

6) Integral se aled l ead aci d bat tery and ch arger, with 24 hour bac k up i n t he ev ent o f su pply mains failure.

7) Essential controls – Delay, panel reset, Audible alarm off, Disconnect master box, additional messages, v erify/cancel f ault buz zer. Fi re, P re-Alarm, Trouble, D isconnection l amps. E ach lamp shall also have appropriate indication (Releasing Systems activated, Master box, Delay ,

214

-

-

-

-

Verify, CP U f ailure, Inoperation nor mal co ndition & f ailure o f pow ersupply / bat tery) S imple menu driven function keys with password protection shall allow users to an extensive range of software based features such as:

- Overview

- Service

- Time functions

- Informations

-

-

- Last 10000 system events

Current fault and warning logs.

Interrogation of sensor cleanliness

On/Off, Enable/ disable sensors, zones, sounders, interface unit channels.

Status of detectors

Alarm counters

Printer on, off, line feed and test facilities.

8) All control buttons and keyboard shall be enclosed behind a lockable cover, Up to 127 device capacity per 3.5km loop and a TTY/ RS 485 communication option.

9) In addi tion to the abov e, al l ot her nece ssary controls, el ements and accessories shall be included to provide a co mplete and efficient panel conforming to the requirements of DIN EN

54.

10) LOOP PARAMETERS:

Individual loop circuits will be capable of accommodating the following.

Up to a maximum of 127 addressable devices on 3.5 kms loop length

Up to 32 loop powered IQ8 Alarm addressable Sounders.

Up to 32 loop powered IQ8 Alarm electronic Strobes.

Up to 32 loop powered combined electronic sounders and strobes

Up to 80 sensors with integral alarm sounder

The detection loop shall have the ability to support both sensors and sounders connected on the same 2 core loop circuit.

Up to 127 loop powered input modules.

Should have the ability to spur off the detection loop without using ‘T’ breaker devices, without any degradation.

2.05 CENTRAL GRAPHICS SUPERVISOR COMPUTER:

The graphic visual display shall pictorially represent Fire, Fault and Emergency events on a visual display unit (VDU). The purpose of this facility shall be to provide the operator with the additional visual information over and above the text provided. All system events i.e. fire, fault and warning shall be automatically printed onto the graphics printer. Operation of the graphics terminal shall normally be by selection of the appropriate pages guided by a navigation system.

However, it shall automatically track to the relevant initiating device f or the f irst occurrence of each type of the event. The graphics terminal shall provide the following:

DUAL LANGUAGE ENGLISH / ARABIC.

Single Station version

Multi Station Version

Multi Networks

215

Modem Interface

Communications shall be bi-directional

Free programming of alarm programs and alarm condition through SIA programming

Software shall have software interface using drivers with:

Intruder Alarm Panels

Fire Alarm Panels

Video System

Access Control System

Web Function: PC on Intranet/Internet using a common Web-browser shall be able to access the software with password.

Notification: Software shall be capable of transmitting text and voice messages to specific devices like cell phones, pagers etc.

Escalation: S oftware sh all be ca pable of st arting esca lation act ion i f w ithin ce rtain/configured time period the notification is not acknowledged.

Integration of IP telephony shall be possible at least with ALCATEL to have innovative linking of telephony via IQ phone enabling the end-user devices to be used as multifunctional operating and display terminals with variable adaptation of applications.

HTML View: Applications such as Video streaming or BMS programs which have a Web server availble shall be visualised clearly by Supervisor Software browser window USING Supervisor

Interface.

Events display/status bar giving a clear and concise view of the current events on the fire alarm system, Intrusion CCTV or ACCESS control.

Ability to control and change the following:

Disable actions

Labels & Auxiliary text

• User Action buttons

• Historic data of all the system events

• Access levels/passwords to target specific levels of access to specific users

• Graphical representation (if required) of the site allowing the exact location of the fire alarm events, e.g., fires, faults etc.

Panel remote buzzer cancellation

Event acknowledgement

Clock synchronization with panels with local adjustment facility

Touch screen support

The terminal shall assign a number of different graphic pages to each fire event – from a site overview of building layout, through a floor layout, breaking the site down into increasing levels of detail. Number of graphic pages required shall be f inally determined by the client/consultant.

For tender assume 4 pages per floor, based on the drawings produced on AutoCAD by the

Contractor. The sy stem sh all oper ate on t he Windows environment. The pl atform specification required is an IBM PC compatible with the following minimum specifications.

Pentium IV Processor , 1GHz speed

256 MB RAM, 1 GB Hard Disk

XGA-graphic card with min. 4 MB video memory

Minimum 14 super VGA color screen

Two serial ports and two parallel ports & Real time clock

3.5 inch 1.44-MB floppy disk

CD RW & Microsoft mouse

216

-

-

-

-

The co mbined text and gr aphics package s hall be pr ovided on t he s ame su pervisor. The supervisor with touch screen is recommended.

2.06 SYSTEM EVENT PRINTER

A. The system printer shall be 40 character thermal printer optional in-built on the main control panel, and shall log all events, change of status, alarm and fault messages along with time of the day and date. An external 80 couloumn dot matrix printer along with system PC is also

-

recommended.

The printer shall provide the following:

Hard copy of every event occurring

Status read out of every addressable point

Devices tested on a walk test

Contaminated detectors needing replacement

Single point scan printout of analogue values

Hard copy of historic log.

2.07 FIELD DETECTION DEVICES

GENERAL: ANALOGUE DETECTORS & BASES

All analogue detectors and bases shall be provided by the same manufacturer of the control system.

No ot her make o f detectors will be permissible.All ana logue detectors shall have real inteligence itself. T his means even without control panel t he det ector ca n make decision, adapt to di fferent enviremental co ndition and di agnose,itself. They sh all ha ve dece ntalised i ntelligence , aut omatic function self test, CPU failure,mode, alarm and operating data memory and integrated short circuit line isolators.The detector bases for interfacing between the loop wiring and t he detector head shall be manufactured by means of injection moulded ABS plastic coloured white and shall not contain any electronics for addressing. The base fixings should be suitable for any industry ,standard BESA or co nduit box es. A ll b ases shall i nclude t he option t o pr ovide a pr ogrammable r elay out put f or interfacing, providing a dry contact for third party. All bases shall be provided with a plastic removable dust cover for protection during site construction as well as an IP rated sealing gasket to prevent dirt and m oisture from en tering t hrough from the fixing su rface. each bas e sh all i nclude a l ock a nd removal of locked detectors shall be achievable only through the use of the appropriate removal tools as specified by the manufacturer of the detectors. Detectors removal tools are to be handed over on completion of the co ntract as part of the sp are parts to t he client. Removal of a det ector from it’s associated base shall not a ffect t he co ntinuity of t he det ection l oop. The Fi re al arm m anufacturer shall have the complete range of following analogue

ADDRESSABLE det ectors with dece ntalised intelligence as standard so as to m eet t he sp ecific applications of the site.Heat Detectors ( fixed & ROR temperature ) a) Optical Smoke Detector b) Optical Smoke & Heat Detector c) Dual angle Optical/Heat Detector d) Blue Light Optical / Heat Smoke Detector e) Optical Smoke, Heat & CO gas Detector f) Optical Smoke detector with integral Sounder g) Dual angle Optical/Heat detector with integral Flasher h) Dual angle Optical/Heat detector with integral Sounder i) Dual angle Optical/Heat detector with integral Speech Sounder j) Dual angle Optical/Heat detector with integral Flasher and integral speech sounder k) Duct mounted sensor

217

l) Radio Frequency wireless analogue detectors m) Manual Call Points

All of t he abov e sh all be co mpatible w ith t he af orementioned base providing i nter-changeability between detector heads, without the requirement for switch settings. All detectors shall also have an integral short circuit isolator, which in the event of a single cable fault will isolate the “culprit” piece of cable and retain all devices on the loop operationally.Each detector shall possess two integral LED giving a r ed flashing indication f or fire and green f or normal operation. For remote locations, each detector shall be capable of connection to a remote LED unit by means of 2 core wire connection.Detectors shall be white in colour and manufactured from ABS plastic. All electronics and associated se nsing el ements will be house d within t his unit, t hese co mponents being her mitically sealed to prevent their operation from being impaired by dust, dirt and humidity.The sensitivity off all detectors shall be adjustable from a software. It shall be possible to programme detector se nsor sensitivity d irectly on t he l oop usi ng i nterface w ith a l aptop P C and appr opriate pr ogramming software from manufacturer.For M ULTI S ENSOR det ectors, di sablement o f each se nsor el ement shall be possi ble individually or f or w hole loop. A lso t his disablement feature sh all be possi ble t o have manually or time / event controlled.All detectors shall be provided with a plastic removable dust cover for protection during site construction.A semi-flush recessing kit for analogue detectors shall be available for each detector type incorporating the standard detector base.

2.07 (a) HEAT DETECTORS

Install as shown in the drawings.These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 5 and shall be VdS approved. This shall be a dedi cated heat only detector to provide fixed temperature heat as well as rate of rise sensing. It should be fully compliant with EN54 part 5 to provide grades of A1.

2.07 (b) OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTOR:

Install as shown in the drawings .Analogue Addressable Optical Smoke Detectors. These shall be of

Automatic addressable Optical type with inbuilt isolator in a si ngle head. The optical element shall detect visible smoke from slow smoldering fires. Smoke sensing design shall comply with EN 54 part

7 and shall be VdS approved. It shall have microprocessors, short-circuit isolators and all electronic components and circuitry suitable for an Analogue addressable system. The detectors shall also have 360 degree viewing LED fire indicator. Detectors mounted in the false ceilings shall be provided with semi flush mounting kits.

2.07 (c) OPTICAL SMOKE /HEAT DETECTOR

Install as shown in the drawings .These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 5 & 7 and shall be V dS appr oved. T hese detectors sh all hav e co mbined t wo i ndividual se nsing el ements t o provide excellent cover for both types of fires (slow smoldering & fast free burning fires). These detectors shall be of Automatic addressable Combined Optical/Heat type with inbuilt isolator i n a single head. Optical sensing shall be carried out by means of an Infra-red LED transmitting a pulse of l ight acr oss an obt use ang led ch amber & heat se nsing sh all be c arried out by a t hermistor, sampling the surrounding environmental temperature.

2.07 (d) DUAL ANGLE OPTICAL/HEAT DETECTOR

Install as shown in the drawings .These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 5 & 7 and shall be V dS appr oved. This device sh all co mbine t wo i ndividual s ensing el ements to pr ovide excellent co ver for bo th “ types” o f fires. ( Slow sm ouldering and fast free bur ning).OPTICAL

218

SENSING: Sh all be carried out by i nfra-red LED transmitters acr oss 2 separate Optical detection angles. This sensor shall process both the forward and backward scattered Light caused by entering the detection chamber of device, allowing the detector to Differentiate between real smoke and nonsmoke particles e.g. Steam & Dust. HEAT SENSING: Shall be carried out by a thermistor, sampling the surrounding environmental temperature.

2.07 (e) Blue-light OPTICAL SMOKE / HEAT DETECTOR

Install as shown in the drawings. These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 5 & 7. The optical measurement chamber shall be provided with latest developed blue LED sensor technology , enabling the detection of open fire, smouldering fires and fires with high heat generation ( Invisible smoke sensing ). These detectors shall be capable of identifying the TF1 & TF6 test fires described in EN 54-9 specifications. These detectors shall be intellIgent with time related signal analysis, signal correlation o f se nsor da ta & dece ntalised, HEAT SEN SING: Sh all be c arried out by a t hermistor, sampling the surrounding environmental temperature.

2.07 (f) OPTICAL SMOKE / HEAT / CO DETECTOR

Install as shown in the drawings .These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 5 & 7.The sensor el ement o f t he optical/heat det ector w ith C O sh all be as per t he sp ecification f or t he optical/heat detector. The CO element shall be i ncorporated into the optical chamber to sense t he presence of carbon monoxide gas emissions from smouldering fires. In normal environments the CO element shall have a life expectancy of a minimum of 5 years.

2.07 (g) OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTOR WITH INTEGRAL SOUNDER

Install as shown i n t he dr awings (Hotel guest rooms / su its ) .These sh all co mply w ith t he requirements of EN 54: Part 3 & 7. The sensor element of the optical detector sounder shall be as per the specification for the optical smoke detector, however the device shall incorporate an internal electronic sounder.

The internal electronic sounder shall be an integral part of the detection device comprising of a piezo sounder output device providing the low and hi gh frequency output.The combined detector sounder shall pr ovide a so und pressure level of 92dB A at 1 m etre. The audi ble v olume l evels shall be individually selectable for each device and there should also be a co nfigurable soft start feature that ramps up the volume gradually rather than switching on at full level.

It shall be possible to connect a maximum of 80 combined detector sounders to a detection loop.A minimum of 19 D ifferent tone types are stored in the detector sounders. Upto 4 di fferent tone types shall be combined in a signal set and activated in case of alarm. Individual detector sounder volume levels shall be adj ustable at t he m ain co ntrol panel or via t he use of t he r emote pr ogrammer unit coupled with a laptop PC and appropriate programming software from the manufacturer. Activation of the sounder shall be independent of the detection of a fire condition by the sensing element. All sounder outputs shall be synchronized with all other loop powered detector sounder devices and other loop powered audible visual units on the panel.

Each sounder shall have its own microcomputer to handle loop ommunications, which along with all other associated electronic components will be hermetically sealed to provide protection from hostile operating environments.

2.07 (h) DUAL ANGLE OPTICAL/HEAT DETECTOR WITH FLASHER

219

2.08 Install as shown in the drawings .These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54:

Part 5 & 7.

The sensor element of the dual angle optical/heat detector flasher shall be as per the specification for the dual angle optical/heat detector.The integral flasher element shall utilise a high power red LED for strobe effect. LED pulsing shall be synchronised with all other loop powered audible visual units located on the fire alarm and det ection panel. The flasher LED shall be fault monitored for working operation. It shall be possible to connect a maximum of 48 combined dual angle optical/heat detector flasher to a de tection loop.Activation of the flashers shall be i ndependent of the detection of a fire condition by t he se nsing el ement.Each flasher shall ha ve i ts own m icrocomputer t o handl e l oop communications, w hich al ong w ith al l ot her ass ociated el ectronic components will be her metically sealed to provide protection from hostile operating environments.

2.07 (i) DUAL ANGLE OPTICAL/HEAT DETECTOR WITH INTEGRAL SOUNDER

Install as shown in the drawings .These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 3,5 & 7.

The sensor element of the dual angle optical/heat detector sounder sounder shall be as per the specification for the dual angle optical/heat detector.The sounder element of the dual angle optical/ heat det ctor so under. sh all be as per t he sp ecification for t he opt ical sm oke det ector with integral sounder.It shall be possi ble to connect a m aximum of 80 co mbined dual angle optical/heat detector sounder to a detection loop.

2.07 (j) DUAL ANGLE OPTICAL/HEAT DETECTOR WITH INTEGRAL SPEECH

SOUNDER.

Install as shown in the drawings .These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 3,5 & 7.

The se nsor el ement o f t he dual ang le opt ical/heat de tector w ith sp eech sh all be as per t he specification for the dual angle optical/heat detector.The speech function shall be provided by stored messages on a non-volatile flash memory component. Output from the flash memory processor shall be up to 25 seconds of speech. Additionally there shall be t he capability to provide complex tones, such as bell and DIN tones. Each device shall include 5 standard messages in 5 languages within the flash memory component. At least 4 signal parts (consisting of tones and speech) shall be set into one signal-set. At least 2 signal sets can be programmed for 2 different events, e.g. evacuation and alert.In addition to the voice messages above, an 8 Inch solenoid bell recording shall be provided as a standard complex tone.

All sp eech out puts sh all be synchronised w ith al l ot her l oop pow ered se nsor sp eech dev ices and other loop powered audible visual units on the panel.

It shall be possible to connect a maximum of 32 combined dual angle optical/heat detector strobes with sounder speech to a detection loop.

2.07 (k) DUAL ANGLE OPTICAL/HEAT DETECTOR WITH INTEGRAL FLASHER AND SPEECH

SOUNDER.

Install as shown in the drawings .These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 3,5 & 7.

The sensor element of the dual angle optical/heat detector with Flasher and Speech sounder shall be as per the specification for the dual angle optical/heat sensor.The sounder element of the dual angle optical/heat detector with Flasher and S peech sounder shall be as per the specification for the dual angel optical/heat sensor sounder.The integral strobe element of the dual angle optical/heat detector with Fl asher and S peech so under sh all be as per t he sp ecification for t he dual ang el opt ical/heat

220

sensor strobe.The speech function shall be provided by stored messages on a non -volatile flash memory component. Output from the flash memory processor shall be up to 25 seconds of speech.

Additionally there shall be the capability to provide complex tones, such as bell and DIN tones. Each device sh all i nclude 5 st andard messages in 5 l anguages within t he flash m emory co mponent. At least 4 signal parts (consisting of tones and speech) can be set into one signal-set. At least 2 signal sets can be pr ogrammed for 2 di fferent ev ents, e .g. ev acuation and al ert.As st andard, t he microprocessor shall contain the following messages:

Evacuation: Alarm

Message 1 (Voice)

“This is a fire alarm. Please leave the building immediately by nearest available exit”

Evacuation: (Voice) “Attention please”

Evacuation

Alarm Message 2:

(Voice)

“This is an emergency. Please leave the building immediately by the nearest available exit”

“ An incident has been reported in the building. Please await further instructions”

Alert Message

Clear Message:

(Voice)

Test Message

“The emergency is now cancelled. We apologize for any inconvenience”

“This is a test message, no action is required”

All t he v oice m essages sh all be sy nchronised acr oss the det ection l oops by m eans of a regular sy nchronisation signal generated by t he fire al arm co ntrol pane l.In addi tion t o the voice m essages above, an 8 I nch so lenoid bel l r ecording sh all be pr ovided as a st andard complex tone. All speech outputs shall be synchronised with all other loop powered sensor speech devices and other loop powered audible visual units on the panel.It shall be possible to connect a maximum of 32 combined dual angle optical/heat detector strobes with sounder speech to a detection loop.

2.07 (l) DUCT MOUNTED SENSORS

Venturi principle air duct detector kit shall be used. The kit with IP 54 protection ABS plastic with filters shall be munted outside airducts. The venturi tube dips into the air duct. The airspeed in the duct shall not exceed 1 m/s to max 20 m/s. This device shall employ the aforementioned Optical/Heat detector to provide environmental information. Probes are fitted to pick up smoke in ventilation ducts.

This unit is particularly suitable for sensing smoke particles in ducting which is likely to be in large quantity and flowing fairly quickly.

2.07 (m) RADIO FREQUENCY WIRELESS ANALOGUE DETECTORS:

Wireless Devices:

Communication between the RF devices shall be set up via a dual band transmission mode. The

RF-technology sh all appl y f requency hoppi ng to enabl e hi ghest t ransmission se curity. In ca se o f interference, the frequency band and the radio communication channels, shall automatically modify.

221

If the entire band and the receiver are blocked due to high interference level, a fault signal shall be transmitted to the fire alarm panel. Thus, secure and reliable wireless transmission is provided. The transmission range in open air shall be up to 300m. Inside the building, the transmission range can vary, depending on bui lding structure, wall t hickness or use of concrete steel.The wireless detector base shall enable connection of detector types Heat, Optical, Dual Angle Optical and Optical Heat with CO via a wireless transmission line to the field bus. Each intelligent detector with wireless detector base shall be addressable as a bus device via the transponder or gateway for RF devices.

It sh all have f ollowing f eatures: Individual det ector i dentification on t he co ntrol panel Regular functionality check for each detector (alarm and operation di splay on t he detector) A larm and fault transmission in accordance with EN 54-2

Easy detector or battery replacement with detector removal tool

Fault signal when the mounted wireless base and the inserted detector are removed

Permanent monitoring of battery voltage

Up to 5 years battery lifetime depending on the detector type and environmental conditions

The transponder shall be suitable for wall mounting and for communication with up to 32 RF devices, which can be w ireless detector bases with different types of intelligent automatic fire detectors.The detector base shall allow integration of intelligent automatic detectors as bus devices with individual addressing v ia t he t ransponder. U p t o 10 t ransponders ca n be op erated on one l oop. The transponder shall be linked with the loop as well as with a conventional detector zone or it should be operated as a stand-alone uni t. P otential-free outputs for co mmon f ault and common f ire ar e available.

2.07 (n) MANUAL CALL POINTS

Install as shown in the drawings. The manual initiation devices shall be electrically compatible with all of the aforementioned det ector t ypes and sh all be co mplete w ith al l-electronic components and circuitry for an au tomatic safe addressable device. The manual call point shall have an inbuilt short circuit isolator and an inbuilt microprocessor to ensure a response time of less than 1 second.The

MCP unit shall also handle all communication to the control panel. A ll electronic devices contained within t he MCP sh all b e her metically se aled s o as to pr event dam age f rom hos tile env ironment conditions: e.g dust with minium rating of IP43. The MCP operating voltage shall be 8-42 volts DC,

RED si milar t o R AL 30 20. I f the M CP ar e l ocated i n publ ic areas a transparent co ver sh all be provided as a pr otection t p pr event i nadvertent act ivation. M CP sh all be av ailable i n t wo desi gns

Large & sm all for aes theticpurposes to a rchitects.The M CP sh all hav e an i nput faclity t o co nnect conventional devices. It should have an option of using either frangible glass allowing for complete removal upon operation or plastic pane resettable function. There shall be no text but SYMBOLS on the MCP ( burning house / press to break ).The device can be tested functionally without the need to either r emove t he front co ver and/ or br eaking t he g lass, w ith a sp ecial t est k ey ( supplied as standard). The key sh all i nsert t he under side o f t he M CP ensu ring eas y acce ss of t he key at al l times.These devices will comply fully with EN 54 part 1.

2.08 FIELD ALARM DEVICES

Electronic sounders, combined sounder/strobe and standalone strobes shall be loop powered for direct connection to the 2 core detection loop shall be electrically compatible with all initiation devices. These wall mounted units shall be available in red or white and suitable for both indoor and outdoor applications with an ingress protection rating of IP31 and IP65 respectively.

All el ectronic sounders, so under/strobe and strobe onl y v ersions shall ha ve al arm si gnals synchronised across all the detection loops of the fire alarm control panel.

222

a) b) c) d)

All alarm devices shall have a short circuit isolation device provided as an integral component of the device.All sounders shall have a ‘soft start’ feature controlled by the fire alarm panel, whereby a low initial volume can be set and t hen increased at a def ined rate upto a m aximum volume setting.All alarm devices shall be provided by the same manufacturer of the control system. No other make of detectors will be permissible The Fire alarm manufacturer shall have the complete range of following alarm devices with built in short circuit line isolators so as to meet the specific applications of the site.

Addressable Sounder

Addressable Flasher

Addressable Sounder / Flasher

Addressable Speech Sounder

Addressable Sounder / Flasher / Speech

2.08 (a) ADDRESSABLE ALARM SOUNDER

Alarm so unders shall be ca pable of pr oviding a m inimum so und l evel of 97dB A ± 2 dB A @ 1 meter.The sounder shall be ca pable o f p roviding 4 di fferent so und si gnals, w hich ar e S elected/ configured from 19 tone types stored in the device.

Each sounder shall include its own microprocessor to handle loop communications and monitoring of the i nternal so und el ement dur ing an al arm co ndition. This shall allow f aulty dev ices to be automatically identified during the weekly test procedure. All associated electronic components shall be hermetically sealed to provide protection from hostile operating environments.

It shall be possible to connect upto 32 Addressable Alarm sounders to each detection loop of the fire alarm control panel. These devices will comply fully with EN 54 part 3.

2.08 (b) ADDRESSABLE FLASHER

The electronic flasher shall be l oop po wered su itable f or direct connection t o t he 2 co re detection loop. The device shall have a matrix of high brightness LED's. The frequency of the electronic flasher light output shall be 1Hz, low current consumption of 5mAmp at 42 VDC providing a max 24 cd peak

/ 3.87 cd effective similar to 3 Watts xenon flash light. Flashers shall have built in short circuit line isolators and an i ngress protection r ating o f I P31 or I P65 w ith acc essories.The uni t sh all be manufactured from ABS plastic with a olycarbonate lens. Body and lens colour options shall be as follows:

Red body / red lensWhite body / transparent, blue and green lens

• White body / amber lens

Each electronic flasher shall include i ts own m icroprocessor to handl e loop co mmunications and monitoring of the internal strobe element for faults in both the quiescent and alarm conditions. The internal circuit assembly and all other associated electronic components shall be Hermetically sealed to provide protection from hostile operating environments.These devices for direct connection to the detection loop. It shall be possible to connect upto 32 electronic flashers to each detection loop of the fire alarm control panel.

2.08 ( c ) ADDRESSABLE SOUNDER / FLASHER

A combined electronic sounder and f lasher shall be ca pable of providing a m inimum sound level of

97dBA ± 2dBA @ 1 metre.The sounder shall be apable of providing 4 different sound signals which are se lected/configured from 19 tone t ypes store i n the dev ice.The uni t sh all hav e i ts own

223

microprocessor to handle oop communications and monitoring of the internal flasher element for faults in both the quiescent and alarm conditions. The microprocessor shall also monitor the sound producing el ement dur ing an al arm co ndition t o ensu re t hat faulty dev ices can be aut omatically identified during the weekly test procedure.

All associated electronic components shall be her metically sealed to provide protection from hostile operating env ironments.The frequency of the el ectronic flasher l ight out put sh all be 1H z T he uni t shall be manufactured from ABS plastic with a polycarbonate lens. Body and lens colour shall be Red body / r ed l ens. T hese dev ices shall a llow f or direct co nnection t o t he det ection l oop. I t sh all be possible to connect upto 32 co mbined electronic sounder/flasher to each detection loop of the fire alarm control panel.

2.08 (d) ADDRESSABE SPEECH SOUNDERS

The so under uni t sh all incorporate a microprocessor w hich has up t o 25 se conds of av ailable storage space to be used for voice messages or a complex tone (for example, a bell tone in the event of al arm or su pervisory co ndition).As standard, t he m icroprocessor shall co ntain t he f ollowing messages:

Evacuation: Alarm

Message 1 (Voice)

“This is a fire alarm. Please leave the building immediately by nearest availabe exit”

Evacuation: (Voice) “Attention please”

Evacuation

Alarm M essage 2:

(Voice)

“This is an emergency. Please leave the building immediately by the nearest available exit”

“ A n i ncident has been reported i n t he bui lding. P lease await further instructions”

Alert Message

Clear M

essage:

(Female Voice)

Test Message

“The em ergency i s now ca ncelled. We apol ogise for any inconvenience”

“This is a test message, no action is required”

All the voice messages shall be synchronized across the detection loops by means of a regular synchronisation si gnal gener ated by t he f ire al arm co ntrol panel . A t est of t he m essage st orage device shall be ca rried out by the fire alarm control panel once an hour. Should the sounder fail to produce t he r equired tone q uality of so und out put, t hen a fault i ndication sh all be pr ovided at the control panel. It shall be possible to connect upto 32 Addressable Speech sounders devices to each detection loop of the fire alarm control panel.The addr essable sp eeach so under sh all be av ailable with an ingress protection rating of IP31 or IP65 and shall be available in red or white colour options.

2.08 (e) ADDRESSABE SOUNDER / FLASHER / SPEECH

The system sounder combined sounder and f lasher unit described previously shall be available in a

'voice enhance d' v ersion.The so under uni t sh all i ncorporate a m icroprocessor which has up t o 25 seconds of available storage space to be used for voice messages or a complex tone (for example, a bell tone in the event of alarm or supervisory condition).In addition to the voice messages above, an

8 Inch solenoid bell recording shall be provided as a standard complex tone. All the voice messages shall be s ynchronized across the det ection l oops by m eans of a r egular sy nchronisation si gnal generated by t he f ire al arm co ntrol panel . w ith t he v oice enhance d s ounder opt ion, i t sh all be

224

possible to mix both the standard sound signals, voice messages & complex tones. Up to 4 different sound signals, which are selected/configured via the PC software, shall be employed by the fire detection system. Configuration of sounder patterns shall not be carried out locally at individual sounders.A test of the message storage device, amplifier, power supply and tone generator 'piezo' within the voice enhanced sounder shall be carried out by the fire alarm control panel once an hour.

Should the sounder fail to produce the required tone quality of sound output, then a fault indication shall be pr ovided at the control panel. Sounders shall be ca pable of being tested for the conditions described abov e i n bot h t he quiescent and al arm st ate. I t sh all be p ossible t o co nnect up to 3 2 sounder/flasher/speech dev ices to each det ection l oop o f t he fire al arm co ntrol panel .The

Sounder/Flasher/Speech opt ion uni t sh all be av ailable with an i ngress protection r ating of I P31 or

IP65 and shall be available in red or white colours.

2.09 FIELD INTERFACE TRANSPONDERS

These devices shall be directly connected to the loop, four variants shall be available as standard, these being:

(i) 4 In / 2 Out interface unit

(ii) 1 In interface unit

(iii) 32 LED output interface unit

(iv) 12 Relay output Interface unit.

These units shall be self-contained wall mountable units, similar in finish to the main control panel.

(i)

4 In / 2 Out interface unit

Interface units shall be capable of accepting 4 input signals, 2 output signals. Dependent upon the specific application, input signals may be interpreted by the system as any of the following:

Fire signal input

Fault signal input

Supervisory signal input

Event signal input

The exact nature of which shall be selected by means of the commissioning software. These units will accept and or supply clean contact signals either normally open or normally closed (configurable)

OR switched voltage inputs from conventional detectors or MCP’s.The output contacts shall be rated at 30V / 1 amp. DC output of the unit shall be provided with single pole change over contacts for control of plant, door release units or power output to drive conventional bells, sounders etc. Both the outputs on t he interface sh all be individually pr ogrammable. External power su pply 12V / 24 V DC

• shall be pr ovided t o this unit A s w ith ot her ou tstations previously m entioned, i nterface uni ts will contain local processing in order to handle all signalling and l oop communications. Product shall be approved by VdS.

(ii)

1in interface unit

Interface units shall be capable of accepting 1 input signal. Dependent upon the specific application, input signals may be interpreted by the system as any of the following:

Fire signal input

Fault signal input

Supervisory signal input

Event signal input

225

The exact nature of which shall be selected by means of the commissioning software.These units will accept and or supply clean contact signals only, either normally open or normally closed

(configurable). No switched voltage inputs or outputs will be accepted.As with other outstations previously mentioned, interface units will contain local processing in order to handle all signalling and loop communications.

(iii) 32-LED output interface units

These interface units contain 32 outputs for triggering LEDs of e.g. mimic panels. Each output can be freely programmed with the commissioning software. The outputs are selectable as positive or negative signals. There shall be possibility to test the outputs/LEDs manually with e.g. a button.As with other outstations previously mentioned, interface units will contain local processing in order to handle all signalling and loop communications.

(iv) 12-Relay output interface units

These i nterface uni ts contain 12 cl ean r elays which ar e i ndividually pr ogrammable w ith t he commissioning software. All relays can be configured as NO or NC.

As with other outstations previously mentioned, interface units will contain local processing in order to handle all signalling and loop communications.

2.10 NETWORKING OF CONTROL PANELS

It shall be possible to network connect up to 31 controls as a secure network co nnection. A ll messages from a panel should be transmitted in both direction on the ring structure. Any wire-break or short-circuit on the ring shall not effect data transmission. The network shall be configurable so that single panels, groups of panels or all panels on the network operate the same site configured cause and effect fire plan. The network shall also be configured to allow master control from any one of the control panels on the network. To cover longer distance repeaters or fibre optical cable and converters can be used between two panels.The network shall be able t o accommodate intruder alarm panels.

There shall be ex tensive diagnostic functions on the panel to be u sed to localise faults caused by interference or wiring, Networking shall be capable of carrying out using a datacable e.g IBM type 1 or CAT5. The distance between each panel shall be standard 1200 meters and capable of extending upto 3000 meters using booster repeaters.

2.11 NETWORKED LCD OPERATING PANELS / REPEATER PANELS

The Repeat Panel shall be sited at the Rear Entrance, guard house or location where it is manned 24 hrs.. It shall provide system repeat facilities to repeat all of the liquid crystal display messages as well as the common indications. Repeat panel shall be interfaced for netwrok fire alarm control panles, designed for standardised display and operatio as per DIN EN 54 part 2 and D IN VDE 0833 part 2. Installation and co nnection to FACP shall be via the short circuit and open ci rcuit resistant essernet. System network. RS 485 interface or TTY interface for connecting remote printers, and fire brigade sh all be v ailable. T he r epeaters shall ha ve m inimum t hree co mmon relays freely programmable, monitored, potentila free upto 24 VDC.

2.12 BATTERIES :

Batteries shall be provided and shall be the dry sealed lead-acid type. The batteries shall have ample capacity. With primary power disconnected, to operate the fire alarm system for a period of 24

226

hours with an optional 72 hours battery backup. Following this period of operation via batteries. The batteries shall ha ve am ple ca pacity t o oper ate al l co mponents of t he sy stem,including al l al arm signalling devices in the total alarm mode for a minimum period of 30 minutes.

2.13 WIRING

All cables associated with Fire Alarm installation shall be of fire resistant 2 core 1.5 sq. mm twisted pair . Cables shall comply with BS 6207 Part 1. The cable is to BS 6207: Part 1 having, Typically no more than 2 cores each core having 1.5 sq. mm cross sectional area, A red cover sheath (preferred for al arm appl ications), H aving co ntinuous metal sh eath enca psulation, Fi re r esistant tested t o

BS6387 categories CWZ.

3.0 PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATIONS

The en tire fire al arm sy stem sh all be i nstalled i n acco rdance w ith D IN / B S E N54 S tandards a nd manufacturer’s approved shop drawings, written instructions and recommendations.

TESTING

Fire alarm system shall be t ested in accordance to applicable regulations and put into operation by the m anufacturer or hi s authorized representative i n t he pr esence o f e ngineer. Faul t and al arm conditions shall be simulated and all data and alarm indicators checked with full events recorded on system printer according to the testing procedure.

227

SPECIFICATIONS FOR VENTILATION WORKS

1.0

INTRODUCTION:

This specification has been prepared for procurement of Fans, Blowers,, as required for the proposed building.

2.0 SCOPE:

This specification co vers the desi gn, m anufacturing, i nspection, testing, pai nting, pac king, forwarding and supply of Blowers, Pressurization Fans, Ventilation Fans, Axial Flow Fans &

Air Washer U nits, co mplete w ith Motors, ba se frames, encl osures, shields etc., as per enclosed specifications &

Schedule of Quantities for Ventilation Fans & Blowers

It is not the intent to completely specify all details of design and construction, nevertheless the equipment shall conform to high standards of engineering, design and workmanship so that the ultimate intent of service for which the equipment is meant is met.

Erection o f e quipment shall not be i n v endor’s scope, how ever, sp ecific precautions to b e taken or pr ocedure t o be f ollowed, i f any , dur ing er ection sh all be cl early st ipulated and informed by vendor in advance.

3.0

PROJECT REQUIREMENTS & SITE CONDITIONS:

Site Conditions and Climatic Data:

Climatic Data:

Ambient temperature

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

: 50°C

: 4°C

Design air temperature

: 50°C

Minimum : 4°C

Altitude : 200M (above MSL)

Power Supply Conditions

High Voltage Side : 11 kV ±10%, 50Hz ±3%, 3 phase, combined voltage and frequency variation ±10%.

Low Voltage Side : 415 V ±10%, 50 Hz ±3%, 3 phase, 4 wire combined voltage and frequency variation ±10%

Control Voltage : 230 V ±10%, 50 Hz ±3%, 1 phase

4.0

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

4.1 Fan motor shall be 415 +10% volts, 50 cycles, 3 phase, Squirrel Cage Totally Enclosed Fan

Cooled Induction Motors with speed not exceeding 1000RPM.

4.2 Centrifugal fans shall be non-overloading type, AMCA certified, backward/forward curved and will g enerally co nform t o cl ass -I co nstruction unl ess specified ot herwise, and sh all b e complete with motor, belt drive, belt guard, motor mounting and vibration isolators.

4.3 All Axial Flow Fans shall be axial flow type with adjustable pitch blades and directly driven at speed not more than 970 RPM.

228

4.4 Vendor’s offer should include all charges of one visit for 2 days for supervision of erection and commissioning of fans & motors.

4.5 Vendor to enclose following documents along with the offer. o

List of deviations (if any). o

General Arrangement drawings of fans & blowers

5.0

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

5.1 Axial Flow Fans

All A xial Fl ow Fans shall be ax ial f low t ype with adj ustable pi tch bl ades, with the f ollowing features:

-

Fans shall be directly driven at speed not more than 970 RPM.

-

Fans shall be se lected for hi ghest e fficiency and for l ow noi se l evel. Fans sh all be statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be AMCA certified for sound power level & power consumption. a) Material

- Fans shall have GI frame with cast aluminium impellers having aerofoil section adjustable pitch blades.

- Fans shall hav e out let cones of heav y g auge MS sh eets duly pai nted w ith ch lorinated rubberised paint. b) Motors

- Fan motor shall be 415 +10% volts, 50 cycles, 3 phase, squirrel cage TEFC, suitable for indoor applications. Motors shall be especially designed for quiet operation at speed not exceeding 1440 rpm.

- Motor sh all be su pplied with st arters & acce ssories, i solation sw itch et c all encl osed i n indoor housing. c) Installation at site

- Fan frame shall be suitable for grouting in the wall.

- The Contractor shall include supply and fixing of all the material that may be required to complete the installation in all respects.

5.2 Centrifugal Fans

Centrifugal fans shall be non-overloading type, backward/forward curved and w ill conform to class of co nstruction as specified and sh all be complete with m otor, belt dr ive, bel t g uard, motor mounting and v ibration isolators. Radial flow blowers shall be ov erloading type where static pressure will be a djusted with volume control damper provided with blower. Fans shall be AMCA certified for sound & air flow. a) Material

229

- Housing and gauges of sheet st eel use d i n t he housing sh all be for C lass I or cl ass II construction. Inside an d out side su rface o f fan ca sing and i mpeller s hould be sp ray galvanized. Outdoor installation shall be provided with drain & inspection window.

- Fan wheel shall be back ward/forward curved non-overloading type. Fan w heel, housing and the shaft shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Backward curved fans shall be of aerofoil blades.

- Shaft shall be constructed of SAE 1040/EN*/C-40 steel (unless specified otherwise) turned, ground and polished. Shaft shall not pass through first critical speed through full range of specified fan speeds.

- Bearings shall be of the sleeve/ball bearing type mounted directly on t he fan housing.

Bearing shall be designed specifically for quiet operation and shall be of self-aligning, grease pack, pillow block type.

- Drive to fan shall be provided through belts with pitch motor adjustable multi-speed variable pulley and an approved belt guard. Belts shall be of the oil resistant type. b) Motor

- Fan motor shall be 415 +10% volts, 50 cy cles, 3 phase, squirrel cage TEFC, with IP-53 protection. Motors shall be especially designed for quiet operation at speed not exceeding

1440 rpm.

- Motor sh all be su pplied with st arters & acce ssories, i solation sw itch et c all encl osed i n indoor housing. c) Installation at site

- The concrete foundation wherever required for the fans shall be prepared by the Owner as per t he d rawings supplied by t he V endor. H owever, t he V endoror shall su pply t he foundation bol ts, base -plate, v ibration el iminators etc., w herever r equired, and he sh all also ensure that all the above accessories are placed securely in proper position while the foundation is cast.

- Vibration isolation base for both fan and motor shall be built as an integral part and shall be mounted on co ncrete foundation through anti-vibration isolator having an ef ficiency of

90%.

- Fan inlet and outlet connections shall be by means of flexible fire retardant canvas connections. d) Testing

Fans shall be tested for the capacity, power consumption, noise level and vibration isolation and results shall conform to the approved data furnished by the Contractor.

5.3 Electrical System/ Motors a) General Arrangement of MCCs/ Panels

- Isolators and fused switches shall be suitably rated for duty and safe operation. Provision shall be m ade for padlocking in the 'OFF' position. All line terminals or connections shall be adequately shrouded. Where required for interlocking purposes, etc. auxiliary contacts shall be fitted for isolation of other circuits.

230

- Control circuits shall be connected phase to neutral unless specified otherwise, and phase circuit protected by HRC fuses.

- Start / Stop pushbuttons, selector switches and other control and indication devices shall be fitted to ensure safe plant operation. Stop pushbuttons shall have 'stay put' facilities to protect personnel and the equipment.

- Components & Wiring: o

All live components shall be mounted so that they are insulated from the metalwork forming the enclosure o

All internal wiring shall be arranged so that visual inspection and maintenance can be carried out. o

All internal wiring shall comply with the specification f or type and co lour c oding and shall be rated for the circuit duty. o

Not more than two conductors shall be connected to one terminal o

The ends of all wiring shall have an identification or reference number. o

Wiring following a common route shall be clipped, loomed together, or run in trunking o

All wiring f or external connections shall be br ought out to individual terminals on an accessible terminal block adjacent to the terminal point for external cables. o

External cable entries shall be via either undrilled gland plates or ISO metric tapped entries.

- Fuses o

All fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type and shall be mounted in approved type carriers with protection against contact with live parts. o

All f uses sh all be mounted i n an ea sily acce ssible posi tion but p rotected a gainst misuse. o

Each fuse or set of fuses shall have an identification or reference number.

- Earthing & Bonding o

All non-current carrying metal work which forms the package unit shall be bonded f or earth continuity to the main skid base. o

The minimum of two earth studs (M10) must be provided on the skid base, diagonally opposite to each other, for connection to the main plant earth system. o

Earthing and bonding shall generally be in accordance with IS 3043. The entire earthing system shall be of PVC insulated, unarmoured, single core aluminium conductor cable.

- Makes of all electrical components shall be as per Consultant / Purchaser’s recommendations. b) Motors

- Motors below 0.18 KW may be single phase, all others shall be 3-phase. Motor rated above 160 KW shall be high voltage motors.

231

- Motors of less than 0.18 KW and single phase may be switched direct. Over-load protection will not be required, but shall be protected by a suitably rated HRC fuse or miniature circuit breaker.

- Motors of 0.18 KW and above shall be controlled by a starter which shall be complete with suitable overlaod relays and HRC fuses for short-circuit protection.

- All guards necessary to afford protection to personnel from electrical apparatus and moving par ts shall be t o t he appr opriate S tandard ( or ot her r ecognized N ational or

International S tandards) and m eet t he r equirements of t he Fac tories Acts or ot her relevant regulations and requirements of the locality in which the equipment is installed. The guards shall be capable of being removed without disturbing adjacent equipment.

- Rating plates, together with other instruction plates, shall be affixed to equipment and shall be of an appr oved non -corrodible m aterial, st amped o r en graved t o maintain legibility.

5.4 Painting

All t he f ans shall be pr ovided with ant i r ust co atings with Zi nc Chromate or R ed Lead. I n addition, all exterior piping and surfaces open to view shall be provided with synthetic enamel paint of approved shade.

SPECIFICATION FOR SOLAR WATER HEATER

Solar Water Heating System with Type 2 for warm regions with Solar flat plate collector conforming to

IS: 12933 ( part 1) w ith am endment N o 1 and I S:12933 ( Part 2) /2003 s uitable for i nlet w ater w ith chlorine and fluorine content up to 300 ppm and supply hot water at the outlet.

The so lar water heat er system sh all m eet t he requirement of heating of the water t o m aintain the temperature all through the winter season on average winter clear day and particularly for a clear day in December and January.

The solar water heating system shall give an output temperature of 60 deg C on year round average basis. The system will be thermosyphonic type.

Solar water heating system comprising of solar flat plate collector, collector’s stand assembly, stainless steel insulated hot water storage tank with heat exchanger and various other components.

Solar flat plate collector component shall have: -

(a) Solar flat plate collector, cover plate made of toughened glass

(b) Sheet for absorber made of copper

(c) Absorber made of copper sheet and copper tubes.

SOLAR FLAT PLATE COLLECTOR SPECIFICATIONS: Solar flat plate collectors shall have various components as under:

COVER PLATE:

232

Cover plate shall be of toughened glass having thickness 4.0 mm (min) conforming to section – 1 of

IS: 12933 (Part-2)/2003. The solar transmittance of the cover plate shall be minimum 85 percent at near normal incidence.

COLLECTOR BOX:

Collector box shall be m ade of aluminium sections only. Type, grade, size, workmanship and f inish of t he m aterial t o be us ed sh all be as per se ction – 2 of I S: 12933 ( Part-2)/2003. T he m inimum thickness of aluminium sections shall be as under: -

(i) Channel section for sides 1.6 mm

(ii) Sheet for bottom 0.7 mm

(iii) Support for glass retaining 1.2 mm

(iv) Sheet for entire body 1.0 mm

ABSORBER:

Absorber shall consist of riser, header and sheet for absorber. The Diameter of header shall be 25.4

+ / - 0.5 mm and thickness 0.71 mm. The Diameter of riser shall be 12.5 + / - 0.5 mm and thickness

0.56 mm and made of copper only. The distance between the risers from center to center shall be

120 mm. Type, grade, size, workmanship of the material to be used shall be as per section-3 of IS:

12933 (Part-2)/2003. Riser and header assembly designed for working pressure up to 24.5 K Pa (2.5 kg / Sq cm) shall be tested for leakage at a minimum hydraulic pressure of 490 K Pa (5 Kg / Sq cm).

SHEET FOR ABSORBER:

Sheet for abso rber sh all be m ade o f co pper only of t hickness 0.28 mm. Type, grade, s ize, workmanship and finish of material to be used shall be as per section – 3 of IS 12933 (Part-2) / 2003.

A sample piece of the absorber having minimum area of 400 Sq cm shall be heated in an oven at temperature of 175 degree C for 2 hours. After heating, the sample shall be taken out from the oven and cooled at room temperature. The cooled sample shall be inspected visually for damages, if any.

There shall not be any appearance of blistering / rupture/peeling off of the coated / painted surface and of weakening of the bonding between absorber sheet and risers / headers.

COLLECTOR BOX INSULATION:

Insulation shall be provided at back and sides. Thermal Resistance (R) of insulation material shall be minimum 0.96 Sq m degrees C/W for back insulation and m inimum 0.48 sq m degree C/W for side insulation. T his shall be derived af ter determining thermal conductivity (K) value at 100 degree C mean temperature in accordance with IS : 3346. Collector box insulation shall conform to Sec. 4 of

IS: 12933 (Part-2) / 2003

GASKETS AND GROMMETS:

Gaskets and Grommets shall conform to Sec 5 of IS:12933 (Part-2) / 2003 (EPDM with inside/outside locking collar).

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Flat Plate Collector

I Collector size

II Absorber area of the collector

III No. of Collectors

Weight of the collector

2033 X 1033 X 100 mm Approx. 2.13 Sq Mtr area

> 1.92 Sq.Mtr

One 38 Kg.

233

IV Water Output

Heat Carrier content

V

VI

VII

VII

IX

X

Absorber Material

Coating

Construction of Absorber

Header & Riser pipe material

Header & Riser pipe size

Bonding : Raiser pipe to Fins

XI Bonding : Raiser pipe to Header Simple brazing

XII Absorbtivity of the Collector

XIII Collector frame

XIV Glass

XV Back Sheet

XVI Glass Beading and sealing

Rated LPD at 60º C (Avg.) 1.3 Liters

Copper based sheet

Special Photon Blue coating sheet/Fins

Full single sheet

Copper

25.4 mm and 12.5 mm respectively.

Ultrasonic welding/Laser welding

XVII Grommets

XVIII End Connection

XIX Collector – Mounting structure

XX Frame corners sealing

> 95%, Emmissivity – 0.2,

Aluminium with pure polyester powder coating.

4 mm toughened, low iron, transitivity > = 85%

Aluminium riveted and sealed with silicone sealant.

With breather plug.

EPDM with 35% rubber content with top aluminium retainer an gle, w ith S S se lf tapping screws.

EPDM with inside / outside locking collar

4 mm thick brass flanges with EPDM gaskets

Mild Steel with pure polyester powder coating.

Sealed from inside with silicone sealant

SUPPORT STRUCTURE:

Rigid support are given for the collectors, and piping (wherever necessary) using MS angle 40 x 40 x

5 mm or other sections as per site requirement. It will be suitably grouted all as per manufactures design.

CIVIL WORK:

Civil work of PCC in the ratio (1:2:4) type B-1 by using 20 mm graded stone aggregate for grouting of the support structure for solar collector, tanks, piping shall be provided. All mild steel angle iron work / supports will be provided with two coats of synthetic enamel paint over one coat of red oxide primer.

INSULATED HOT WATER STORAGE TANK:

i Material ii Size of the Tank iii Tank Type iv Welding

Stainless Steel 304

300 Ltrs Capacity.

Tanks w ith se paration par tition for t he regulated supply of water, 50 liters each.

Horizontal

TIG ( Tungsten I nert gas Welding) / Linear W elding and Resistance Welding.

PUF (Poly urethane foam) v Thermal Insulating Material vi Thickness of Insulation vii Tank cladding viii Tank design

50 mm

SS 430 Stainless Steel

Suitable for withstanding 1 kgf / Sq.cm (Atmospheric)

Pressure

The cold water tank is required to ensure continues feed water supply into the system at a suitable head. Position for placing of cold water tank has been shown in drawings. In case suitable head is

234

not available, the height of cold water tank be raised at site as required and cost thereof is deemed to be included in the quoted rates and nothing extra is admissible on this account.

MATERIAL:

Insulated ho t w ater st orage tank sh all be non pressure type and m ade o f st ainless steel grade

(X04Cr19Ni9 or X07Cr18Ni9 of IS: 1570 (Part 5) / 1985, TIG welded.

INSULATION:

Solar water heating system (SWHS) up to and including 500 LPD shall be insulated with 50 mm CFC

Free PUF insulation of 40 Kg/meter cube or higher density. PUF insulation could be pre extruded type fitted with FRP exterior cladding shall be with 22 SWG aluminium cladding.

SYSTEM INTER CONNECTING PIPING:

G. I. Pipes medium Grade ISI Marked ( IS 1239) duly insulated with 9 mm nitrile rubber with 26 SWG aluminium cladding, EPDM hose pipes can also be used for systems up to and including 500 Ltrs Per day.

Collector stand assembly shall be made of MS angle of size 40x40x5 mm duly pretreated and stove enameled with black colour paint.

The capacity of makeup tank shall be 5 liters.

TEMPERATURE G AUGE: D ial t ype, dul y ca librated and su itable for temperature range from 0 degree C to 120 degree C.

STRAINER

:

:

:

’Y’ Type

Cast iron

Filtration of suspended material

(a) Type

(b) Material

(c) Purpose

CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION: As per the system requirement for effective monitoring and trouble free operation of the system one No. temperature gauge and o ne strainer in the cold water feed line are provided. Valves/Non return valves shall be provided for inlet, outlet and make up tank in the system.

General arrangement drawing shall clearly show all the parts of the system such as solar flat plate collectors, collector stand assembly, stainless steel insulated hot water storage tank complete with stainless steel heat exchanger, sa crificial anode, r equired, internal and ex ternal piping, t ank st and assembly, various valves, pressure gauges, temperature gauges, and their fixing arrangements, shall be got approved by PM before installation.

TESTING & TAKEOVER OF EQUIPMENT:

(a) The installation shall be taken over after it has been commissioned and tested and the Engineer incharge is satisfied that: -

(i) The system, equipment and accessories provided are as per contract specifications.

(ii) All water heating system, equipment and accessories are mechanically sound and are of adequate structural strength and the system is in conformity with the specifications.

(iii) All pipes, fitting etc are of specified make, quality & design.

235

(iv) The contractor sh all su bmit the i nstruction, manuals, pam phlets, l iterature o f t he e quipment installed at site in triplicate.

(v) List of service outlets

(b) Testing of Solar Water Heating System shall be ca rried out at the peak winter during Dec and

Jan.

The firms shall furnish complete and sa tisfactory type test reports for each size/type of so lar flat plate collector as per contract specification from any govt. laboratory to the concerned Director (QA).

Type test reports shall be complete with authenticated drawing giving complete details of the various component used in the solar flat plate collector. Type test reports shall include all the tests listed in

IS: 12933 (Part 1) with amdt. No. 1 (excluding test requirements as per Clause 7.2.7 and 7.2.8 of ls) and IS:12933 (Part 2) / 2003 and also the tests included on various components of solar flat plate collector as per IS:12933 (Part 2)/2003.

All civil work related to installation will done by the contractors

DETAILED SPECIFICATION PERTAINING TO PLUMBING

PLUMBING: Cold water plumbing from cold water tank to solar collector will be provided. Emulated header will run along each service shaft with reducing diameter from top to bottom floor. A hot water supply will be given independent of geyser connection.

INSULATION ON PIPE: G. I. Pipe of header and service connection shall be i nsulated with nitrile rubber 9 mm thick with 26 SWG aluminium cladding system upto 500 LPD. Alternatively nitrile rubber sleeve 4 mm thick with equivalent thermal conductivity may be provided.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PASSENGER / SERVICES LIFT

1.0 GENERAL

The w ork shall be proceeded w ith, t he preparation o f t he g eneral ar rangement dr awings based on the site/building plans handed over for the purpose and submission of the same for approval of the Architects according to the time Schedule specified.

Detailed drawings of all items/components, which are to be provided for in the construction by ot her ag encies such as Main C ontractor f or C ivil and asso ciated w orks or E lectrical

Contractor, shall also be furnished well ahead of the requirement.

2.0 Project information / data UOA FCI Lecture theatre complex, Delhi Police.

3.0 FIRE RESCUE DEVICE.

3.1 All l ifts shall b e suitable / c ompatible for i ntegration w ith f ire al arm sy stem si gnals and B uilding M anagement sy stem. The el evator sh all be ca pable of e ntering i nto

'Emergency F ire M ode S ervice ' upon r eceiving a sig nal f rom f ire al arm sy stem. The wiring from lift controller to Fire Alarm system shall be done by the Fire Alarm contractor.

3.2 Monitoring the ON / OFF / status (position, direction, emergency alarm, inspection drive) of all Lifts from the Building Management System shall be through potential free contacts and a separate terminal block within the lift control panel which shall be provided by the

236

Lift Contractor including wiring. The wiring from the lift controller to BMS shall however be done by the Contractor for BMS.

3.3 In eac h bank o f l ifts o ne l ift sh all b e designated and fitted up as “Fireman’s Li ft” and perform fireman’s drive.

3.4 “FIRE MAN SWITCH” shall be pr ovided to ground all the lifts and us e the designated

“FIRE LIFT” as per local statutory regulation.

3.5 Lifts shall ignore current position of operation and travel to ground floor and stop there with door s open by a ov erriding co mmand under t he Emergency Fire m ode sy stem.

Only the lift designated as Fireman’s' lift shall be in operation for the use of fire fighting personnel.

3.6 The offer shall include identification of Fireman’s’ Lift in each group/pair of lifts installed in different locations, having Break glass panel and other specific functional requirement.

4.0 Safety Requirements as per CVC guidelines

Elevators offered s hould co mply w ith t he guidelines of C VC R eport for sa fety i n public buildings. (See attached Annexure –1)

5.0 LIFTS

5.1 Lift Car

5.1.1 Car Frame

The C ar frame sh all co nsist o f s uitable S tructural sh ape, properly br aced an d se curely fastened together.

5.1.2 Car Enclosure

Car enclosure for Passenger elevator shall be of SS No.4 Hairline Finish with handrail and for S ervice el evator i t sh all be o f V andal pr oof st ainless steel f inish. T he sa mples has to shown and approval to be obtained. Mock up car is required to be assembled for approval.

5.1.3 Car Platform

The Lift Car Platform shall consist of an out side metal frame, which will have steel sheet.

The st eel sh eet flooring sh all be co vered with G ranite T ile flooring f or p assenger l ift & A l chequered plate for service lift.

The platform shall rest on isolations supported on an ancillary steel frame fastened to the car frame, thus forming an isolated cushion between the Car and the Steel Car frame.

5.1.4 Car Door

The Car entrance shall be provided with a Centre Opening Power Door, which shall be hung on hangers with a steel track and guided at the bottom by non-metallic shoes sliding in the

237

sill gr oove. T he Landing door s shall hav e f ire r esistance o f t wo hour s. F or passe nger elevators the inside surface of the Car door shall be SS No.4 Hairline Finish and for Service elevator it shall be vandal proof stainless steel finish. Door operation shall be with A.C motor and Variable Voltage Variable frequency control.

5.1.5 Car Light Fittings and fan

The lift Car shall be provided with Compact fluorescent light (CFL) fitting-direct lighting, and

300 mm sweep axial flow fan

5.2 Lift Operation

5.2.1 The type of operation offered shall be of Selective Collective Control with grouping as specified i n t he “ Specific Requirements - Lifts” ( with one button i n C ar for ea ch landing l evel se rved and u p a nd d own but tons at the i ntermediate l andings and a single button at such terminal landing.)

5.2.2 All stops registered by the momentary pressure of the Car buttons shall be made in the order i n w hich t he l andings are r eached af ter t he b uttons have been pr essed, irrespective of the sequence in which calls were registered.

5.2.3 The t ype o f o peration o ffered sh all al so co ver t he pr ovision for operation w ith attendant.

5.2.4 Provision for manual raising or lowering of lift in case of emergency shall be made.

5.2.5 A h ome l anding sh all be est ablished at t he main floor to w hich t he C ar sh all automatically return when all calls have been cleared and park.

5.2.6 Provision shall also be made in the controller and wherever necessary for the lift(s) to directly travel to ground floor on any signal from Fire Alarm Control panel having lead to l ift m achine r oom, aut omatically, i gnoring di rection o f t ravel and other pending commands as per special condition of the Bid.

5.2.7 The Li ft c ontrol sy stem sh all al so h ave t he following f eatures in ad dition to t hose otherwise specified in the Bid.

5.2.7.1 Lift ca r sh all be pr ovided w ith Loa d Weighing D evice ( LWD). This shall se nse overload (110%) and prevent start of the car in that load condition by keeping its door open and s ounding the buzzer in the car. It shall also by pass further hall calls if the car is loaded to 80% of designed capacity.

5.2.7.2 Redundancy & reliability for efficient functioning of Lifts of a group in case of any one or m ore l ift(s) i s / ar e out o f op eration due to m aintenance or otherwise without sacrificing any features of the functioning lifts

5.2.7.3 Electronic chime (gong) and flashing of hall lantern to indicate arrival of a particular

Lift car at landing (Not applicable for Simplex).

5.2.7.4 Cancellation of false calls using infrared light curtain in the lift car door or any other sensing device

5.2.7.5 Waiting T ime Optimization: The G roup co ntrol ( Not ap plicable for S implex) sh all monitor l anding ca ll waiting t imes, u nderstand t he traffic pattern and allocate ca lls dynamically bet ween the elevators to ensure t hat t he overall w aiting t ime is

238

reduced and maximum waiting time is kept within limits. Up peak shall be detected by the group control and elevators are dispatched to the ground floor.

5.2.7.6 Door Open Time: The door opening time at any floor shall be capable of being set at site depending on the site conditions.

5.3 Car Operating Panel

Two (2) number car-operating panels one on either side of car shall be provided for

Elevators. The C ar operating p anel sh all be full h eight, flush mounted i n t he C ar enclosure and fitted with the following:

5.3.1 A bank of buttons to correspond to the various landing levels served.

5.3.2 A ‘Door Close’ button and a ‘Door Open’ button, An Alarm button shall be provided.

The door open button shall be capable of reversing the doors while closing.

5.3.3 The p anel sh all al so i nclude a no n-stop bu tton ( pass) for by passi ng l anding ca lls, which shall however remain registered until they are answered.

5.3.4 The f ollowing pr ovision sh all be c overed i n t he oper ating panel f or use o f t he attendant.

5.3.4.1 Key operating switch for attendant operation.

5.3.4.2 Up and down light jewels for indicating the direction of the Car, set to travel.

5.3.5 The following shall also be included in the car-operating panel

5.3.5.1 Braille notations for the following buttons;

i.) Floor buttons

ii.) Up & down buttons

iii.) Door open & Door close buttons

iv.) Alarm

v.) Intercom

5.3.6 Lift Announcement System – Shall be included for Passenger Elevator only

5.4 Call Registered Lights

Each hall button faceplate in Stainless Steel shall be provided with registered lights, which shall illu minate w hen Corresponding but ton i n t he faceplate i s shortly pr essed ( Luminous buttons) and remain illuminated until call is answered.

5.5 Car Position Indicators

Liquid Crystal Display shall be provided in each elevator Car that will indicate the landing at which the Car is stopping or passing

5.6 Hall Position Indicator

5.6.1 Liquid Crystal Display shall be provided in main lobby indicating the position of the Car in the hoist way.

5.6.2 LED Scroll car position indicator shall be provided at all other landings indicating the position of the Car in the hoist way.

5.7 Car and Hoist way Door Operation

239

Doors on t he C ar a nd at e ach hoist w ay l anding ( Centre opening pow er door s) sh all be operated quietly and smoothly by an Electric Operator, which shall open the Car door and hoist way door simultaneously. All electric contact for the Car door shall be pr ovided which shall prevent el evator m ovement aw ay f rom t he l anding unl ess the d oor i s in t he cl osed condition.

Each hoist way door shall be equipped with a positive electro mechanical interlock and auxiliary door-closing device so that the elevator can be op erated only after interlock circuit is established. In ca se o f p ower i nterruption or failure o f t he op erator, i t sh all b e possible to open the doors manually from within the Car.

5.8 Door Safety

The Car doors shall be provided with at least 1800mm high infrared light curtain to instantly stop the closing of the doors on sensing an obstruction and to retract. The door system shall also have an electronic door close limiter

5.9 Door Hangers and Tracks

Steel hangers and tracks at each hoistway entrance shall be provided with track rollers to ensure smooth operation of the doors. Adjustable ball bearing rollers (anti - lift rollers) shall take up-thrust of the doors.

5.10 Ropes

The Car hoist ropes shall be steel of suitable size, construction and number as per IS14665 to ens ure t he pr oper oper ation of t he el evator and g ive sa tisfactory w earing qualities.

Governor ropes shall be o f Steel. All ropes shall be s pecially designed and constructed for elevator application. The minimum factor of safety in rope capacity shall be 10.

5.11 Safety Device and Governor

The sa fety dev ice sh all be of progressive t ype sa fety g ear and mounted on t he bo ttom members of t he C ar f rame or o therwise as per m anufacturers specification an d sh all be operated by an over speed governor located over the hoist way. The safety device shall be provided to stop the Car whenever excessive descending speed is attained with means to cut off power from the motor and apply the brake prior to application of the safety device.

5.12 Guide Rails & Fastenings

Steel ‘T’ shape solid guide rails with ends tongued and grooved shall be provided for the car and co unter w eight. T hey sh all be er ected plumb an d fastened s ecurely t o t he h oistway framing by heavy steel brackets.

5.13 Guide shoes

The car and counter weight guide shoes shall be of sliding type.

5.14 Counter Weights

The counter weights shall be provided as per IS standards.

240

5.15 Buffers

Suitable buffers shall be provided for car and Counter Weight.

5.16 Machine Room

There will be machine room.

5.17 Machine

Gear m achine w ith A C per manent m agnet sy nchronous motor. T he machine sh all b e mounted in the machine room.

5.18 Levelling Accuracy - ± 5 mm

5.19 Automatic Rescue Device

The lift safety mechanisms shall include the provision of Automatic Rescue Device

(ARD) to rescue the stranded lift passengers in the event of a power failure, operated on dry maintenance - batteries of required c apacity t o co ntinuously m onitor t he normal p ower supply i n t he m ain el evator co ntroller and activate r escue op eration by which t he l ift is brought to the nearest landing and doors remain open.

5.19.1 Battery for the Emergency Battery Operated Power Supply

5.19.2 The battery shall be of “sealed -Maintenance free type and conform with IS/BS.

5.19.3 The c apacity o f t he battery i s such t hat w hen fully ch arged sh ould b e ca pable operating lighting fixtures and all alarm bells for a period of at least half (1/2) hour.

5.20 Power Supply

415V 3 P hase 50 H ertz A lternate C urrent and S ingle P hase 2 30 V 50 H ertz A lternating

Current will be m ade available at a convenient point in the top most landing with separate switch fuse unit for 3 phase & single phase.

6.0 Scaffolding work

All the related scaffolding for the erection of lifts is in the scope of lift vendor only.

It should be included in the cost of the tender.

7.0 SCOPE OF WORK

Complete i n all r espects including obt aining C learances/Approvals/ and l icense from l ift

Authorities of all items.

241

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF LIFTS

Sl.

No

Particulars Passenger Lift

1

Specification

Lift Type

Elevator with

Machine room

2 Capacity

3 Number of Lifts

4 Number of

Floors

5 Floor Height

6 Required Min.

8

Speed

7 Specify Speed

Travel

9 Head room height

10 Lift pit depth

11 No. of Stops

12 Shaft Size

13 Lift car Size

…………m/s

____ in metres

..…………mm

..…………mm

……..mm (Width) x

…….. mm (Depth)

……..mm (Width) X

……..mm (Depth) X

……….mm (Height)

14 Car door Size ……….mm (Width) x …….mm (Height)

1 No.

15 Car Door Type

16 Car fittings

.

17 Hoist way door

18 Machine Room

19 Indicator in Car and Landing

20 Car enclosure

& Door

21 Intercom

22 Car floor finish

Please refer

Generalspecification

242

Remarks

23 Drive &

Machine

24 Control &

Operation

25 Load weighing

Device with by pass function.

26 Car

Emergency

Light ,Alarm

Simplex

A load-weighing device to be provided which senses the load. Facility to be provided for bypassing registered landings call by a car loaded more than

80%.

Emergency Battery operated power supply (EBOPS) for light, for half an hour alarm to be provided with electric power supply to the light in the car, when the

Main power supply is not available. The

Operation to be automatic and no need of manual intervention to be required.

Automatic accurate levelling of car, after stopping at a floor should take place.

27 Accurate

Relevelling,

Automatic

28 Fireman Drive Provision for Fireman drive to be made to bring the car to the main floor immediately after the fire switch is operated. Thereafter the car is for operation by the rescue

29 Full length infra red safety light curtain

30 False call cancelling

31 Hall lanterns & gong: person. All landing calls are ignored. Lift answers one car call at a time. The rescue person controls opening and closing of doors at a floor. Returns to normal when fire switch is opened. Firefighter switch

Drive to be provided for One lift in each bank

Infra - red operated doors safety system

To be provided. The Light Curtain to consist of infra – red light beams passing between Car Door Entrances

Cancelling of all car calls to be provided

If there is lift movement without transfer of people at Landings.

32 Car Door Lock To be Provided

33 Variable door To be Provided opening time

34 Car Fan

35 Car Light

300 mm sweep axial flow fan

CFL fitting –direct lighting to minimum

50 lux at car sill level shall be provided

243

36 Door open / door close functions in car

37 Speaker for music/ announcement

38 Car operating

Panel

39 Automatic rescue device

40 Full collective logic

Door open / door close buttons to be provided in the Car operating panel

The lift announcement system should announce the floor numbers and some special messages in the lift itself by using a speaker. The unit should provide music when no floor announcement or special messages are to be given. When the lift reaches any floor then this unit should give that particular floor announcement and should continue to play the music from wherever it has left.

2 nos. of Car operating panel (COP) per lift inside the car on either side of the door with Braille letters.

In case of power failure, the elevator car has to move to the nearest floor enabling the passenger to exit safely.

Full collective control system to be provided to felicitate the optimum function of the Elevator. Here then lift will accept the car and landing calls in both directions

To be provided 41 Stainless steel signal fixtures

42

43 Battery operated emergency alarm bell

44 Zoning of

Elevators

45 Home floor parking selection

• During priority service, the car should answer the nearest car call and return to Normal service.

• The selected option will be advised on finalization of order

To attract attention of the lift in charge for rescue operations in case of power failure / emergency situations

-

The floor that requires maximum service can be selected for home floor parking

Selection. Whenever there is no call the lift will come to that selected floor and will wait.

46 Individual fan on/off switch/button

To be provided

47 2 Hrs fire rated Provided

244

door

Note:-

The vendor sh all o btain al l st atutory cl earances f rom t he co ncerned

Departments required for operations of Lift in the premises prior to handing over the

Lift.

245

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS ELECTRICAL ITEMS

S.N. Item Description Makes

1

2

LT PANEL BOARD

HT PANEL BOARD

AMBIT / ADVANCE / ADLEC / TRICOLITE / SPC

ELECROTECH

SCHNEIDER / SIEMENS / GE / L&T

3

4

5

6

TRANSFORMER

MCCB / MCB / DB

MEASURING

INSTRUMENTS

CONTACTORS

GE / VOLT-AMP / CGL / SCHNEIDER

SCHNEIDER/GE/SIEMENS/LEGRAND/HAGER/ABB

MECON / CONZERV / AE / ELECTRA

SIEMENS / L&T / GROUP SCHNEIDER

(TELEMECHANIQUE)

POLYCAB / FINOLEX / KEI / RR KABLE

POLYCAB / FINOLEX / KEI / RR KABLE

7

8

HT CABLES

LT CABLES & WIRES

9 TELEPHONE CABLE POLYCAB / FINOLEX / KEI / RR KABLE

10 CO-AXIAL CABLE RG-6

11

CABLE GLANDS

(DOUBLE

COMPRESSION)

POLYCAB / FINOLEX / KEI / RR KABLE

GRIPWELL / COMET / POLYCAB

12 CABLE TRAY

13

14

15

MS CONDUIT AND

ACCESSORIES

PVC CONDUIT AND

ACCESSORIES

SWITCH, POWER

SOCKET, RJ11, RJ45

OUTLET, TV SOCKET

16 LIGHT FIXTURES

OBO / SLOTCO / PILCO/ STEEL WAYS / ELECTRA

POWER / CTM

BEC / AKG

BEC / POLYPACK / PRECISION / AKG

CRABTREE / MK/ NORTH-WEST / LEGRAND

17

CEILING/WALL/EXHAUST

FANS

18 CAT-6 CABLE

PHILIPS / WIPRO / BAJAJ / CROMPTON

CROMPTON GREAVES / USHA / BAJAJ / ORIENT /

KHAITAN

POLYCAB / FINOLEX / D-LINK / LEGRAND

19 CONDUIT ACCESSORIES SHARMA SALES/ AKG

20

SOLAR WATER HEATER TATA BP/ SOLCROME/ INTERSOLAR

DG SET

DIESEL ENGINE

21. ALTERNATOR & AVR

23

LEAD ACID BATTERY

24 MS PIPE

CUMMINS / KIRLOSKAR / PERKIN / VOLVO

STAMFORD / KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC / LEROY

SOMER

EXIDE / STANDARD / AMARON

ITC / GST / JINDAL / SAIL / TATA

246

25. AMF RELAY

26 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

27 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

28 ALUMINIUM GRILLS

29 VENTILATION FANS

30 LIFTS

31 DUCT

AVK / L&T / SIEMENS

ZENITH / MINIMAX / NEWAGE

HONEY WELL / ESSAR / JOHNSON

CONTROL/SIEMENS

CARRIER / UNISTAR

NICOTRA/COMEFRI/ KRUGER

KONE / OTIS / MITSUBISHI / JOHNSON /

SCHINDLER

DUCTOFAB/ROLASTAR/ZECO/DUSTECH

Note : a) Above makers of materials are approved subject to their meeting the tender specification & site r equirements. Contractor how ever sh all seek approval of specific make be fore commencement of work by submitting the technical detail.

b) For any item not covered in the list, the contractor shall get the make & sample approved before procurement. c) C ontractor w ill be r esponsible t o ensu re t he q uality of pr oducts listed i n appr oved l ist of makes/brands. Contractor will have to replace the defective and su b-standard materials at his own cost.

247

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement